2014 TL Owner's Manual (Unlinked) - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/K41414/K41414OM.pdf · 2014 TL Owner’s Manual ... Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right,

2014 TLOwner’s Manual

(Unlinked)

This document may not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web use. This is due to changes

in content and specifications of the vehicle that happen throughout the model year. This manual will be replaced with a

hyperlinked version at the end of the model year.

© 2013 American Honda Motor Co., Inc. - All Rights Reserved P/N 00X31-TK4-6500

This owner’s manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This Owner’s Manual covers all models ofthe Acura TL. You may find descriptions ofequipment and features that are not on yourparticular model.

Images throughout this owner’s manual(including the front cover) representfeatures and equipment that are available onsome, but not all, models. Your particularmodel may not have some of these features.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

Please contact a dealer to order anymanuals that you may require.

Owner’s Identif ication

For Canadian Owners:

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

13/04/02 19:10:57 31TK4640_001

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your vehicle, otherproperty, or the environment.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the Maintenance Minder shown inthe instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while itpreserves your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep inmind that your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the manysystems unique to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfactionand will be pleased to answer any questions and concerns.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2014 Acura TL was a wise investment. Itwill give you years of driving pleasure.

Introduction

i

TM

13/08/08 16:42:02 31TK4650_002

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deploymentor hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 secondsor less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

How various systems in your vehicle were operating;Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by theEDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifyingdata routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. Inaddition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, canread the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with thepermission of the vehicle owner.

Introduction

ii

12/07/20 10:29:42 31TK4640_003

－

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.

Service Diagnostic RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The datacan be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It mayalso be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.

California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention ActThe airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials specialhandling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/

WARNING:

Introduction

iii

12/07/20 10:29:46 31TK4640_004

－－

－

－－

－

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

on the vehicle.preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of

three signal words: , , or .These signal words mean:

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

Safety LabelsSafety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety SectionInstructions

A Few Words About Safety

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

iv

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

12/07/20 10:29:55 31TK4640_005

(fluid capacities and tire pressures)

(main controls)

(seat belts, SRS, and child protection)

(indicators, gauges, multi-information display, dashboard, and steering column)

( )

(fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading)

(engine and transmission operation)

(minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)

(flat tire, jump starting, overheating, and fuses)

(vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls)

(warranty and contact information)

(how to order)

climate control, audio, steering wheel, security, cruise control, HomeLink , and other convenience items

Contents

................................................................................................................................................Index . I

..................................................Service Information Summary . last page

...............................................................................................Your Vehicle at a Glance . 3

............................................................Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

.......Instruments and Controls . 61

..............Features . 225

.......................................................................Before Driving . 467

.........................................................................................Driving . 485

.................................................Maintenance . 529

........................................Taking Care of the Unexpected . 581

..............................................Technical Information . 611

.......................Warranty and Client Relations (U.S. and Canada only) . 629

..................................................................................Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) . 633

IND

EX

1

12/07/20 10:30:04 31TK4640_006

A convenient reference to thesections in this manual.

A quick reference to the maincontrols in your vehicle.

ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,and technical information.

Important information about theproper use and care of your vehicle’sseat belts, an overview of thesupplemental restraint system, andvaluable information on how toprotect children with child restraints.

A summary of the warrantiescovering your new vehicle, and howto contact us for any reason. Refer toyour warranty manual for detailedinformation.

How to order manuals and othertechnical literature.

A summary of the information youneed when you pull up to the fuelpump.

Explains the purpose of eachinstrument panel indicator and gauge,the multi-information display, andhow to use the controls on thedashboard and steering column.

This section covers several problemsmotorists sometimes experience,and details how to handle them.

The Maintenance Minder showsyou when you need to take yourvehicle to the dealer for maintenanceservice. There is also a list of thingsto check and instructions on how tocheck them.

The proper way to start the engine,shift the transmission, and park.

What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to loadluggage and other cargo.

How to operate the climate controlsystem, the audio system, and otherconvenience features.

Contents

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Driver and Passenger Safety

Instruments and Controls

Technical Information

Warranty and Client Relations(U.S. and Canada only)

Authorized Manuals(U.S. only)

Index

Service Information Summary

Features

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Maintenance

Driving

Before Driving

Overview of Contents

2

TM

12/07/20 10:30:19 31TK4640_007

＊

＊

＊

＊

: If equipped

Your Vehicle at a GlanceY

ourV

ehicleata

Glance

3

MIRROR CONTROLS

DRIVING POSITIONMEMORY SYSTEMBUTTONS

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

TRUNK RELEASEBUTTON

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS

MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

(P. 63)

(P. 9, 26)

A/T model with navigation system is shown.

PASSENGER’S FRONTAIRBAG

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

CLOCKAUDIO

COMPASS

AUXILIARY INPUTJACK

GAUGES (P. 76)(P. 78)

(P. 170)

(P. 206)

(P. 154)

(P. 389) (P. 215)

(P. 491)

(P. 397)(P. 391)(P. 235)

BLIND SPOT INFORMATIONSYSTEM (BSI) ALERTINDICATOR

(P. 145)

(P. 522)

HOMELINK BUTTONS(P. 404)

MOONROOF SWITCH(P. 210)

BSI ALERT INDICATOR

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

(P. 522)

(P. 470)

(P. 494)

(P. 226)

(P. 168)

FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASEBUTTON

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONMANUALTRANSMISSION

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKET(P. 215)

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKET

USB ADAPTER CABLE(P. 266, 275, 356, 367)

DRIVER’S FRONT AIRBAG(P. 9, 26)

(P. 472)

(P. 151)

13/08/08 16:42:12 31TK4650_008

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊＊＊

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.

Refer to the navigation system owner’s manual.If equipped

1 :2 :3 :4 : Switch location varies on models.

Your Vehicle at a Glance

4

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA) SYSTEMOFF SWITCH

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

INTERFACE DIAL

KEYLESS ACCESSREMOTE SLOT

ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON

IGNITION SWITCH

(P. 139, 143)

(P. 143)

MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY BUTTONS

(P. 401)

(P. 197)

(P. 184)

(P. 499)

(P. 525)PHONE BUTTON (P. 424)

(P. 138)

BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINKSYSTEM VOICE CONTROLBUTTONS

(P. 34)

PASSENGERAIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

(P. 511)

(P. 407)

(P. 79)

SELECTOR KNOB (P. 236)(P. 285)

(P. 425)

(P. 137)

(P. 145/169)

SEAT HEATER SWITCHESSEAT HEATER/VENTILATION BUTTONS

(P. 202)(P. 204)

VOICE CONTROLBUTTONS forNAVIGATION SYSTEM /BLUETOOTHHANDSFREELINKSYSTEM

BLIND SPOTINFORMATIONSYSTEM (BSI) OFFBUTTONHEADLIGHT WASHERBUTTON

STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENTS(P. 146)

HORN

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON (P. 145)

PADDLE SHIFTERS

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROL BUTTONS(P. 387)

A/T model is shown.: Models with keyless access

system

(P. 150)

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/FOG LIGHTS

3

2

4

2

2

3

2

2

1

2

13/08/08 16:42:21 31TK4650_009

－

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7

.......................................Seat Belts . 8...........................................Airbags . 9

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 14

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 155. Fasten and Position the

.............................Seat Belts . 166. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 18.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18...Additional Safety Precautions . 19

Additional Information About.......................Your Seat Belts . 20

..Seat Belt System Components . 20......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 21

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 22

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 23Additional Information About

...........................Your Airbags . 24......Airbag System Components . 24

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 26

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 30How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 32..How the SRS Indicator Works . 32

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 33

How the Passenger Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 34

.............................Airbag Service . 35...Additional Safety Precautions . 36

Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 37

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 37

All Children Should Sit in a.................................Back Seat . 38

The Passenger’s Front Airbag.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 38

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 40

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 40

...Additional Safety Precautions . 40Protecting Infants and Small

...................................Children . 42.......................Protecting Infants . 42

.........Protecting Small Children . 43.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 45....................Installing a Child Seat . 46

...............................With LATCH . 47.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 49

..............................With a Tether . 51...........Protecting Larger Children . 53

...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 53..................Using a Booster Seat . 54

When Can a Larger Child Sit in.........................................Front . 55

...Additional Safety Precautions . 56.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 57

...................................Safety Labels . 58

Driver and Passenger SafetyD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

5

12/07/20 10:30:43 31TK4640_010

－You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat, not the front seat. Infants andsmall children should be restrainedin a child seat. Larger childrenshould use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder belt until they can use thebelt properly without a booster seat

(see pages ).

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

Engaging in mobile phoneconversation or other activities thatkeep you from paying close attention

to the road, other vehicles andpedestrians could lead to a crash.Remember, situations can changequickly, and only you can decidewhen it is safe to divert attentionaway from driving.

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.16

37 56

531

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Restrain All Children

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Don’t Drink and Drive

Pay Appropriate Attention to theTask of Driving Safely

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

Control Your Speed

6

12/07/20 10:30:53 31TK4640_011

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting inthe correct position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment, front and rear crushzones, a collapsible steering column,and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

always wearyour seat belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

7

(11)

(10)

(1)

(12) (3)

(7)

(5)

(8) (9)(6) (9)(4)

(7)

(8)

(10)

(2) (2)

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Side Airbags(9) Side Curtain Airbags(10) Door Locks(11) Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners(12) Occupant Position Detection

System (OPDS) Sensors

12/07/20 10:30:59 31TK4640_012

－－－－

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument paneland a beeper to remind you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces and territoriesrequire you to wear seat belts.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wear your seat belt, andmake sure you wear it properly.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including:

frontal impactsside impactsrear impactsrollovers


Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

What You Should Do:

8

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

12/07/20 10:31:10 31TK4640_013

CONTINUED

Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact (see page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork).

In addition, your vehicle has sidecurtain airbags to help protect theheads of the driver, front passenger,and passengers in the outer rearseating positions during a moderateto severe side impact (see page

for more information on howyour side curtain airbags work).

26

30

32


Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

9

12/07/20 10:31:16 31TK4640_014

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force. So,while airbags help save lives, theycan cause burns, bruises, andother minor injuries, andsometimes even fatal ones ifoccupants are not wearing theirseat belts properly and sittingcorrectly.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injures ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.


Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearcollisions, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

What you should do:

10

12/07/20 10:31:22 31TK4640_015

－

＊

＊The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengersand teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front seat.

See pages for importantguidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

Your vehicle has a door/trunk open indicator (red)

on the instrument panel to indicatewhen any door or the trunk lid is nottightly closed.

Your vehicle also has a door andtrunk open indicator on the multi-information display to indicate whena specific door or the trunk is nottightly closed. You will see theappropriate indicator(s) for eachcondition.

See page for how to lock thedoors, and page for how the door/trunk open indicator works.

You will also hear a beep when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and each time you openany door or the trunk with the key inthe ON (II) position.

Models equipped with thekeyless access system have anengine start/stop button insteadof an ignition switch. ON Modeis the equivalent of ON (II). Formore information, see pages

and .

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors are closedand locked.

37 56

:

71 184 187151

CONTINUED

Protecting Adults and Teens

Close and Lock the DoorsIntroduction 1.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

11

13/08/08 16:42:31 31TK4650_016

When one or more doors or thetrunk lid are not tightly closed, thecorresponding indicator for eachcondition will come on.

The above example shows the frontright and rear left doors, and thetrunk open.

When the trunk is not tightly closed,the ‘‘TRUNK OPEN’’ indicator willcome on.

If any door or the trunk is not closedtightly, the multi-information displayreminds you to close the opendoor(s) or the trunk before you startdriving.

The above illustration shows that alldoors and the trunk are open.


12

12/07/20 10:31:37 31TK4640_017

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest. In addition toadjusting the seat, you can adjust thesteering wheel up and down, and inand out (see page ).

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

Locking the doors also helps preventan outsider from unexpectedlyopening a door when you come to astop.

Your vehicle has the auto doorlocking/unlocking feature. For moreinformation, see page .125

146

CONTINUED


Adjust the Front Seats2.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

13

12/07/20 10:31:44 31TK4640_018

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

161


Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

14

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

12/07/20 10:31:50 31TK4640_019

CONTINUED

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See page for how to adjust theseat-backs.

Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe center of the back of your headrests against the center of therestraint.

Have passengers adjust their headrestraints properly as well. Tallerpersons should adjust their restraintas high as possible.

161


Adjust the Head Restraints4.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

15

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

12/07/20 10:31:56 31TK4640_020

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints and how the driver’sand front passenger’s active headrestraints work.

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

163

Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.


16

12/07/20 10:32:01 31TK4640_021

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

If a seat belt does not seem to workproperly, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

The front seats have adjustable seatbelt anchors. To adjust the height ofan anchor, press and hold the releasebutton and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

20

Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.

Protecting Adults and TeensD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

17

RELEASE BUTTON

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

12/07/20 10:32:08 31TK4640_022

If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and head restraints, andput on their seat belts, it is veryimportant that they continue to situpright, well back in their seats, withtheir feet on the floor, until thevehicle is safely parked and theengine is off.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

Advice for Pregnant WomenMaintain a Proper SittingPosition

6.


18

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

12/07/20 10:32:14 31TK4640_023

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your airbags inflate.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe belt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the proper

operation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbags inflate.

If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.

Additional Safety PrecautionsTwo people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.

Protecting Adults and TeensD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

19

12/07/20 10:32:22 31TK4640_024

＊

＊

＊

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all seating positions.The front seat belts are alsoequipped with automatic seat belttensioners.

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts.

If either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt while driving, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.

When no one is sitting in the frontpassenger’s seat, or an infant orsmall child is riding there, theindicator may not come on and thebeeper may not sound.You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT

BELT’’ message on the multi-information display.

This system monitors the front seatbelts. If you turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position before yourseat belt is fastened, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flash. Ifyour seat belt is not fastened beforethe beeper stops, the indicator willstop flashing but remain on.


and .

If a front passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator willcome on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEATBELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGERSEAT BELT’’ message on the multi-information display.

:

184 187

Seat Belt System Components

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

20

12/07/20 10:32:29 31TK4640_025

If the indicator comes on or thebeeper sounds when the driver’s seatbelt is latched and there is no frontseat passenger and no items on thefront seat, something may beinterfering with the monitoringsystem. Look for and remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any object(s) hanging on the seator in the seat-back pocket.

Any object(s) touching the rear ofthe seat-back.

The lap/shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat (see page ).

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockableretractor will activate. The belt willretract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer.

16

49

CONTINUED

Lap/Shoulder Belt

Additional Information About Your Seat BeltsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

21

12/07/20 10:32:37 31TK4640_026

To deactivate the lockable retractor,unlatch the buckle and let the seatbelt fully retract. To refasten theseat belt, pull it out only as far asneeded.

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in position.

The tensioners can be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags . In this case, theairbags would not be needed, but theadditional restraint could be helpful.

If the tensioner is activated, the SRSindicator comes on and the tensionermust be replaced.

do not deploy

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

22

Allowing a child to play with aseat belt or wrap one aroundtheir neck can result in seriousinjury or death.

Instruct children not to play withany seat belt and make sureany unused seat belt a childcan reach is buckled, fullyretracted, and locked.

12/07/20 10:32:44 31TK4640_027

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,you should have your dealer inspectthe belt, and replace it if necessary.A belt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

Pull each belt out fully, and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning the beltmay correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in goodcondition or working properly willnot provide good protection andshould be replaced as soon aspossible.

Acura provides a limited warranty onseat belts. See your

booklet for details.

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

564

Acura WarrantyInformation

Seat Belt Maintenance

Additional Information About Your Seat BeltsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

23

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

12/07/20 10:32:50 31TK4640_028

Airbag System Components

Additional Information About Your Airbags

24

(1)

(3)(8)

(4)

(5)(15)

(2)(11)

(14)

(13)

(14)(16)(13)

(4)

(10)

(5)

(8)

(6)

(9) (7) (12)

(1) Driver’s Front Airbag(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags

(15) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator(16) Safing Sensor

(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors(8) Front Impact Sensors(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator(10) Side Impact Sensors (First)(11) Occupant Detection System (ODS) Sensors(12) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors Control Unit/

ODS Sensors Control Unit(13) Side Impact Sensors (Second)(14) Side Curtain Airbags

12/07/20 10:32:56 31TK4640_029

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact orside impact.

Sensors that can detect whether achild is in the passenger’s sideairbag path and signal the controlunit to turn the airbag off (seepage ).

Your airbag system includes:

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two SRS (supplemental restraintsystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceiling,above the side windows. The frontand rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDECURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page

).

Sensors that can detect whetherthe driver’s seat belt and the frontpassenger’s seat belt are latchedor unlatched (see page ).

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page

).

Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the front passenger’sseat. If the weight is about 65 lbs(29 kg) or less (the weight of aninfant or small child), thepassenger’s front airbag will beturned off (see page ).

26

30

32

22

20

31

29

29

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your AirbagsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

25

12/07/20 10:33:04 31TK4640_030

＊

＊

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will inflatethe driver’s and front passenger’sairbags, at the time and with theforce needed.

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.


and .

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbag systemcomponents (see page ).

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sfront airbag has been turned off(see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

:

33

34

32

184 187


How Your Front Airbags Work

26

12/07/20 10:33:12 31TK4640_031

CONTINUED

The total time for inflation anddeflation is less than a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

Only the driver’s airbag can deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger’sairbag off (see page ).

After an airbag inflates in a crash,you may see a small amount ofsmoke. This is from the combustionprocess of the inflator material and isnot harmful. People with respiratoryproblems may experience sometemporary discomfort. If this occurs,get out of the vehicle as soon as it issafe to do so.

34


riverand

Passenger

Safety

27

13/04/02 19:11:13 31TK4640_032

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, multiple-threshold frontairbags (SRS). During a frontal crashsevere enough to cause one or bothfront airbags to deploy, the airbagscan inflate at different rates,depending on the severity of thecrash, whether or not the seat beltsare latched, and/or other factors.Front airbags are designed tosupplement the seat belts to helpreduce the likelihood of head andchest injuries in frontal crashes.

Objects placed or pushed underthe front passenger’s seat maycause the sensor to malfunction,increasing the risk of injury in acrash.

Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren or small-statured adults whoride in front.

For both advanced airbags to workproperly:

Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.

Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any objects or metal itemsunder the front seats.


Dual-Stage, Multiple-ThresholdFront Airbags (SRS)

Advanced Airbags

28

12/07/20 10:33:25 31TK4640_033

The passenger’s advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. Although Acura doesnot encourage carrying an infant orsmall child in front, if the sensorsdetect the weight of an infant orsmall child (up to about 65 lbs or 29kg), the system will automaticallyturn the passenger’s front airbag off.

Be aware that objects placed on thepassenger’s seat can also cause theairbag to be turned off.

When the passenger airbag getsturned off by the weight sensors, a‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator inthe center of the dashboard comeson (see page ).

If the weight sensors detect there isno passenger in the front seat, theairbag is automatically turned off.However, the passenger airbag offindicator in this situation will notcome on.

The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force, regardless ofthe severity of the impact.

If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.

34

CONTINUED


riverand

Passenger

Safety

29

DRIVER’S SEATPOSITION SENSOR

PASSENGER’S SEATWEIGHT SENSOR

12/07/20 10:33:32 31TK4640_034

To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,

This includes:

A rear passenger pushing orpulling on the back of the frontpassenger’s seat.

Moving the front seat or seat-backforcibly back against cargo on theseat or floor behind it.

Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, sensors willdetect rapid acceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.

Also, make sure the floor matbehind the front passenger’s seatis hooked to the floor mat anchor(see page ). If it is not, the matmay interfere with the properoperation of the sensors andoperation of the seat.

Back seat passengers should notwedge objects or intentionallyforce their feet under the frontpassenger seat.

565

How Your Side Airbags Work


do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.

30

12/07/20 10:33:40 31TK4640_035

There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or another object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag may not deploy if there isno passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag’sdeployment path.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoffsystem designed primarily to protecta child riding in the front passenger’sseat.

If the side airbag off indicator comeson (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.Although Acura does not encourage

children to ride in front, if theposition sensors detect a child hasleaned into the side airbag’sdeployment path, the airbag will shutoff.

33Side Airbag Cutoff System


riverand

Passenger

Safety

31

12/07/20 10:33:47 31TK4640_036

＊

＊

If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

One or both side curtain airbags mayinflate in a moderate to severefrontal collision which causes thefront airbags to deploy.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

When you turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on briefly then goes off. Thistells you the system is workingproperly.


and .

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid accelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag.

The SRS indicator alerts you to apotential problem with your airbagsystem components.

:

184 187

How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

How the SRS IndicatorWorks


32

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

12/07/20 10:33:56 31TK4640_037

＊

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position oron models with keyless accesssystem, press the engine start/stop button to set ON mode (seepage ).

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKAIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display.

If you see any of these indications,the airbag system components maynot work properly when you needthem. This indicator alerts you that the

passenger’s side airbag has beenautomatically shut off. It doesmean there is a problem with yourside airbags.

When you turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position, the indicatorshould come on briefly and then goout (see page ). If it doesn’t comeon, stays on, or comes on whiledriving without a passenger in thefront seat, have the system checked.

You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGERSIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on themulti-information display.

67187

CONTINUED


How the SideAirbag OffIndicator Works

not

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

33

CanadaU.S.

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

12/07/20 10:34:05 31TK4640_038

＊ Be aware that objects placed on thefront seat can cause the indicator tocome on.

If no weight is detected on the frontseat, the airbag will be automaticallyshut off. However, the indicator willnot come on.

The passenger airbag off indicatormay come on and off repeatedly ifthe total weight on the seat is nearthe airbag cutoff threshold.

If an adult or teenage passenger isriding in front, move the seat as farto the rear as possible, and have thepassenger sit upright and wear theseat belt properly.

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag has beenshut off because weight sensorsdetect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less(the weight of an infant or smallchild) on the front passenger’s seat.It does there is a problemwith the airbag.


and .

:

184 187


How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

not mean

34

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

CanadaU.S.

12/07/20 10:34:12 31TK4640_039

If the indicator comes on with nofront seat passenger and no objectson the seat, or with an adult ridingthere, something may be interferingwith the weight sensors. Look forand remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer assoon as possible.

Any object hanging on the seat orin the seat-back pocket.

Any object(s) touching the rear ofthe seat-back.

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor, the frontpassenger’s weight sensors, thefront seat belt tensioners, and allseat belts and their anchors wornduring a crash to make sure theyare operating properly.

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. Anyseat belt tensioner that activatesmust also be replaced.

We recommend against the use ofsalvaged airbag systemcomponents, including the airbag,tensioners, sensors, and controlunit.

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by an authorized dealer ora knowledgeable body shop.

Airbag Service


The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.

An airbag ever inflates.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

35

12/07/20 10:34:21 31TK4640_040

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

If water oranother liquid soaks into a seat-back, it can prevent the side airbagcutoff system from workingproperly.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact AcuraClient Relations. In the US, call800-382-2238, and in Canada, call888-9-ACURA-9.


Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not expose the front passenger’sseat-back to liquid.

Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer.

36

12/07/20 10:34:25 31TK4640_041

－－

－

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to protect childpassengers.

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, trafficcollisions are the number one causeof death of children age 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state,Canadian province and territoryrequires that infants and children beproperly restrained when they ride ina vehicle.

(see pages ).(see pages ).

42 5253 56

properly

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

Protecting Children General GuidelinesD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

37

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

12/07/20 10:34:32 31TK4640_042

－

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt (see page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren).

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.Even though your vehicle has an

advanced front airbag system thatautomatically turns the passenger’sfront airbag off under certaincircumstances (see page ), pleasefollow these guidelines:

According to crash statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat. Somestates have laws restricting wherechildren may ride.

Children who ride in the back areless likely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

53

34Children who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.

Small Children

Larger Children

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

Infants

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks

Protecting Children General Guidelines

38

12/07/20 10:34:41 31TK4640_043

－

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the front visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

U.S. Models

Canadian Models

Protecting Children General GuidelinesD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

39

SUN VISOR

SUN VISOR

DASHBOARD

13/08/08 16:42:43 31TK4650_044

－

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or a small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

Your vehicle has a back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.If you ever have to carry a group ofchildren, and a child must ride infront:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visual contact,we strongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in the backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.


This can preventchildren from accidentally fallingout (see page ).

53

18

16

161

153

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

Additional Safety Precautions


Never hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Never let two children use thesame seat belt.

Use the childproof door locks toprevent children from opening therear doors.

40

12/07/20 10:35:02 31TK4640_045

－

＊

＊

If a child wraps a looseseat belt around their neck, theycan be seriously or fatally injured.(See pages and for how toactivate and deactivate thelockable retractor.)

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates, Canadian provinces andterritories, and can be veryhazardous.

Your vehicle has the enginestart/stop button instead of anignition switch. For moreinformation on how to select thepower mode, see page .

For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition switch or with the keylessaccess remote in the vehicle canaccidentally set the vehicle inmotion, possibly injuring

themselves or others.

Childrenwho play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles. Know how tooperate the emergency trunkopener and decide if your childrenshould be shown how to use thisfeature (see page ).

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch , and open the trunk,which can lead to accidental injuryor death.

50 51

:

156

184

On models with keyless accesssystem


Make sure any unused seat beltthat a child can reach is buckled,the lockable retractor is activated,and the belt is fully retracted andlocked.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.

Lock all doors and the trunk whenyour vehicle is not in use.

Keep vehicle keys/remotetransmitters or keyless accessremotes out of the reach ofchildren.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

41

12/07/20 10:35:09 31TK4640_046

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat, and the child is at leastone year old.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

A rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving their seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theirseat-back in the desired position.

It can also interfere with properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system.

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Never put arear-facing child seat in the frontseat.

Rear-facing Child Seat Placement

Protecting Infants and Small Children

42

12/07/20 10:35:16 31TK4640_047

In any of these situations, westrongly recommend that you installthe child seat directly behind thefront passenger’s seat, move the seatas far forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

Many states, Canadian provinces andterritories allow a child one year ofage or older who also meets theminimum size and weightrequirements to transition from arear-facing child seat to a forwardfacing seat. Know the requirementswhere you are driving and follow thechild seat instructions. Many expertsrecommend use of a rear-facing seatup to age two, if the child’s height

and weight are appropriate for arear-facing seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

We also recommend that a smallchild use the child seat until the childreaches the weight or height limitfor the seat.

CONTINUED

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Protecting Infants and Small ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

43

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acrash.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

12/07/20 10:35:23 31TK4640_048

Even with advanced front airbagsthat automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), a back seat is the safestplace for a small child.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, and be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to cause veryserious or fatal injuries.

34

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Child Seat Placement

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s airbag can behazardous.

44

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

12/07/20 10:35:28 31TK4640_049

Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren). Some have arigid-type connector, while othershave a flexible-type connector. Bothare equally easy to use. Someexisting and previously owned childseats can only be installed using theseat belt. Whichever type youchoose, follow the child seatmanufacturer’s use and careinstructions as well as theinstructions in this manual. Properinstallation is key to maximizing yourchild’s safety.

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing the seat belt and a top tetherfor added security. This is becauseall child seats are required to bedesigned so that they can be securedwith a lap belt or the lap part of alap/shoulder belt.

In addition, the child seatmanufacturer may advise that a seatbelt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat once a child reachesa specified weight. Please read thechild seat owner’s manual for properinstallation instructions.

The child seat is the correct typeand size for the child.

The child seat is the correct typefor the seating position.

The child seat is compliant withFederal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213 or Canadian MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213.

Make sure the child seat meets thefollowing three requirements:

Selecting a Child Seat

Important considerations whenselecting a child seat

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

45

12/07/20 10:35:34 31TK4640_050

After selecting a proper child seatand a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-sidemovement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for rear-facing child seats.Properly secure the child seat to

the vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

Secure the child in the child seat.

1.

2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat

46

12/07/20 10:35:40 31TK4640_051

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren) at the outerrear seats.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors. Make sure there are no objects

near the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

Use the pull strap to lower theanchor cover on the lower seatcushion that covers the LATCHanchor holes in the seat.

The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.

The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

1.

3.

2.

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat withLATCH

Installing a Child SeatD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

47

LOWER ANCHORS Outer seating position

COVERS

STRAPS

BUTTON

12/07/20 10:35:49 31TK4640_052

Push the button located next toeach rear head restraint to pivotthe head restraint down.

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connector asshown above.

Other LATCH-compatible seatshave a flexible-type connector asshown above.

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

4. 5.

6.


48

BUTTON

HEAD RESTRAINT

Outer seating position Rigid type Flexible type

12/07/20 10:35:56 31TK4640_053

Tighten the tether strap asinstructed by the child seat maker.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

Route the tether strap over thehead restraint, then attach thetether strap hook to the anchor,making sure the strap is nottwisted.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle and remove any slack fromthe lap portion of the belt.

7.

8.

9.

1.

CONTINUED


Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

49

TETHER STRAP HOOK

ANCHOR

COVER

12/07/20 10:36:04 31TK4640_054

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

2.

3.

4. 5.


50

12/07/20 10:36:11 31TK4640_055

To deactivate the lockable retractorand remove a child seat, unlatch thebuckle, unroute the seat belt, and letthe belt fully retract.

A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe back seat, using one of theanchorage points shown above.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

After properly securing the childseat with the lap/shoulder belt(see page ), pivot the headrestraint down (see page ) androute the tether strap over thehead restraint.

1.

49163

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat with aTether


Using an Outer Anchor

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

51

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS

TETHER STRAP HOOK

ANCHOR

COVER

COVERANCHOR

12/07/20 10:36:19 31TK4640_056

Lift the anchor cover, then attachthe tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the strap isnot twisted.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

Follow steps 2 and 3 in theprevious column.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), adjust thehead restraint to its lowestposition, then route the tetherstrap over the head restraint.

1.

2.

3.

2.

49

Using the Center Anchor


52

TETHER STRAPHOOK

COVER

ANCHOR

12/07/20 10:36:26 31TK4640_057

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear the lap/shoulder belt.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Larger ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

53

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

12/07/20 10:36:33 31TK4640_058

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-

facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster seat meetsfederal safety standards (see page

) and that you follow the boosterseat maker’s instructions.

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

Some states, Canadian provinces andterritories also require children touse a booster seat until they reach agiven age or weight (e.g., 6 years or60 lbs). Be sure to check currentlaws in the states, provinces orterritories where you intend to drive.

3.

4.

5.

45

Using a Booster Seat

Protecting Larger Children

54

12/07/20 10:36:40 31TK4640_059

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in the back seat.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,with or without the child sitting on abooster seat, the child should not sitin front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout the ride.

16 53

CONTINUED

When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront

Physical Size

Maturity

Protecting Larger ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

55

12/07/20 10:36:48 31TK4640_060

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly and securely positioned.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.


Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.

Protecting Larger Children

56

12/07/20 10:36:55 31TK4640_061

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. Carbonmonoxide should not enter thevehicle in normal driving if youmaintain your vehicle properly andfollow the information on this page.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

With the trunk lid open, airflow canpull exhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetrunk open, open all the windows,and set the climate control system asshown below.

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Set the fan speed to high.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the climatecontrol system as follows:

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.

You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.

The vehicle was in a collision thatmay have damaged the underside.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide HazardD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

57

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

12/07/20 10:37:02 31TK4640_062

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury or death. Read these labelscarefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read (except for the U.S.dashboard label which may beremoved by the owner), contact yourdealer for a replacement.

U.S. models only

Safety Labels

58

DASHBOARDRADIATOR CAP

12/07/20 10:37:10 31TK4640_063

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models Canadian models

Safety LabelsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

59

SUN VISOR

DOORJAMB

12/07/20 10:37:24 31TK4640_064

60

12/07/20 10:37:25 31TK4640_065

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 62

............................Instrument Panel . 63..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 64

.............................................Gauges . 76..................................Fuel Gauge . 76

...................Temperature Gauge . 77.............Multi-Information Display . 78

Controls Near the Steering.........................................Wheel . 136

Windshield Wipers and.....................................Washers . 137

.......Turn Signals and Headlights . 139Automatic Lighting Off

...................................Feature . 141.........Daytime Running Lights . 142

.....................................Fog Lights . 143......Instrument Panel Brightness . 143

...............Hazard Warning Button . 145

...............Rear Window Defogger . 145......Steering Wheel Adjustments . 146

.............................Keys and Locks . 147......................Immobilizer System . 149

..............................Ignition Switch . 150....................................Door Locks . 151

............Childproof Door Locks . 153..............................................Trunk . 154

......Emergency Trunk Opener . 156

.....................Remote Transmitter . 157...............................................Seats . 161

......Trunk Pass-through Cover . 166...........................................Mirrors . 167

Driving Position Memory........................................System . 170

................Keyless Access System . 173...........Keyless Access Remote . 179

........Engine Start/Stop Button . 183..................................Seat Heaters . 202

.....Seat Heaters and Ventilations . 204............................Power Windows . 206

.......................................Moonroof . 210...............................Parking Brake . 212

.........Interior Convenience Items . 213.....................Beverage Holders . 214

........Accessory Power Sockets . 215..................................Glove Box . 216

.............Console Compartment . 216............................Vanity Mirror . 217

...................................Sun Visor . 217...........................Center Pocket . 218

....................Sunglasses Holder . 218..................................Coat Hook . 219

...............................Interior Lights . 220

Instruments and ControlsInstrum

entsand

Controls

61

13/08/08 16:42:49 31TK4650_066

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

: If equipped

Control Locations

62

MIRROR CONTROLS

DRIVING POSITIONMEMORY SYSTEMBUTTONS

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASEBUTTON

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE


AUDIO

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION


MANUALTRANSMISSION

CLOCKCOMPASS

USB ADAPTER CABLEAUXILIARY INPUT JACK


SEAT HEATER SWITCHESSEAT HEATER/VENTILATION BUTTONS(P. 204)

BSI ALERT INDICATOR(P. 522)

BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM(BSI) ALERT INDICATOR(P. 522)

HOMELINKBUTTONS

MOONROOFSWITCH

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS(P. 63)GAUGESMULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

(P. 76)(P. 78)


(P. 168)

(P. 170)

(P. 206)

TRUNK RELEASEBUTTON (P. 154)

(P. 472)

(P. 202)

(P. 266, 275, 356, 367)(P. 215)

(P. 389)

(P. 491)

(P. 494)

(P. 226)

(P. 397)(P. 391)(P. 235)

(P. 145)

(P. 210)(P. 404)

(P. 470)

(P. 215)

(P. 151)

13/08/08 16:42:58 31TK4650_067

＊

＊

＊

＊

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

Instrument PanelInstrum

entsand

Controls

63

CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE ANDBRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMINDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

SH-AWD INDICATOR

LIGHTS ON INDICATORLOW TIRE PRESSURE/TPMS INDICATORIf equipped:

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM INDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) INDICATOR

ELECTRIC POWER STEERING(EPS) INDICATOR

FOG LIGHT INDICATOR

(P. 73)

(P. 68)

(P. 69)

(P. 72)

(P. 72)

(P. 67)

(P. 73)

(P. 65)

(P. 70)

(P. 71)

(P. 67)

(P. 66)

SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR (P. 72)

MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAYSEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR (P. 64)

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

(P. 72)

(P. 71)

A/T model is shown.

(P. 71)

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA) OFFINDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)SYSTEM INDICATOR

BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM(BSI) INDICATOR

DOOR/TRUNK OPEN INDICATOR

(P. 68)

(P. 71)

KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEMINDICATOR (P. 74)

(P. 75)

(P. 65, 596)

(P. 64, 595)

(P. 64, 597)

(P. 65, 598)

(P. 78)

12/07/20 10:37:48 31TK4640_068

＊

＊

＊

＊

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle.

You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEATBELT’’ message on the multi-information display.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKEMISSION SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display. Formore information, see page .

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running, and youwill see a ‘‘CHECK ENGINE OILLEVEL’’ message on the multi-information display. For moreinformation, see page .

If either of you do not fasten yourseat belt while driving, the beeperwill sound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals, and youwill see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT BELT’’ or‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER SEATBELT’’ message on the multi-information display. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. It reminds you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.A beeper also sounds if you have notfastened your seat belt.


and .

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour seat belt, the beeper soundsand the indicator flashes. If you donot fasten your seat belt before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsflashing but remains on.

If your front passenger does notfasten their seat belt, the indicatorcomes on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

20

:

184 187

597

595

Instrument Panel Indicators

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Low Oil PressureIndicator

64

12/07/20 10:37:57 31TK4640_069

＊

＊

＊

CONTINUED

This indicator has two functions:

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It is a reminder to checkthe parking brake. Driving withthe parking brake not fullyreleased can damage the brakesand tires.

If you drive without releasing theparking brake, a beeper will sound,and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASEPARKING BRAKE’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. It will then go off ifyou have inserted a properly codedignition key, on models with keylessaccess system, if an appropriatekeyless access remote is used. If it isnot a properly coded key or keylessaccess remote, the indicator willblink, and the engine’s fuel systemwill be disabled (see page ).


and .

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged, and you will also seea ‘‘CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay. For more information, seepage .

1.

:

212

149

184 187

596


Charging SystemIndicator

Parking Brake andBrake SystemIndicator

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

65

U.S. Canada

12/08/08 20:02:27 31TK4640_070

＊

＊If it stays on after you have fullyreleased the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, it canindicate a problem in the brakesystem. You will also see a ‘‘LOWBRAKE FLUID’’ or ‘‘CHECKBRAKE SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display. Formore information, see page .

Models equipped with thekeyless access system have anengine start/stop button insteadof an ignition switch. ON Modeis the equivalent of ON (II), andSTART Mode is the equivalentof START (III). For moreinformation, see pages and

.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If this indicator comes on at anyother time, there is a problem in theABS. If this happens, take thevehicle to your dealer to have itchecked. With this indicator on, yourvehicle still has normal brakingability but no anti-lock function. Youwill also see a ‘‘CHECK ABSSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display. For moreinformation, see page .

2. :

598187

184

508


Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

66

12/07/20 10:38:13 31TK4640_071

＊

＊

＊

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. If it comes on atany other time, it indicates that thepassenger’s side airbag hasautomatically shut off. For moreinformation, see page .

You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGERSIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on themulti-information display.


and .

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. If it comes on atany other time, it indicates apotential problem with your frontairbags. This indicator will also alertyou to a potential problem with yourairbag system components. You willalso see a ‘‘CHECK AIRBAGSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display. For moreinformation, see page .

:

33

32

187184

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator Side Airbag Off

Indicator

Instrument Panel IndicatorsInstrum

entsand

Controls

67

U.S. Canada

12/07/20 10:38:21 31TK4640_072

＊

＊＊

This indicator comes on as areminder that you have turned offthe vehicle stability assist (VSA)system.


This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. For more information, seepage .


It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time, there is a problem withthe VSA or Hill Start Assist (onSH-AWD models only) system.You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSASYSTEM’’ or ‘‘CHECK HILLSTART ASSIST SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay. Take your vehicle to adealer to have it checked. WithoutVSA, your vehicle still has normaldriving ability, but will not haveVSA traction and stabilityenhancement. For more

information, see page .

If the VSA indicator illuminates,hill start assist will not be working.Without hill start assist, thevehicle will roll downhillimmediately when you release thebrake on an incline.

Models equipped with thekeyless access system have anengine start/stop button insteadof an ignition switch. ON Modeis the equivalent of ON (II), andSTART Mode is the equivalentof START (III). For moreinformation, see pages and

.

1.

2.

:

184187

510510

510Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

VSA OFF Indicator


68

12/07/20 10:38:30 31TK4640_073

＊

＊



and .


If it comes on while driving, itindicates that one or more of yourvehicle’s tires are significantly lowon pressure.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TIREPRESSURE’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

Check the tire pressure monitor onthe multi-information display anddetermine the cause (see page ).

If this indicator begins to flash,there is a problem with the tirepressure monitoring system(TPMS). You will also see a‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay. The indicator continues toflash for a while (approximately 1minute), then stays on. If thishappens, have your dealer checkthe system as soon as possible.For more information, see page

.

If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe, check which tirehas lost pressure on the multi-information display, and determinethe cause. If it is because of a flat tire,replace the flat tire with the compactspare (see page ), and have theflat tire repaired as soon as possible.If two or more tires are underinflated,call a professional towing service.For more information, see page .

1.

:

2.

187

516

515

514184

583

607


Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

69

12/07/20 10:38:38 31TK4640_074

＊

＊

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If an indicator does not blinkor blinks rapidly, it usually meansone of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see pages and ).Replace the bulb as soon as possible,since other drivers cannot see thatyou are signaling.

When you press the hazard warningbutton, both turn signal indicatorsand all turn signals on the outside ofthe vehicle flash.

This indicator normally comes onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position and goes offafter the engine starts. If it comes onat any other time, there is a problemin the electric power steering system.


and .

If this happens, stop the vehicle in asafe place and turn off the engine.Reset the system by restarting theengine. The indicator will stay on,but should go off after driving ashort distance. If it does not go off,or comes back on again while driving,take the vehicle to your dealer tohave it checked. With the indicatoron, the EPS may be turned off,making the vehicle harder to steer.

If you turn the steering wheel to thefull left or right position repeatedlywhile stopping or driving at very lowspeed, you may feel slightly hardersteering in order to prevent damageto the steering system caused byoverheating. This may also happen ifyou hold the steering wheel on thefull left or right position for a while.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK POWERSTEERING SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display.

:558 562

184 187


Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

Electric Power Steering(EPS) Indicator

70

12/07/20 10:38:46 31TK4640_075

＊

＊

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator also comes on withreduced brightness when thedaytime running lights (DRL) are on(see page ).

This indicator comes on when youturn on the fog lights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. This indicatorwill also come on when the lightswitch is in AUTO and the lightsturn on automatically. If you turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the LOCK (0) position, withoutturning off the light switch, thisindicator will remain on. Reminderbeeps will also sound when you openthe driver’s door.

Models equipped with thekeyless access system have anengine start/stop button insteadof an ignition switch. VEHICLEOFF (LOCK) Mode is theequivalent of LOCK (0) andACCESSORY Mode is theequivalent of ACCESSORY (I).For more information, see pages

and .

This indicator comes on red if anydoor or the trunk lid is not closedtightly.

You will also see a correspondingindicator(s) on the multi-informationdisplay to indicate which door and/or the trunk is not closed tightly (seepage ).

:

12

184 187

140

142

143


High Beam Indicator

Fog Light Indicator

Lights On Indicator Door/Trunk OpenIndicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

71

12/07/20 10:38:56 31TK4640_076

This indicator comes on when youturn on the cruise control system bypressing the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel (see page ).

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

This indicator comes on when thereis a system message on the multi-information display. Press the INFObutton on the steering wheel (seepage ) to see the message (seepage ).

Most of the time, this indicatorcomes on along with other indicatorsin the instrument panel such as theseat belt reminder indicator, SRSindicator, VSA system indicator, etc.

This indicator comes on when thesecurity system is set. For moreinformation, see page .

40179

401

395

90


Cruise Main Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator

System MessageIndicator

Security System Indicator

72


12/07/20 10:39:04 31TK4640_077

＊

＊

This indicator is in the fuel gauge. Itcomes on as a reminder that youmust refuel soon. You will also see a‘‘LOW FUEL’’ message on the multi-information display.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If this indicator comes on atany other time, there is a problem inthe SH-AWD system. You will alsosee a ‘‘CHECK SH-AWD SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ). Take yourvehicle to a dealer to have it checked.For more information, see page .


and .

When the indicator comes on, thereare about 2.5 U.S. gal (9.6 ) onSH-AWD models, and 2.8 U.S. gal(10.5 ) on 2WD models of fuelremaining in the tank.

When the needle reaches E, there isa very small amount of fuel in thetank.

:

505

504

184 187

CONTINUED

On SH-AWD models

Low Fuel Indicator Super Handling-AllWheel Drive (SH-AWD)Indicator


entsand

Controls

73

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

U.S. model is shown.

12/07/20 10:39:12 31TK4640_078

If the indicator blinks while driving,the differential temperature is toohigh.You will also see an ‘‘SH-AWD DIFFTEMP. HIGH’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

Pull to the side of the road when it issafe, shift to Park, and let the engineidle until the indicator goes out.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you select theON mode with the engine start/stopbutton (see page ). If it comes onat any other time, it indicates thatthere is a problem with the system.

If this indicator comes on alongwith a ‘‘CHECK KEYLESSSTARTING SYSTEM’’ messageon the multi-information display,there is a problem with the keylessstarting system. In this case, yourvehicle may not restart. If you cancontinue to drive safely, take thevehicle to your dealer and have itchecked as soon as possible. Formore information, see page .This indicator has two functions:

If this indicator comes on alongwith a ‘‘CHECK KEYLESSACCESS SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display,there is a problem with the keylessaccess system. Have the vehiclechecked by your dealer as soon aspossible. For more information,see page .

1.

2.

505 195

196

196

On models with keyless access system


Keyless Access SystemIndicator

74

Continuing to drive with the SH-AWDindicator blinking may cause seriousdamage to the system.

12/07/20 10:39:20 31TK4640_079

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, there is a problem withBSI. You will also see a ‘‘CHECKBLIND SPOT SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display. If thishappens, take your vehicle to adealer, and have it checked. Formore information, see page .When this indicator is on, BSI is notworking.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you select theON mode by operating the enginestart/stop button (see page ).

This indicator comes on as areminder that you have turned offthe blind spot information system(BSI).

When you turn the system on, theindicator will turn off.

The BSI indicator also comes on ifthe rear bumper becomes dirty whiledriving. You will see a ‘‘BLINDSPOT NOT AVAILABLE’’ messageon the multi-information display.When you clean the rear bumper,the indicator should go off after youbegin driving again.

519185

On models with blind spot informationsystem (BSI)

Blind Spot InformationSystem (BSI) Indicator


entsand

Controls

75

12/07/20 10:39:25 31TK4640_080

This shows how much fuel youhave. It may show slightly moreor less than the actual amount.The needle returns to thebottom after you turn off theignition/power mode.

Fuel Gauge

Gauges

76

SPEEDOMETER

TEMPERATUREGAUGE

TACHOMETER

FUEL GAUGE

U.S. model with automatic transmission is shown.


Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

12/07/20 10:39:30 31TK4640_081

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should risefrom the bottom mark to about themiddle of the gauge. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the pointer may rise to theupper zone. If it reaches the red(hot) mark, pull safely to the side ofthe road. Turn to page forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine cooling system. If the pointer of the temperature

gauge reaches to or above the redmark, you will also see the ‘‘WATERTEMP HOT’’ message on the multi-information display. This will alertyou that the engine should be cooleddown.

593

Temperature Gauge

GaugesInstrum

entsand

Controls

77

12/07/20 10:39:34 31TK4640_082

＊

＊

You can select the displayedlanguage and also customize somevehicle control settings to your likingwith the multi-information displayand the three buttons on the steeringwheel (see page ).

When you unlock and open thedriver’s door, the display shows‘‘DRIVER 1’’ or ‘‘DRIVER 2’’depending on which remotetransmitter/keyless access remote

you use, and the driver’s seat and theoutside mirrors move to the positionstored in that remote transmitter/keyless access remote (see page

).

The driver’s ID (1 or 2) is displayedwhen the power mode is set to ON.

The multi-information display in theinstrument panel displays variousinformation and messages when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position. Some of the messages helpyou operate your vehicle morecomfortably. Others help to keepyou aware of the periodicmaintenance your vehicle needs forcontinued trouble-free driving.


and .

There are three types of messages:normal display messages, engine oillife and maintenance messages, andsystem messages.

:

184 187

79170

On models with keyless access systemNormal Display Messages

Multi-Information Display

78

Remote transmitter/keylessaccess remote 1 is used.

Remote transmitter/keylessaccess remote 2 is used.

12/07/20 10:39:41 31TK4640_083

＊

＊

＊ ▲ ▼

＊

▲ ▼

These messages go off after severalseconds.

With the ignition switch in the ON(II) position, the multi-informationdisplay changes as shown on page

each time you press the INFO( / ) button or the SEL/RESETbutton.

When you turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position, your lastselection is displayed.


and .

If you do not fasten your seat belt,you will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEATBELT’’ message on the multi-information display when you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position.

These messages go off severalseconds after the key is inserted intothe ignition switch.

:

184 187

81

CONTINUED


Multi-Information DisplayInstrum

entsand

Controls

79

SEL/RESET BUTTON

INFO BUTTONS ( / )

A/T model is shown.

12/07/20 10:39:49 31TK4640_084

＊ In the multi-information display, thesystem message is also displayed(see page ) and you cancustomize your vehicle controlsettings (see page ).

In the normal display mode, theupper segment displays tripcomputer information, such as fueleconomy or average speed. Thelower segment displays theodometer/trip meter (A/B), outsidetemperature, and engine oil life andmaintenance item code(s).

The multi-information displayconsists of an upper segment and alower segment.

You will see some keyless accesssystem messages until you select theON mode by operating the enginestart/stop button. These messagescan be customized (see page ).


and .

:

184 187

89

94

110



80

LOWERSEGMENT


UPPERSEGMENT

12/07/20 10:39:55 31TK4640_085

▲ ▼

＊

＊

＊

＊

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

81


: Press the INFO button ( / ).

1 :

2 : SH-AWD models only

On models without navigation system onlyThis display will be shown when theBluetooth HandsFreeLink is activated.

HFL(See page 88)

Customized Settings(See page 94)

Trip Computer (See page 84)

Tire Pressure forEach Tire(See page 87)

SH-AWD TorqueDistribution Monitor(See page 87)

1

2

12/08/03 20:54:54 31TK4640_086

＊＊

The odometer shows the totaldistance your vehicle has beendriven. It measures miles in U.S.models and kilometers in Canadianmodels. It is illegal under U.S.federal law and Canadian provincial/territorial regulations to disconnect,reset, or alter the odometer with theintent to change the number of milesor kilometers indicated.

With the ignition switch in the ON(II) position, the lower part of themulti-information display changes asshown in the illustration, each timeyou press the SEL/RESET button.


and .

:

184 187


Odometer

82

CanadaU.S.

ODOMETER


: Press the SEL/RESET button.

12/07/20 10:40:07 31TK4640_087

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it. Thereare two trip meters: Trip A and TripB. Each trip meter worksindependently, so you can keep trackof two different distances.

In the customizing mode, you can setTrip A and average fuel economy Ato reset when you refuel your vehicle(see page ).

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the SEL/RESETbutton until the number resets to‘‘0.0.’’

When you reset Trip A, average fueleconomy A is reset at the same time.When you reset Trip B, average fueleconomy B is reset.

105


Trip Meter

Instruments

andC

ontrols

83

TRIP METER A

U.S. Canada

TRIP METER B

12/08/03 20:55:00 31TK4640_088

This shows your instant fueleconomy.

This shows your vehicle’s averagefuel economy in mpg (U.S. models)or liter/100 km (Canadian models)since you last reset Trip A or Trip B.

You can customize the Trip A andAverage Fuel Economy A resetcondition on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ).

Along with the trip meter, the tripcomputer calculates these values:

Average Fuel EconomyInstant Fuel EconomyRangeElapsed TimeAverage Vehicle Speed

105


INSTANT FUEL MPG (U.S.models)/INSTANT FUEL L/100 km(Canadian models)

Average Fuel Economy A/B

Trip Computer

84


INSTANT FUEL

AVERAGE FUELECONOMY A

12/08/03 20:55:10 31TK4640_089

＊

＊

This shows the estimated distanceyou can travel on the fuel remainingin the fuel tank. This distance isestimated from the fuel economyyou received over the last severalmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada),so it will vary with changes in speed,traffic, etc.

This shows the accumulatedtraveling time since you last reset it.When you turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position, ELAPSEDTIME is reset.


and .

You can customize the ELAPSEDTIME reset conditions on the multi-information display (see page ).

This shows the average speed youare traveling in miles per hour (mph)for U.S. models or kilometers perhour (km/h) for Canadian models.

:

187184

106


RANGE ELAPSED TIME AVG. SPEED

Instruments

andC

ontrols

85

12/08/03 20:55:17 31TK4640_090

This shows the outside Fahrenheittemperature in U.S. models, andCelsius temperature in Canadianmodels.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

You can adjust the outsidetemperature display (see page ).

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. The temperaturereading can be affected by heatreflection from the road surface,engine heat, and the exhaust fromsurrounding traffic. This can causean incorrect temperature readingwhen your vehicle speed is under19 mph (30 km/h). When you startyour trip, the sensor is not fullyacclimatized, therefore it may takeseveral minutes until the propertemperature is displayed.

This shows the remaining engine oillife. It shows 100% after the engineoil is replaced and the display is reset.The engine oil life is calculatedbased on engine operating conditions.For more information, see page .

104531

Outside Temperature Engine Oil Life


86

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE

ENGINE OIL LIFEU.S.


Canada

12/08/03 20:55:25 31TK4640_091

You can see the pressure of each tirein this monitor. If one or more tiresare low, inflate them to the correctpressure. For more information, seepage .

This monitor shows how muchtorque is being delivered to eachwheel. For more information, seepage .

515504

SH-AWD models only

Tire Pressure Monitor SH-AWD Torque DistributionMonitor


entsand

Controls

87

U.S. Canada


Example: Example:Technology Package isshown.

Technology Package isshown.

12/08/03 20:55:32 31TK4640_092

You can receive or make phone callsfrom your cell phone through yourvehicle’s HandsFreeLink(HFL) system without touching yourcell phone.

To use the system, your cell phoneand the HFL system must be linked.Not all cell phones are compatiblewith this system. Refer to page

for instructions on how to linkyour cell phone to HFL and how toreceive or make phone calls, or visitthe acura.com/handsfreelinkwebsite. In Canada, visit

, or call (888) 528-7876.

You can see HFL information on thenavigation screen (see page ).

412

427

Bluetooth

On models without navigation system

www.handsfreelink.ca

On models with navigation system


Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

88


12/08/03 20:55:38 31TK4640_093

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

▲ ▼If there is a problem with yourvehicle, for example the engine oillevel is low or a door is not fullyclosed, the multi-information displaywill show you the problem. It doesthis by interrupting the currentdisplay with one or more messages.

The system message(s) triggers theappropriate indicator(s) on theinstrument panel, including thesystem message indicator, to comeon. The system message indicatordoes not go off until the problem(s)is corrected.

You will also hear a beep when thesystem message comes on for thefirst time.

Most of the messages are displayedfor about 5 seconds, and then thenormal display returns. If there areseveral system messages to beshown, the display switches thesemessages every 5 seconds.

To switch the message(s) before 5seconds have elapsed, press theINFO ( / ) button on the steeringwheel.

Even if you press the INFO ( / )button, some messages stay on orcome on again at regular intervalsuntil the problem is corrected.

If the system message indicatorremains lit on the instrument panel,you can see the correspondingmessage(s) again by pressing theINFO ( / ) button repeatedly.

On the next page is a list of allmessages:

CONTINUED

System Messages


entsand

Controls

89

A/T model is shown.

SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR

12/07/20 10:41:04 31TK4640_094

See page33

See page20

See page20

See page33

See page12

See page212

See page553

See page598

See page596

See page597

See page595

See page508

See page510

See page510


90

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

Canada

Canada

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

SH-AWD model only

12/07/20 10:41:16 31TK4640_095

CONTINUED

See page70

See page 488

See page 490

See pages75 and 526

See pages75 and 526

See page77

See page142

See page516

See page517

See page516

See page517

See page515

See page494

See page577

See page73

See page505

See page505

On models without

keyless access

system

On models with

keyless access

system

A/T model


entsand

Controls

91

U.S. model shown

U.S. model shown

U.S.

Canada

SH-AWD model only

SH-AWD model only

12/08/03 20:55:52 31TK4640_096

See page196

See page196

See page193

See page194

See page198

See page471

See page548

See page151

See page532

See page533

See page534



92

On models withoutkeyless access system

Canadian models only

12/08/03 20:56:01 31TK4640_097

See page189

See page188

See page191

See page200

See page199

See page188

See page190

See page191

See page188


entsand

Controls

93

A/T model only

A/T model only

A/T model only

M/T model only

12/07/20 10:41:51 31TK4640_098

＊

＊

＊You can customize some vehiclecontrol settings. To change thesettings, the ignition switch must bein the ON (II) position, and thevehicle must be stopped with thetransmission in Park (automatic) orwith the parking brake set (manual).

If you try to enter the customizingmode while the vehicle is moving,you will see a ‘‘MUST STOP ANDSHIFT TO PARK TO CHANGESETTINGS’’ (automatic) or ‘‘MUSTSTOP AND SET PARK BRAKE TOCHANGE SETTINGS’’ (manual)message and you cannot change thesettings.

You can customize some vehiclecontrol settings for ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ and‘‘DRIVER 2’’ separately.

To have the driver’s ID detected,make sure the driver’s door isunlocked with a correspondingremote transmitter/keyless accessremote.

Models equipped with thekeyless access system have anengine start/stop button insteadof an ignition switch. VEHICLEOFF (LOCK) Mode is theequivalent of LOCK (0),ACCESSORY Mode is theequivalent of ACCESSORY (I),and ON Mode is the equivalentof ON (II). For moreinformation, see pages and

.

If you turn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)position, move the shift lever out ofPark (automatic) or release theparking brake (manual), the displaywill change to the normal screen.

:

187184


Customized Settings

94

12/07/20 10:41:58 31TK4640_099

▲ ▼Refer to the table on the followingpages about the settings you want tocustomize.

If you use the key to unlock thedriver’s door, the system cannotrecognize either ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ or‘‘DRIVER 2.’’

To enter the customizing mode,press either INFO button ( / )repeatedly until ‘‘CUSTOMIZESETTINGS’’ is displayed, then pressthe SEL/RESET button.

CONTINUED

On models without keyless accesssystem


entsand

Controls

95

DRIVER’S ID

Press the SEL/RESETbutton.


12/07/20 10:42:03 31TK4640_100

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

－～± ～

－～± ～

＊＊

LOWMINOFF

METER SETUP(P.101)

POSITION SETUP(P.112)

LANGUAGE SELECTION

ADJUST OUTSIDETEMP. DISPLAY

TRIP A RESETWITH REFUELELAPSED TIMERESET

ADJUSTALARM VOLUME

AUTO INTERIORILLUMINATION

KEYLESS STARTGUIDANCE SCREENSMEMORY POSITION LINK

Changes the language used in the display.

Changes the outside temperature reading above orbelow its current reading.

Causes trip meter A and the average fuel economyto reset when you refuel.Resets the elapsed time of your current trip.

Changes the indicator alarm volumes into threelevels.

Changes the interior light sensitivity to your liking.

Changes the display of the keyless start guidancescreens.Changes the driver’s seat and the outside mirrorpositions to a stored setting.

103

104

105

106

108

109

110

113

ENGLISHFRENCHSPANISH

5°F 0°F 5°F(U.S.)

3°C 0°C 3°C(Canada)ONOFFIGN OFFTRIP ATRIP BHIGHMIDLOWMAXHIGHMIDONOFFONOFF

1 :2 :

Default settingOnly on models with keyless access system

Group Setup Menu Item Description PageSetting Option

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1


96

12/07/20 10:42:13 31TK4640_101

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

DescriptionMenu Item

CONTINUED

Group Setup PageSetting OptionChanges which doors unlock when you use theremote or grab the driver’s door handle.Causes some exterior lights to blink when youunlock/lock the doors by grabbing or touching thesensor/pushing the button on the driver’s doorhandle.Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lockthe doors by grabbing or touching the sensor/pushing the button on the driver’s door handle.Changes how long (in seconds) the interior lightsstay on after you close the doors.Changes how long (in seconds) the exterior lightsstay on after you close the driver’s door.

Changes the timing of when the headlights comeon. The headlight switch needs to be in the AUTOposition.

DOOR UNLOCK MODE

KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHTFLASH

KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP

INTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIMEHEADLIGHTAUTO OFF TIMER

AUTO LIGHTSENSITIVITY

KEYLESS ACCESSSETUP(P.115)

LIGHTING SETUP(P.120)

116

117

118

121

122

123

60 sec

0 sec

LOWMIN

DRIVER DOORALL DOORSONOFF

ONOFF

15 sec30 sec60 sec30 sec15 secMAXHIGHMID

1 :2 :

Default settingOnly on models with keyless access system

2

1

1

1

1

1

1


entsand

Controls

97

12/07/20 10:42:19 31TK4640_102

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊＊

DescriptionMenu Item PageGroup Setup Setting OptionChanges when the doors automatically lock.

Changes when the doors automatically unlock.

Changes which doors unlock with the remotetransmitter/keyless access remote on the firstpush.The exterior lights flash each time you press theLOCK or UNLOCK button. A beeper will alsosound when you press the LOCK button twice.Changes how long it takes (in seconds) for thedoors to relock and the security system to set afteryou unlock but do not open the door.Set/Cancel all the customized settings as default.

AUTO DOOR LOCK

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

KEY AND REMOTEUNLOCK MODE

KEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGMENT

SECURITY RELOCKTIMER

127

128

130

131

133

134

DOOR SETUP(P.125)

DEFAULT ALL(P.134)

OFFWITH VEH SPDSHIFT FROM P (A/T only)OFFDRIVER DOORWith SHIFT to P (A/T only)ALL DOORS WithSHIFT to P (A/T only)DRIVER DOOR With IGN OFFALL DOORS With IGN OFFDRIVER DOORALL DOORS

ONOFF

30 sec60 sec90 secCANCELSET

Default setting1 :2 :3 :

Default setting for automatic transmissionDefault setting for manual transmission

1

2

1

1

1


98

12/07/20 10:42:25 31TK4640_103

▲▼

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

＊

＊

You can customize some of thevehicle control settings to yourpreference. Here are the settingsyou can customize:

METER SETUP

Each time you press the INFO ( /) button, the screen changes as

shown on the next page. Press theINFO ( / ) button until you seethe setup you want to customize,then press the SEL/RESET buttonto enter your selection.

If you do not make any changes,select ‘‘EXIT.’’ The display returns tothe normal display.

LIGHTING SETUP

If you want the settings as they werewhen the vehicle left the factory,select DEFAULT ALL, as describedon page .

POSITION SETUPKEYLESS ACCESS SETUP

DOOR SETUP

When you want to change thevehicle control settings, press theINFO ( / ) button to selectCHANGE SETTINGS, then pressthe SEL/RESET button.

: Only on models with keylessaccess system

134

CONTINUED

Customize Settings


entsand

Controls

99

12/07/20 10:42:34 31TK4640_104

＊

＊

▲ ▼


100

METER SETUPSee page 101.

POSITIONSETUPSee page 112.

KEYLESSACCESS SETUPSee page 115.

LIGHTINGSETUPSee page 120.

DOOR SETUPSee page 125.

DEFAULT ALLSee page 134.

: On models with keyless accesssystem only



12/07/20 10:42:39 31TK4640_105

▲▼

▲ ▼LANGUAGE SELECTIONADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.DISPLAY

ADJUST ALARM VOLUMEAUTO INTERIORILLUMINATION

KEYLESS START GUIDANCESCREENS

Here are the selectable customsettings for the meter setup:

TRIP A RESET WITH REFUELELAPSED TIME RESET

While ‘‘METER SETUP’’ is shown,press the SEL/RESET button toenter the customize mode.


shown in the illustration. Press theINFO ( / ) button until you seethe setting you want to customize,then press the SEL/RESET buttonto enter your selection.

CONTINUED


Meter Setup


entsand

Controls

101

12/07/20 10:42:47 31TK4640_106

▲ ▼


102

See page 109.See page 103. See page 104. See page 105. See page 106. See page 108.

See page 110.



On models withkeyless accesssystem only

12/07/20 10:42:51 31TK4640_107

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

Language Selection

There are three language selectionsyou can make: English, French, andSpanish. To choose the language youwant, follow these instructions:

You can choose this item tocustomize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’by pressing the INFO ( / ) buttonrepeatedly.

Press the SEL/RESET button to seethe selections.

Select the desired language bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then enter your selection by pressingthe SEL/RESET button.

When your selection is successfullycompleted, the display changes asshown above, and then goes back tothe customizable item screen.

If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION’’ andrepeat the procedure again.

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

103

12/07/20 10:42:59 31TK4640_108

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

Adjust Outside Temp. Display

If you sometimes find that thetemperature reading is a fewdegrees above or below the actualtemperature, you can adjust it byfollowing these instructions:

You can choose this item tocustomize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’by pressing the INFO ( / ) buttonrepeatedly.Press the SEL/RESET button toenter the setting.

The displayed number is the currentadjustment above or below theoutside temperature.

Adjust the outside temperature valueby pressing the INFO ( / ) buttonrepeatedly. Press the SEL/RESETbutton to set the desired value.


If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.DISPLAY’’ and repeat the procedureagain.


104

U.S. models Canadian models Canadian modelsU.S. models

12/07/20 10:43:08 31TK4640_109

▲ ▼

▲ ▼


Select ON or OFF by pressing theINFO ( / ) button, then enteryour selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.


To cause Trip A and average fuel fortrip A to reset every time you refuelyour vehicle, follow theseinstructions:


If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to ‘‘TRIPA RESET WITH REFUEL’’ andrepeat the procedure again.

CONTINUED

Trip A Reset With Refuel


entsand

Controls

105

12/07/20 10:43:16 31TK4640_110

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

－

－

－

＊

＊

Elapsed Time Reset



Select the desired setting bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then enter your selection by pressingthe SEL/RESET button.

There are three elapsed time resetchoices you can make:

TRIP A The elapsed time is resetwhen Trip A is reset.

TRIP B The elapsed time is resetwhen Trip B is reset.

IGN OFF The elapsed time isreset when you turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK (0) position.

Models equipped with thekeyless access system have anengine start/stop button insteadof an ignition switch. VEHICLEOFF (LOCK) Mode is theequivalent of LOCK (0). Formore information, see pages

and .

:

184 187


106

12/07/20 10:43:24 31TK4640_111


If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘ELAPSED TIME RESET’’ andrepeat the procedure again.


entsand

Controls

107

12/07/20 10:43:28 31TK4640_112

▲ ▼▲ ▼

Adjust Alarm Volume

Select the warning alarm volumefrom three levels.



Select the desired level by pressingthe INFO ( / ) button, then enteryour selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.


If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘ADJUST ALARM VOLUME’’ andrepeat the procedure again.


108

12/07/20 10:43:35 31TK4640_113

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

Auto Interior IlluminationWhile the headlight switch is turnedon, the interior lights gradually dim,as the outside light level gets low.You can customize at which outsidelight level the lights start to dim.

There are MAX, HIGH, MID, LOWand MIN levels and OFF for the autointerior illumination settings.

If you want the illuminations to startdimming as early as possible, selectMAX. For illuminations to startdimming as late as possible, selectMIN. Choose HIGH, MID, or LOWfor levels in between.

To disable the auto interiorillumination function, select OFF.




CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

109

12/07/20 10:43:44 31TK4640_114

▲ ▼


If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTOINTERIOR ILLUMINATION’’ andrepeat the procedure again.

When this item is set to ON, you willsee some guidance messages on themulti-information display. You canchange this setting between on andoff. For more information on startguidance messages, see page .


188

Keyless Start Guidance ScreensOn models with keyless access system


110

12/07/20 10:43:50 31TK4640_115

▲ ▼Select ON or OFF by pressing theINFO ( / ) button, then enteryour selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.



If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘KEYLESS START GUIDANCESCREENS’’ and repeat theprocedure again.


entsand

Controls

111

12/07/20 10:43:56 31TK4640_116

▲▼

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

You can customize the MEMORYPOSITION LINK setting in positionsetup.

While ‘‘POSITION SETUP’’ is shown,press the SEL/RESET button toenter the customize mode.


shown in the illustration. Press theINFO ( / ) button until you seethe custom setting then press theSEL/RESET button to enter yourselection.

Position Setup


112

See page 113.



12/07/20 10:44:02 31TK4640_117

▲▼

▲ ▼

Memory Position Link


When Memory Position Link is setto ON, the driver’s seat and theoutside mirrors move to thepositions stored in memory. Tocause the memory to activate, openthe driver’s door with the remotetransmitter. On models with keylessaccess system, open the driver’sdoor with the remote, or grab thedoor handle while carrying theremote.

To set the memory positions, seepage .

For information on using the remote,see page .

You can choose this item tocustomize from ‘‘POSITIONSETUP’’ by pressing the INFO ( /

) button repeatedly.



170

173

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

113

12/07/20 10:44:10 31TK4640_118


If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ andrepeat the procedure again.


114

12/07/20 10:44:13 31TK4640_119

▲▼

▲ ▼

▲ ▼


shown in the illustration. Press theINFO ( / ) button, until you seethe setting you want to customize,then press the SEL/RESET buttonto enter your selection.

While ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP’’is shown, press the SEL/RESETbutton to enter the customize mode.

KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP

KEYLESS ACCESSLIGHT FLASH

DOOR UNLOCK MODE

There are three custom settings forthe keyless access setup:

CONTINUED

On models with keyless access systemKeyless Access Setup


entsand

Controls

115

See page 116.

See page 117.

See page 118.



12/07/20 10:44:21 31TK4640_120

▲▼

▲▼



To select whether the driver’s dooror all doors unlock when you openthe driver’s door with the remote orby grabbing the door handle (whilecarrying the remote), follow theseinstructions:

You can choose this item tocustomize from ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESSSETUP’’ by pressing the INFO ( /


Select DRIVER DOOR or ALLDOORS by pressing the INFO ( /

) button, then enter your selectionby pressing the SEL/RESET button.

If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to ‘‘DOORUNLOCK MODE’’ and repeat theprocedure again.

Door Unlock Mode


116

12/07/20 10:44:28 31TK4640_121

▲ ▼

▲▼



When KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHTFLASH is set to ON, some exteriorlights blink twice when you unlockthe doors by grabbing the driver’sdoor handle while carrying theremote.



The same exterior lights blink oncewhen you lock the doors by pushingthe door lock button while carryingthe remote.

Keyless Access Light Flash

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

117

12/07/20 10:44:35 31TK4640_122

▲▼


When KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP isset to ON, the beeper sounds twicewhen you unlock the doors bygrabbing the drivers door handlewhile carrying the remote.

If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHTFLASH’’ and repeat the procedureagain.



When you lock the doors by pushingthe door lock button while carryingthe remote, the beeper sounds once.

Keyless Access Beep


118

12/07/20 10:44:42 31TK4640_123

▲ ▼


When your selection is successfullycompleted, the display changes asshown above, and then goes back tothe customizable item screen.Select ON or OFF by pressing the

INFO ( / ) button, then enteryour selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP’’ andrepeat the procedure again.


entsand

Controls

119

12/07/20 10:44:47 31TK4640_124

▲▼

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

INTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIMEHEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER

While ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP’’ isshown, press the SEL/RESETbutton to enter the customize mode.



Here are the three custom settingsfor the lighting setup:

AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY

Lighting Setup


120



See page 121.

See page 122.

See page 123.

12/07/20 10:44:54 31TK4640_125

▲▼

▲ ▼

Interior Light Dimming Time



If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMINGTIME’’ and repeat the procedureagain.

The interior lights fade out when youclose all doors. To change how longthe lights stay on before they fadeout, follow these instructions:

You can choose this item tocustomize from ‘‘LIGHTINGSETUP’’ by pressing the INFO ( /


Select the desired setting (15sec,30sec, or 60sec) by pressing theINFO ( / ) button, then enteryour selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

121

12/07/20 10:45:02 31TK4640_126

▲▼

▲ ▼

Headlight Auto Off Timer




The headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights, taillights, and licenseplate lights go off after the selectedtime when you remove the key fromthe ignition switch and close thedriver’s door. On models withkeyless access system, the lights gooff after the selected time when youclose the driver’s door and take theremote with you. To change howlong the lights stay on before they gooff, follow these instructions:

Select the desired setting (60 sec, 30sec, 15 sec or 0 sec) by pressing theINFO ( / ) button, then enteryour selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.


122

12/07/20 10:45:09 31TK4640_127

－

－

－

－

－

▲▼

Auto Light Sensitivity


If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER’’and repeat the procedure again.

The headlights automatically comeon when the headlight switch is inthe AUTO position and the ambientlight reaches a changeable level. Youcan select the auto light sensitivityfrom the following five levels:MAXThe headlights come on when it isbright.

HIGHThe headlights come on when it issomewhat bright.

MIDThe headlights come on when it is asbright as sunset or sunrise.

LOWThe headlights come on when it issomewhat dark.

MINThe headlights come on when it isdark.



CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

123

12/07/20 10:45:18 31TK4640_128

▲ ▼


If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTOLIGHT SENSITIVITY’’ and repeatthe procedure again.


Select the desired setting (MAX,HIGH, MID, LOW or MIN) bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then enter your selection by pressingthe SEL/RESET button.


124

12/07/20 10:45:23 31TK4640_129

▲▼

▲ ▼AUTO DOOR LOCK

Here are the five custom settings forthe door setup:

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

SECURITY RELOCK TIMER

KEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGMENT

KEY AND REMOTE UNLOCKMODE

While ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ is shown,press the SEL/RESET button toenter the customize mode.



CONTINUED


Door Setup

Instruments

andC

ontrols

125

12/07/20 10:45:31 31TK4640_130

▲ ▼


126



See page 127. See page 128. See page 130. See page 131. See page 133.

12/07/20 10:45:34 31TK4640_131

－

▲ ▼

－

－

▲ ▼

Auto Door Lock

(Automatic transmission model only)

There are three settings you canchoose from:

SHIFT FROM PThe doors lock whenever you movethe shift lever out of Park.


Press the SEL/RESET button toenter the selecting mode.OFF

The auto door lock is deactivated allthe time.

WITH VEH SPDThe doors lock when the vehiclespeed reaches about 10 mph (about15 km/h).

You can choose this item tocustomize from ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ bypressing the INFO ( / ) buttonrepeatedly.

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

127

A/T model is shown.

12/07/20 10:45:42 31TK4640_132

－

－

－

－

－

＊

＊

＊


If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTODOOR LOCK’’ and repeat theprocedure again.

There are five possible settings forautomatic transmission models andthree possible settings for manualtransmission models.


and .

OFF The auto door unlock isdeactivated all the time.

DRIVER DOOR With SHIFT to PThe driver’s door unlocks when youmove the shift lever to Park with thebrake pedal depressed.

ALL DOORS With SHIFT to P Allthe doors unlock when you move theshift lever to Park with the brakepedal depressed.

DRIVER DOOR With IGN OFFThe driver’s door unlocks when youturn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position.

ALL DOORS With IGN OFF Allthe doors unlock when you turn theignition switch to the LOCK (0)position.

:

184 187

Auto Door Unlock

Automatic transmission model only

Automatic transmission model only


128

A/T model is shown.

12/07/20 10:45:51 31TK4640_133

▲ ▼

▲ ▼





CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

129

A/T model is shown.

12/07/20 10:45:58 31TK4640_134

▲ ▼

▲ ▼


Press the SEL/RESET button toenter the selecting mode.

You can select whether the driver’sdoor or all the doors unlock the firsttime you press the unlock button onthe remote transmitter/keylessaccess remote.

If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTODOOR UNLOCK’’ and repeat theprocedure again.


Key and Remote Unlock Mode


130

12/07/20 10:46:04 31TK4640_135

▲ ▼

Keyless Lock AcknowledgmentWhen you press the LOCK buttonon the remote transmitter or thekeyless access remote, someexterior lights flash, and a beepersounds when you push the LOCKbutton again within 5 seconds toverify that the doors and the trunkare locked and the security systemhas set (see page ). You cancustomize the exterior lights not toflash and the beeper not to sound.

When you press the UNLOCKbutton on the remote transmitter orthe keyless access remote to unlockthe driver’s door/all the doors(depending on the customizesetting), the exterior lights blinktwice to verify that the door(s) isunlocked and the security system isturned off.

To turn this feature on or off, followthese instructions.

If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to ‘‘KEYAND REMOTE UNLOCK MODE’’and repeat the procedure again.



395

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

131

12/07/20 10:46:12 31TK4640_136

▲ ▼




If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘KEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGMENT’’ and repeatthe procedure again.


132

12/07/20 10:46:18 31TK4640_137

▲ ▼

▲ ▼




If you unlock the doors with theremote transmitter or the keylessaccess remote, but do not open anyof the doors within 30 seconds, thedoors automatically relock, and thesecurity system sets.

You can change this relock timefrom 30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds.

When you unlock the doors bytouching either front door handlewhile carrying the keyless accessremote, the relock time is fixed in 30seconds.

Security Relock Timer


CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

133

12/07/20 10:46:26 31TK4640_138

▲ ▼▲ ▼To set the default settings, press theINFO ( / ) button to select SETthen press the SEL/RESET button.

If you want to cancel DEFAULTALL, select CANCEL, then press theSEL/RESET button. The screengoes back to the previous display.

If you want to set the default settings,press the INFO ( / ) button toselect DEFAULT ALL, then pressthe SEL/RESET button.


If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘SECURITY RELOCK TIMER’’ andrepeat the procedure again.

DEFAULT ALL


134

12/07/20 10:46:33 31TK4640_139

When DEFAULT ALL is set, you willsee the above display for severalseconds, then the screen returns tothe default all setting display.

If the setting is not successfullycompleted, ‘‘FAILED’’ is shown forseveral seconds, and then the screengoes back to the normal messagemode. Repeat the same procedure toselect DEFAULT ALL.


entsand

Controls

135

12/07/20 10:46:37 31TK4640_140

＊＊＊＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.If equippedRefer to the navigation system owner’s manual.

1 :2 :3 :4 : Switch location varies on models.

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

136

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

PADDLE SHIFTERS

CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENTS

MULTI-INFORMATIONDISPLAY BUTTONS

HORN

KEYLESS ACCESS REMOTE SLOT



VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS forNAVIGATION SYSTEM /BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINKSYSTEM

SEAT HEATER/VENTILATION BUTTONS

(P. 387)

(P. 407, 425)

(P. 146) (P. 79)

(P. 401)

(P. 197)

(P. 204)(P. 202)

(P. 184)

REMOTE AUDIO CONTROL BUTTONS

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/FOG LIGHTS(P. 139, 143)

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS(P. 143)

(P. 525)

BLIND SPOT INFORMATIONSYSTEM (BSI) OFF BUTTON

HEADLIGHT WASHERBUTTON

(P. 511)

(P. 138)

PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF INDICATOR(P. 34)


REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/HEATED MIRROR BUTTON(P. 145, 169)

PHONE BUTTON(P. 424)

INTERFACE DIAL (P. 285)SELECTOR KNOB (P. 236)

(P. 145)

(P. 499)(P. 137)

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST(VSA) SYSTEM OFF SWITCH

13

2

2

2

2

3

2

4

12/07/20 10:46:46 31TK4640_141

－－－

－

－

－

－

－

－

MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO Low speedHI High speedWindshield washers

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

The wipers are not activated.

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers run at high speed.

Vary the delay by turning theadjustment ring. If you turn it to theshortest delay ( position), thewipers change to low speedoperation when the vehicle speedexceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).

The length of the wipeinterval is varied automaticallyaccording to vehicle’s speed.

Pull thewiper control lever toward you,and hold it. The washers sprayuntil you release the lever. Thewipers run at low speed, thencomplete a few more sweeps afteryou release the lever.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

CONTINUED

MIST

OFF

LO

HI

INT

Windshield Washer

Windshield Wipers and WashersInstrum

entsand

Controls

137

ADJUSTMENT RING

12/07/20 10:46:55 31TK4640_142

＊

＊

When you activate the windshieldwasher with the headlights turnedon, the headlight washer will beactivated under certain conditions.For more information, see

section in the next column.

The headlight washers use the samefluid reservoir as the windshieldwashers.

The headlight washers can beoperated at any time by pressing theheadlight washer button located nextto the steering wheel column. Theheadlights must be turned on to usethis button. In addition, the headlightwasher will automatically turn on thefirst time you turn on the windshieldwashers while the ignition switch isin the ON (II) position.


and .

:

184 187

Canadian SH-AWD models only Headlight Washers

Windshield Wipers and Washers

HeadlightWashers

Canadian SH-AWD models only

138

HEADLIGHT WASHER BUTTON

12/07/20 10:47:00 31TK4640_143

－

－

＊

＊

＊

Push down on theleft lever to signal a left turn and upto signal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever andhold it. The lever will return to thecenter when you release it orcomplete a turn.

Turning the switch tothe ‘‘ ’’ position turns on theparking lights, taillights, instrumentpanel lights, side-marker lights, andrear license plate lights.

Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights.

When the light switch is in either ofthese positions, the lights onindicator comes on as a reminder.

This indicator stays on if you leavethe light switch on and turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0) position.


and .

If you leave the lights on with thekey removed from the ignitionswitch, or with the power mode inVEHICLE OFF (LOCK), you willhear reminder beeps when you openthe driver’s door.

Turn signalOffParking and instrument panellightsAUTOHeadlights onHigh beamsFlash high beamsFog lights offFog lights on

:

184 1871.2.3.

4.5.6.7.8.9.

CONTINUED

Turn Signals and Headlights

Turn Signal

Headlights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

139

12/07/20 10:47:08 31TK4640_144

－

－

The automatic lightingfeature turns on the headlights andall other exterior lights when itsenses low ambient light.

To turn on automatic lighting, turnthe light switch to AUTO. The lightswill come on automatically when theoutside light level becomes low (atdusk, for example). The lights onindicator comes on as a reminder.The lights and indicator will turn offautomatically when the systemsenses high ambient light.

Push the left leverforward until you hear a click. Theblue high beam indicator will comeon (see page ). Pull the lever backto return to the low beams.

To flash the high beams, pull thelever back lightly, then release it.The high beams will stay on as longas you hold the lever back.

The lights will remain on when youturn off the ignition switch. They willturn off automatically when youremove the key and open the driver’sdoor. To turn them on again, eitherturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position or turn the light switchto the position.

Even with the automatic lightingfeature turned on, we recommendthat you turn on the lights manuallywhen driving at night or in a densefog, or when you enter dark areassuch as long tunnels or parkingfacilities.

The lights will remain on when youset the power mode to VEHICLEOFF (LOCK). They will turn offautomatically when you open thedriver’s door and take the remotewith you. To turn them on again,either set the power mode to ON orturn the light switch to the

position.

To change the ‘‘AUTO LIGHTSENSITIVITY’’ setting, see page

.

Do not leave the light switch inAUTO if you will not be driving thevehicle for an extended period (aweek or more). You should also turnoff the lights if you plan to leave theengine idling or off for a long time.

71

123

On all modelsOn models without keyless accesssystem

On models with keyless access systemAUTO

High Beams

Headlights

140

12/07/20 10:47:15 31TK4640_145

＊

＊

＊

The automatic lighting feature iscontrolled by a sensor located on topof the dashboard. Do not cover thissensor or spill liquids on it.

The automatic lighting off featureturns off the headlights, all otherexterior lights, and the instrumentpanel lights within 15 seconds afteryou remove the key and close thedriver’s door, or on models withkeyless access system, set the powermode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK),take the remote with you, and closethe driver’s door.

If you remove the key (or the vehicleis in VEHICLE OFF mode on modelswith keyless access system), and thedriver’s door is opened and closed,the automatic lighting off featureactivates with the headlight switch inthe ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, orthe lights turned on by setting theswitch in the ‘‘AUTO’’ position.

To change the ‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTOOFF TIMER’’ setting, see page .

If you turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position with theheadlight switch on, but do not openthe door and get out, the lights turnoff after 10 minutes (3 minutes, ifthe switch is in the ‘‘AUTO’’position).

Your vehicle has the enginestart/stop button instead of anignition switch. For moreinformation on how to select thepower mode, see page .


:

184

122

CONTINUED

Automatic Lighting Off Feature

HeadlightsInstrum

entsand

Controls

141

LIGHT SENSOR

12/07/20 10:47:22 31TK4640_146

＊

＊

＊

If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRLSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display, there is aproblem with the daytime runninglight system. Take your vehicle to adealer to have it checked.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.


and .

With the headlight switch off or inthe position, the high beamheadlights and the high beamindicator come on with reducedbrightness when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position and release the parkingbrake. They remain on until you turnthe ignition switch off, even if youset the parking brake.


and .

The lights will turn on again whenyou unlock or open the driver’s door.If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightswill go off. With the driver’s dooropen, you will hear a lights onreminder beeper.

:

:184 187

184 187

Headlights

Daytime Running Lights

142

12/07/20 10:47:29 31TK4640_147

＋－

＋－

＊

＊

Turn the fog lights on and off byturning the switch next to theheadlight switch.

You can use the fog lights only whenthe headlights are on low beam.

With the light switch in the AUTOposition, you can also use the foglights when the headlights turn onautomatically. They will go off whenthe headlights turn off.

Adjust the brightness of theinstrument panel by pressing theor button with the ignitionswitch in the ON (II) position. Pressthe button to increase thebrightness and the button todecrease it.


and .

:

184 187

CONTINUED

Fog Lights Instrument Panel Brightness

Fog Lights, Instrument Panel BrightnessInstrum

entsand

Controls

143

FOG LIGHT SWITCH ADJUSTMENT BUTTONS

12/07/20 10:47:37 31TK4640_148

＋

To reduce glare at night, theinstrument panel illumination dimswhen you turn the light switch to

or . To cancel the glarereduction function, set thebrightness to the highest level, thenpress the button. You will hear abeep when it is canceled.

When the brightness reaches themaximum level, ‘‘BRIGHTNESSMAXIMUM LEVEL’’ appears on thedisplay.

The level of brightness is shown onthe multi-information display whileyou adjust it. It goes out 5 secondsafter you finish adjusting.

If your vehicle is equipped with thenavigation system, the navigationsystem screen will also go to fullbrightness. This can be helpful whenusing the headlights during daylighthours.

Instrument Panel Brightness

144


12/07/20 10:47:42 31TK4640_149

Push the button between the centervents to turn on the hazard warninglights (four-way flashers). Thiscauses all four outside turn signalsand both indicators in the instrumentpanel to flash. Use the hazardwarning lights if you need to park ina dangerous area near heavy traffic,or if your vehicle is disabled.

The rear window defogger clears fog,frost, and thin ice from the window.Push the defogger button to turn iton and off. The indicator in thebutton comes on to show thedefogger is on. If you do not turn itoff, the defogger will shut itself offwithin about 10 to 30 minutesaccording to the outside temperature.It also shuts off when you turn offthe ignition switch, or set the powermode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) on

models with keyless access system.You have to turn it on again whenyou restart the vehicle.

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger wires on the inside ofthe rear window can be accidentallydamaged. When cleaning the glass,always wipe side-to-side.

Pushing this button also turns themirror heaters on or off. For moreinformation, see page .169

Hazard Warning Button Rear Window Defogger

Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window DefoggerInstrum

entsand

Controls

145

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON


12/07/20 10:47:50 31TK4640_150

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in that position.

Make any steering wheeladjustments before you start driving.

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Move the steering wheel up ordown, and in or out, so it pointstoward your chest, not towardyour face. Make sure you can seethe instrument panel gauges andindicators.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up, down, in,and out.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Steering Wheel Adjustments

146

LEVER

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

12/07/20 10:47:56 31TK4640_151

You should have received a keynumber tag with your key. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Useonly an Acura-approved key blank.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Protect the key from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

The valet key does not contain abattery. Do not try to take it apart.The valet key works only in the

ignition and the driver’s door lock.You can keep the trunk pass-throughcover and the glove box locked whenyou leave your vehicle and the valetkey at a parking facility.

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle.

CONTINUED


Keys and LocksInstrum

entsand

Controls

147

VALETKEY(GRAY)

KEYNUMBERTAG

MASTER KEYWITH REMOTETRANSMITTER

12/07/20 10:48:05 31TK4640_152

Always make sure the key is fullyextended when you insert it to theignition switch. If the key is not fullyextended, the immobilizer systemmay not operate properly andprevent the engine from starting.

The master key can be retracted intothe remote transmitter. To use thekey, push the release button torelease the key from the transmitter.The key should be fully extended.To retract the key, push the releasebutton and at the same time push thekey into the remote transmitter untilit is securely latched.

The key may come in contact withyour finger while being retracted orextended. Make sure your fingers donot touch the pivot of the key whenretracting or extending it.

Each keyless access remote has abuilt-in key. This key is used to lock/unlock the doors when the remotebattery becomes weak and thepower door lock/unlock operation isdisabled. You cannot start the enginewith this key.

The built-in key (see page ) fitsall the locks on your vehicle.

201

On models with keyless access systemRetractable Master Key

Keys and Locks

148

Push

RELEASE BUTTON

KEY NUMBER TAGBUILT-IN KEYS

12/07/20 10:48:12 31TK4640_153

＊

＊

＊

＊

CONTINUED

You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Useonly Acura-approved key blanks.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly coded key or keylessaccess remote (or other device) isused, the engine’s fuel system isdisabled.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, or select theON mode with the engine start/stop button, the immobilizer systemindicator should come on briefly,then go off. If the indicator starts toblink, it means the system does notrecognize the coding of the key orkeyless access remote.

On models without keyless accesssystem, turn the ignition switch tothe LOCK (0) position, remove thekey, reinsert it, and turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position again.

On models with keyless accesssystem, set the power mode toVEHICLE OFF (LOCK), then selectthe ON mode again.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s or remote’s coding if anotherimmobilizer key or other metalobject (i.e. key chain) is near theignition switch or the keyless accessremote when you insert the key orset the power mode to ON.

Your vehicle has the enginestart/stop button instead of anignition switch. See page fora comparison betweenconventional power switchesand your engine start/stopbutton. For more information onselecting the power mode, seepage .

: On models with keyless accesssystem

184

187

Keys and Locks, Immobilizer System

Immobilizer System

Instruments

andC

ontrols

149

12/07/20 10:48:19 31TK4640_154

－

－

－

－

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key orkeyless access remote, contact yourdealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle inoperable.

If you have lost your key or keylessaccess remote and you cannot startthe engine, contact your dealer.

This device complies with theappropriate requirements or therequired standards. See page formore information.

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), and START (III).

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, you must push thekey in slightly. The shift lever mustalso be in Park.

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from theACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)position.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to the ON (II) position whenyou let go of the key.

628


Immobilizer System, Ignition Switch

Ignition Switch

LOCK (0)

ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

START (III)

150

Always take the ignition key or thekeyless access remote with the built-inkey with you whenever you leave thevehicle alone.

13/08/08 16:43:07 31TK4650_155

＊

＊

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) or theACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

You will also see a ‘‘REMOVE KEY’’message on the multi-informationdisplay.

The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

Go to page for information onthe engine start/stop button.

To lock all doors, push the front ofthe master door lock switch oneither front door, pull the lock tabrearward on the driver’s door, orturn the key counterclockwise inthe outside lock on the driver’s door.

The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the doors when the remote

battery becomes weak and thepower door lock/unlock operation isdisabled. For more information, seepage .

Pushing the rear of either masterdoor lock switch will unlock all doors.Pushing forward the lock tab on thedriver’s door unlocks only that door.

The lock tab on any passenger’s doorlocks and unlocks that door.

184

201

CONTINUED



Ignition Switch, Door Locks

Door Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

151

MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Lock

Unlock

Lock

Unlock RED INDICATOR

LOCK TAB

13/08/08 16:43:18 31TK4650_156

When the door is unlocked, you cansee the red indicator on the lock tababove the inner door handle.

All doors can be locked from theoutside by using the key in thedriver’s door. To unlock only thedriver’s door, insert the key, turn itclockwise, and release it. Theremaining doors unlock when youturn the key a second time within afew seconds.

You can customize the door lock/unlock settings (see page ).

You can open or close the windowsand the moonroof by using the keyin the driver’s door (see page ).

Pull the front door inner handle. Thedoor unlocks and opens in onemotion.

The front door inner handles aredesigned to allow front seatoccupants to open the door in onemotion. However this featurerequires that front seat occupantsnever pull a front door inner handlewhile the vehicle is in motion.

Children should always ride in a rearseat where childproof door locks areprovided (see page ).

125

208

153

Door Locks

152

INNER HANDLE

13/08/08 16:43:27 31TK4650_157

If you forget and leave the key in theignition switch, lockout preventionwill not allow you to lock the driver’sdoor. With any door open and thekey in the ignition switch, lockingwith the master door lock switch isdisabled. If the driver’s door isclosed, the lock tab on the driver’sdoor is not disabled. Pulling thedriver’s lock tab rearward will lockall doors. If you try to lock an opendriver’s door by pulling the lock tabrearward, the driver’s door lock tabpops out and unlocks the driver’sdoor.

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position (lever isdown), the door cannot be openedfrom the inside regardless of theposition of the lock tab. To open thedoor, push the lock tab forward anduse the outside door handle.

To lock any passenger’s door whengetting out of the vehicle, pull thelock tab rearward and close the door.

To lock the driver’s door, remove thekey from the ignition switch, pull thelock tab rearward or push the frontof the master switch, then close thedoor.

When the vehicle speed reachesabout 10 mph (15 km/h) or more, allthe doors lock automatically.

When you shift to P after driving, thedriver’s door unlocks.

When you set the power mode toVEHICLE OFF (LOCK) afterdriving, the driver’s door unlocks.

Default setting

Automatic transmission:

Manual transmission:



Door Locks

Lockout Prevention Childproof Door Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

153

LEVER

Unlock

Lock

12/07/20 10:48:51 31TK4640_158

＊

＊

＊

If the doors are unlocked, pressthe trunk release switch on thetrunk lid.

If the doors are locked, press thetrunk release switch on the trunklid with the remote in keylessaccess operating range.

To open the trunk from the outside,push the release switch, then lift up.

The built-in key can be used tolock/unlock the doors and trunkwhen the remote batterybecomes weak and the powerdoor lock/unlock operation isdisabled. For more information,see page .

To unlock the trunk, turn the keytwice to unlock the doors, push therear of either master door lockswitch, or push UNLOCK twice onthe keyless access remote.

The trunk will lock when you lockthe driver’s door with the key , thekeyless access remote, either masterdoor lock switch, or the lock tab onthe driver’s door.

You can open the trunk in any of thefollowing ways:

Press the trunk release button onthe driver’s door.

Press and hold the trunk releasebutton on the remote transmitteror the keyless access remote.

:

201



Trunk

154

TRUNK RELEASE SWITCH

TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON


12/07/20 10:49:00 31TK4640_159

If your vehicle’s battery goes dead oris disconnected, you can open thetrunk from the rear seat by pullingthe trunk release tab through thetrunk pass-through.

To close the trunk, use the innerhandle to lower the lid, then pressdown on the back edge.

Pull down the rear seat armrest, thenpress on the button to fully releasethe cover. Reach in and locate thetrunk release tab, and pull it out.

Keep the trunk lid closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging it,and to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See

, page .57

CONTINUED

On all models

Trunk

CarbonMonoxide Hazard

Instruments

andC

ontrols

155

INNERHANDLE

BUTTON

COVER

TRUNK RELEASE TAB

12/07/20 10:49:08 31TK4640_160

To protect items in the trunk, youcan disable the trunk release buttonon the driver’s door by turning offthe trunk main switch in the glovebox, locking the glove box, andlocking the trunk pass-through coverwith the master key or the built-inkey.

If you need to give the key tosomeone else, give them the valetkey.

As a safety feature, your vehicle hasa release lever on the trunk latch sothe trunk can be opened from theinside.To open the trunk, push the releaselever in the direction indicated by thearrow.

Parents should decide if theirchildren should be shown how to usethis feature. For more informationabout child safety, see page .

To use the valet function, removethe built-in key from the remote bypressing the button, then give thatremote to someone else as a valetkey (see page ).

Your vehicle is equipped with theemergency fuel lid release in thetrunk. Refer to page for how toaccess it.

40

201

599



Trunk

Emergency Trunk Opener

Emergency Fuel Lid Release

156

TRUNK RELEASE LEVER

TRUNK MAIN SWITCH

OFF

Vehicle with keyless access system isshown.

12/07/20 10:49:17 31TK4640_161

－

－

CONTINUED

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door or all thedoors (depending on the keylessmemory setting). Press it twice tounlock the other doors. Someexterior lights will flash twice eachtime you press the button.

Press this button once tolock all doors. Some exterior lightswill flash. When you push LOCKtwice within 5 seconds, you will heara beep to verify that the doors arelocked and the security system hasset. You cannot lock the doors if anydoor is not fully closed or if the keyis in the ignition switch.

If you do not open any door within 30seconds, the doors automaticallyrelock and the security system sets.

The keyless lock acknowledgmentbeep and flashing of the lights canbe deactivated (see page ).

The door activated map lights comeon when you press the UNLOCKbutton if the door activated positionis selected. If you do not open anydoor within 30 seconds (or whateversetting of the interior light dimmingtime is set to), the light(s) will fadeout. If you relock the doors with theremote transmitter before 30seconds have elapsed, the light(s)will go off immediately.

To change the lock/unlock settingand the relock timer setting, refer tothe customized settings on page .

You can also open all power windowsand the moonroof from outside thevehicle with the remote transmitter(see page ).

125

131

207


Remote Transmitter

UNLOCK

LOCK

Instruments

andC

ontrols

157

LOCKBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

TRUNKBUTTON

LED

UNLOCKBUTTON

12/07/20 10:49:25 31TK4640_162

－

－

Be careful when removingthis screw as the head of the screwcan strip out.

Separate the keypad from thetransmitter by pushing any buttonfrom outside.

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doors,replace the battery as soon aspossible.

Battery type: CR1616

On models with keyless accesssystem, see page for how toreplace the battery on the keylessaccess remote.

To replace the battery:

Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.

Press and hold thisbutton for about 1 second to openthe trunk. You cannot open the trunkif the key is in the ignition switch.

If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.

Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperatures.

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.

Press this button forabout 2 seconds to attract attention:the horn will sound, and the exteriorlights will flash for about 30 seconds.To cancel panic mode, press anyother button on the remotetransmitter, or turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

1.2.

181

Remote Transmitter

Replacing the TransmitterBattery

TRUNK

PANIC

Remote Transmitter Care

158

NOTE:

KEYPADSCREW

12/07/20 10:49:36 31TK4640_163

－

Remove the old battery and notethe polarity. Make sure thepolarity of the new battery is thesame ( side facing up), theninsert it in the keypad.

Place a cloth on the edge of thekeypad to prevent scratches, andremove the upper half by carefullyprying on the edge with a smallflat-tip screwdriver or coin.

An improperly disposed of batterycan hurt the environment.Always confirm local regulations forbattery disposal.

Snap the two halves of the keypad,then install the parts in reverseorder.


4.

5.

3.

628

Remote TransmitterInstrum

entsand

Controls

159

BATTERY

12/07/20 10:49:43 31TK4640_164

When you unlock the driver’s doorwith your remote transmitter, eachremote transmitter activates thecustomized settings related to thatremote.

When you unlock and open thedriver’s door with the remote, thedriver’s seat (except power lumbar)and outside mirrors move to thepositions stored in memory. Anindicator on one of the drivingposition memory buttons on thedriver’s door also comes on.

You will also see the ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ or‘‘DRIVER 2’’ message on the multi-information display, depending onwhich linked remote transmitter isused.

Driving position memory(see page ).

Customized settings(see page ).

Here are the settings activated withthe remote:

The driving position memoryactivated (Driver 1, Driver 2) isshown on the back of eachtransmitter. Make sure you storeyour desired driving position in thememory that is activated by thetransmitter you normally carry.

Audio system settings(see page ).

Climate control settings(see page ).

170

236

94

228

Remote Transmitter

Recalling a Memorized DrivingPosition

160

Driver 1 Driver 2

12/08/03 20:56:10 31TK4640_165

－

＊

＊

CONTINUED

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position the seats and seat-backs.

Driver’s seat only:

1513

The passenger seat has the sameadjustments as the driver’s seat butwithout any lumbar adjustment.

Raises or lowers the seat.

Moves the whole seat upand forward, or downand backward. The frontof the seat also tilts up ordown at the same time.

Adjusts the seat-backangle forward orbackward.

The controls for the poweradjustable front seats are on theoutside edge of each seat bottom.You can adjust the seats with theignition switch in any position.Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

Models equipped with thekeyless access system have anengine start/stop button insteadof an ignition switch. VEHICLEOFF (LOCK) Mode is theequivalent of LOCK (0),ACCESSORY Mode is theequivalent of ACCESSORY (I),

and ON Mode is the equivalentof ON (II). For moreinformation, see pages and

.

Moves the seat forwardand backward.

Moves the front of theseat up or down.

Increases or decreasesthe lumbar support.

:

187184

Seats

Front Seat Power Adjustments

Instruments

andC

ontrols

161

Driver’s seat

12/07/20 10:50:05 31TK4640_166

They are most effective when youadjust them so the center of the backof the occupant’s head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers from the likelihood ofwhiplash and other injuries.

The driver’s seat includes a memoryfeature. Two seat positions can bestored in separate memories. Youcan then select a memorized positionby pushing the appropriate memorybutton. Refer to page for how tomemorize and select the seatpositions.

170

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning aboutimproperly positioning head restraints.

15

Seats

Head Restraints

162

Passenger’s seat

12/07/20 10:50:11 31TK4640_167

CONTINUED

The head restraints adjust for height.You need both hands to adjust therestraint. Do not attempt to adjust itwhile driving. To raise a front or rearcenter head restraint, pull upward.To lower the restraint, push therelease button sideways, and pushthe restraint down.

To lower either rear outer headrestraint for better visibility, pressthe tilt button on the side of the headrestraint. It folds down backward. Toraise the rear outer head restraint,pull it up from behind by hand. Makesure the head restraint locks inposition when you lower or raise it.

Seats

Adjusting the Head Restraint

Instruments

andC

ontrols

163

Front

LEGS

SEAT-BACK

CUSHION

RELEASE BUTTON

Rear Center

SEAT-BACK

RELEASEBUTTON

LEGS

TILT BUTTON

Rear OuterCUSHION

12/07/20 10:50:18 31TK4640_168

To remove a front or rear centerhead restraint for cleaning or repair,pull it up as far as it will go. Push therelease button, then pull the restraintout of the seat-back.

To remove either rear outer headrestraint, push the tilt button, thenfold the head restraint backward.Push the release button, then pullthe restraint out of the seat-back.

Make sure the head restraint locksin position when you reinstall it.

When reinstalling a head restraint,put the legs back in place. Thenadjust it to the appropriate heightwhile pressing the release button.

Seats

Removing the Head Restraint

164

Rear Outer TILT BUTTON

RELEASE BUTTON

Failure to reinstall, or correctlyreinstall, the head restraints canresult in severe injury during acrash.

Always replace the headrestraints before driving.

12/07/20 10:50:25 31TK4640_169

The driver’s and front passenger’sseats have active head restraints. Ifthe vehicle is struck severely fromthe rear, the occupant properlysecured with the seat belt will bepushed against the seat-back and thehead restraint will automaticallymove forward.

For a head restraint system to workproperly:

Do not hang any items on the headrestraints, or from the restraintlegs.

Do not place any object betweenan occupant and the seat-back.

Install each restraint in its properlocation.

Only use genuine Acurareplacement head restraints.

This reduces the distance betweenthe restraint and the occupant’s head.It also helps protect the occupantsagainst the likelihood of whiplashand injuries to the neck and upperspine.

After a collision, the activatedrestraint should return to its normalposition.

If the restraints do not return to theirnormal position, or in the event of asevere collision, have the vehicleinspected by an Acura dealer.

Active Head Restraints

SeatsInstrum

entsand

Controls

165

12/07/20 10:50:33 31TK4640_170

The lid of the console compartmentcan be used as an armrest.

The rear seat armrest is in thecenter of the rear seat. Pivot it downto use it.

A beverage holder is located in thearmrest.

To open the cover, pull down therear seat armrest, then press on thebutton to fully release the cover. Toclose the cover, swing it up, and pushfirmly on the top. Make sure itlatches properly.

Trunk Pass-through CoverArmrest

Seats

166

Front Rear

COVER

BUTTON To lock

12/07/20 10:50:40 31TK4640_171

Make sure all items in the trunk andthose extending through the pass-through are secured.

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

For security, this cover can belocked and unlocked only with themaster key(the built-in key onmodels with keyless access system).To lock the cover, insert the key, andturn it clockwise.

Never drive with this cover open andthe trunk lid open.See onpage .

When driving after dark, theautomatic dimming rearview mirrorreduces the glare from headlightsbehind you.

57

CONTINUED

Mirrors

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Seats, MirrorsInstrum

entsand

Controls

167

SENSORINDICATOR

There is also a sensor on the back ofthe mirror. Items hung on the mirrormay block this sensor and af f ect itsperf ormance.

13/04/02 19:11:30 31TK4640_172

＊

＊

Both outside door mirrors have areverse tilt feature. When inreverse, the selected mirror willtilt down slightly to improve yourview as you parallel park. Shiftingout of reverse will return themirror to its original position.

To tilt the driver’s mirror, placethe selector switch in the leftposition.

To tilt the passenger’s mirror,place the switch in the rightposition.

To turn the feature off, place theswitch in the center position.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns theadjustment switch off to keep yoursettings.

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

With the ignition switch in theON (II) position, move theselector switch to the L (driver’sside), or R (passenger’s side).


and .

Outside mirror positions can bestored in the driving positionmemory system (see page ).

3.

1.

2.

:

184 187

170

Adjusting the Power Mirrors Reverse Tilt Door Mirror

Mirrors

168

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

SELECTOR SWITCH

12/07/20 10:50:56 31TK4640_173

＊

＊

＊

This heated mirror function has atimer (see page ).

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, or the power mode ON,turn on the heaters by pressing thebutton. The indicator in the buttoncomes on as a reminder. Press thebutton again to turn the heaters off.Pressing this button also turns therear window defogger on and off.


and .

If the outside temperature is below41°F (5°C), the heated mirrorfunction will come on automaticallyfor 10 minutes when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

:

145

184 187

Mirrors

Power Mirror Heaters

Instruments

andC

ontrols

169

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

12/07/20 10:51:02 31TK4640_174

＊

＊

Store a driving position only whenthe vehicle is parked.

Your vehicle has a memory featurefor the driver’s seat and outsidemirror positions.

Seat, except for power lumbar, andoutside mirror positions can bestored in separate memories. Youselect a memorized position bypushing the appropriate button orusing the appropriate remotetransmitter or the keyless accessremote (Driver 1 or Driver 2).

Adjust the seat to a comfortableposition (see page ).

Adjust the outside mirrors for bestvisibility (see page ).

Press and release the SET buttonon the control panel. You will heara beep. Immediately press andhold one of the memory buttons (1or 2) until you hear two beeps.The indicator in the memorybutton will come on. The currentpositions of the driver’s seat andoutside mirrors are now stored.

Turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. You cannot add anew driving position to thememory unless the ignition switchis in the ON (II) position. You canrecall a memorized position withthe ignition switch in any position.


and .

3.

1.

2.

:

184

168

187

161

Storing a Driving Position inMemory

Driving Position Memory System

170

MEMORY BUTTONS

SET BUTTON

12/07/20 10:51:10 31TK4640_175

Fail to press a memory buttonwithin 5 seconds.

To cancel the storing procedureafter pressing the SET button, doany of the following:

To select a memorized position, dothis:

Each memory button stores only onedriving position. Storing a newposition erases the previous settingstored in that button’s memory. Ifyou want to add a new position whileretaining the current one, use theother memory button.

Make sure the parking brake is setand the shift lever is in Park(automatic).

Press the desired memory button(1 or 2) until you hear a beep, thenrelease the button.

Change the power mode out fromON.

Turn the ignition switch out fromthe ON (II) position.

Readjust the outside mirrorposition.

Readjust the seat position.

Press the SET button again within5 seconds.

1.

2.

CONTINUED




Selecting a Memorized Position

Instruments

andC

ontrols

171

MEMORY BUTTONS

12/07/20 10:51:20 31TK4640_176

If desired, you can use theadjustment switches to change thepositions of the seat or outsidemirrors after they are in theirmemorized positions. If you changethe memorized position, theindicator in the memory button willgo out. To keep this driving positionfor later use, you must store it in thedriving position memory.

To stop the system’s automaticadjustment, do any of these actions:

Push any of the adjustmentswitches for the seat.

The system will move the seat andoutside mirrors to the memorizedpositions. The indicator in theselected memory button will flashduring movement. When theadjustments are complete, you willhear two beeps, and the indicator willremain on.

To change the ‘‘MEMORYPOSITION LINK’’ setting, see page

.

Press any button on the driver’sdoor: SET, memory button 1 or 2.

If the parking brake is not set, youmust press and hold the memorybutton until the adjustment iscomplete.

Adjust the outside mirrors.

Shift out of Park (automatic).

Release the parking brake(manual).

113

On vehicles with manual transmission


172

12/07/20 10:51:28 31TK4640_177

Always keep the remote and thebuilt-in key away from any magneticmaterial.

You should have received a keynumber tag with your built-in key.You will need this key number if youever have to get a lost key replaced.Use only Acura-approved key blanks.

Your vehicle has a keyless accesssystem. This system allows you tooperate the vehicle without anignition key. When you carry theremote with you, you can lock/unlock the door(s), unlock the trunk,and start the engine.

When the vehicle battery is dead.When the remote battery is dead.

A vehicle is being operated with atransmitter nearby.

The remote is covered by metal.

You carry a cell phone, a laptopcomputer, or other electricaldevice near the remote.

There is strong electrical currentnearby.

The battery of the remote is weak.The system may not work if:

Each keyless access remote has abuilt-in key. This key is used to lock/unlock the doors when the remotebattery becomes weak and thepower door lock/unlock operation isdisabled. You cannot start the enginewith this key.

Make sure the driver always carriesthe remote/built-in key set.

Protect the remote and the built-inkey from direct sunlight, hightemperature, and high humidity.

Do not drop the remote or thebuilt-in key, and do not set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the remote and the built-in keyaway from liquids. If they get wet,dry them immediately with a softcloth.

The built-in keys do not containbatteries.


Keyless Access SystemInstrum

entsand

Controls

173

12/07/20 10:51:40 31TK4640_178

The following keys come with yourvehicle. Refer to page for how toseparate the keys.

This key is used to lock/unlock thedoors, glove box, and trunk pass-through cover.

This remote is used to lock/unlockthe doors and unlock the trunk.When you carry the remote, you canlock/unlock the doors, unlock thetrunk, and start the engine.

Anyone can lock/unlock a door oropen the trunk if the remote iswithin the operating range of thedoor or the trunk.

You can lock/unlock the doorswithin about a 32 inch (about 80 cm)radius from the outside door handle.You can open the trunk within abouta 32 inch (about 80 cm) radius fromthe trunk release switch.

201

Keys

Keyless Access System

Built-in Key

Keyless Access Remote

174

BUILT-IN KEYS

OPERATINGRANGE

KEYLESS ACCESSREMOTES

KEY NUMBER TAG

12/07/20 10:51:48 31TK4640_179

The remote may not work if:It is too close to the vehicle.It is above or below the vehicle,even when it is within its operatingrange.

The handle of each front door has asensor. That sensor works with theremote so you can automaticallyunlock the door(s).

By default, only the driver’s doorunlocks when you grab its handle.

Each front door has a LOCK/UNLOCK feature.

To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESSBEEP’’ setting, see page .

To unlock the remaining doors andthe trunk, press the UNLOCKbutton on the remote or the rear ofthe master door lock switch on thedriver’s door.

To change the ‘‘DOOR UNLOCKMODE’’ setting, see page .

All the doors unlock when you grabthe handle of the front passenger’sdoor.

When you unlock the door(s), someexterior lights blink twice and thesystem beeps twice.

To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESSLIGHT FLASH’’ setting, see page

.

118

117

116

CONTINUED


Unlocking the Door(s)

Instruments

andC

ontrols

175

12/07/20 10:51:59 31TK4640_180

Before locking the doors, make surethe remote is not inside the vehicle.

When you press the door lock buttonon the front door, all the doors andthe trunk will lock.

The remote is not within theoperating range.

The remote is too close to thevehicle.

When the doors are unlocked.

The vehicle battery is dead.

The remote battery is dead.

Each unlock sensor does not operatewhen:

If you wear a glove while grabbing afront door handle, the door sensormay be slow to respond or may notrespond by unlocking the doors.

If you do not open any of the doorswithin 30 seconds, they willautomatically relock.

If a remote is within operating rangewhile you wash your vehicle or whenit is raining heavily, the door sensorsmay respond by unlocking the doors.


Locking the Doors

176

DOOR LOCK BUTTON

12/07/20 10:52:07 31TK4640_181

When you lock the doors, someexterior lights blink and the systembeeps once. If no exterior lights blinkand/or no beeper sounds, check tosee if the trunk or hood is open.

To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESSLIGHT FLASH’’ setting, see page

.

To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESSBEEP’’ setting, see page .

Within 2 seconds of pressing thedoor lock button or locking the doorswith the remote, pull the handle tomake sure the doors are actuallylocked. The door unlock sensors willnot operate for about 2 seconds afterthe doors are locked.

The door lock button does not workif:

The remote is not within theoperating range.

If you open the driver’s door, pull itslock tab rearward on the door, andshut it when the remote is inside thevehicle, the driver’s door will unlock.Make sure you carry the remotewith you when you lock the doors.Any door is open.

The power mode is not set toVEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

The remote is in the keylessaccess slot.

The remote is too close to thevehicle.

The remote battery is dead.

The vehicle battery is dead.

This function is also activated on thefront passenger’s door. If you openthe front passenger’s door, and shutit after pulling its lock tab rearwardwhen the remote is inside the vehicle,all doors will unlock.

The door lock prevention will alsoactivate if you try to lock the doorswith the master door lock switchwhen the remote is inside the vehicle.

117

118


Door Lock Prevention

Instruments

andC

ontrols

177

12/07/20 10:52:18 31TK4640_182

When you close the trunk with alldoors locked, the trunk will lock.

When you unlock all the doors withthe remote, built-in key or powerdoor lock master switch, the trunkwill unlock.

The remote is too close to thetrunk lid.

The trunk cannot be locked if:

The remote is on the interior rearpanel.

The remote is too close to theseat-back of the rear seat or theseat cushion.

You can open the trunk in any ofthese ways:

Push the trunk release switchwhen carrying the remote (if thedoors are locked).

Press the trunk release buttoninside the vehicle.

Press the trunk button on theremote.

To close the trunk, use the innerhandle to lower the lid, then pressdown on the back edge.

Push the trunk release switchwhen the doors are unlocked.

Locking and Unlocking the Trunk Opening and Closing the Trunk


178

TRUNK RELEASE SWITCH

INNER HANDLE

12/07/20 10:52:29 31TK4640_183

－

CONTINUED

Before closing the trunk, make surethe remote is not in the trunk.

If you close the trunk when theremote is in it, the system beeps, andthe trunk reopens.

Keep the trunk lid closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging thelid, and to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See

on page .

Press this button once tolock all doors. Some exterior lightswill flash. When you push the LOCKbutton twice within 5 seconds, youwill hear a beep to verify that thedoors are locked and the securitysystem is set.

You cannot lock the doors if anydoor is not fully closed, if the remoteis in the keyless access remote slot,or if the power mode is in anyposition except VEHICLE OFF(LOCK).

When you cannot set the securitysystem because the trunk or hood isopen, no exterior light blinks and/orno beeper sounds.

57


CarbonMonoxide Hazard

Keyless Access Remote

LOCK

Instruments

andC

ontrols

179

LED

PANICBUTTON

TRUNKRELEASEBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

UNLOCKBUTTON

12/07/20 10:52:37 31TK4640_184

－－

－

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door. Press ittwice to unlock the other doors.Some exterior lights will flash twiceeach time you press the button. Thedoor activated map lights (if the dooractivated light switch is set) willcome on when you press theUNLOCK button. If you do not openany door within 30 seconds, the maplights fade out. If you relock thedoors with the remote before 30seconds have elapsed, the lights willgo off immediately.

Press this button forabout 1 second to open the trunk.You cannot open the trunk with theexterior trunk release switch if theremote is in the keyless accessremote slot, or the power mode is inany position except VEHICLE OFF(LOCK). You cannot open the trunkwith the remote if the trunk mainswitch in the glove box is turned off.

Press this button forabout 2 seconds to attract attention:the horn will sound and the exteriorlights will flash for about 30 seconds.To cancel panic mode, press anyother button on the remote.

To change the ‘‘KEY AND REMOTEUNLOCK MODE’’ setting, see page

.

To change the ‘‘KEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGMENT’’ setting, seepage .

To change the ‘‘SECURITYRELOCK TIMER’’ setting, see page

.

If you unlock the doors with theremote, but do not open any doorwithin 30 seconds, the doorsautomatically relock and the securitysystem sets.

To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIME,’’ see page .

133

131

130

121

UNLOCK TRUNK

PANIC


180

12/07/20 10:52:44 31TK4640_185

＋

An improperly disposed of batterycan hurt the environment.Always confirm local regulations forbattery disposal.

Battery type: CR2032Replace the battery if necessary.

To replace the battery:

Replace the old battery with a newbattery. Place the battery so theside is facing up. Snap the twohalves of the remote case backtogether.Remove the built-in key (see page

).

Place a cloth on the edge toprevent scratches, then removethe upper half by carefully pryingon the edge with a coin.


1.

2.

3.

201

628

Replacing the Remote Battery


entsand

Controls

181

12/07/20 10:52:52 31TK4640_186

Here are the settings activated withthe remote:

Driving position memory(see page ).

Audio system settings(see page ).

Climate control settings(see page ).

Navigation system preferences(see the navigation systemmanual).

When you unlock the door with yourremote, each remote activates thecustomized settings related to thatremote. The driver’s ID (Driver 1 orDriver 2) is shown on the back ofeach remote.

Customized settings(see page ).

Avoid dropping or throwing theremote.

Protect the remote from extremetemperatures.

Do not immerse the remote in anyliquid.

If you lose a remote, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

285

170

94

228


Remote CareRecalling a Memorized DrivingPosition

182

DRIVER’S ID

12/08/03 20:58:11 31TK4640_187

The engine may not run, and somemalfunctions may occur, if theremote is outside the vehicle.

The engine may not start if theremote is subjected to strong radiowaves.

Also, the engine may not start if theremote is too close to the windows.


Engine Start/Stop ButtonOperating Range

Instruments

andC

ontrols

183

Make sure you know where the remoteis when you are inside the vehicle.

Remember that you can start the enginewhen the remote is inside the vehicle.

Make sure you always carry the remotewith you.

12/07/20 10:53:08 31TK4640_188

The keyless access system has fourpower modes: VEHICLE OFF(LOCK), ACCESSORY, ON, andSTART.

This system uses the engine start/stop button instead of an ignitionswitch to start and stop the engine. Ifyou are carrying the keyless accessremote, you can start the engine bypressing the engine start/stopbutton with the brake pedal(automatic transmission) or theclutch pedal (manual transmission)depressed. You can also stop theengine by pushing this button whenthe vehicle is stopped.

Each time you press the enginestart/stop button without pressingthe brake pedal (automatictransmission) or the clutch pedal(manual transmission) whilecarrying the keyless access remote,the power mode switches betweenVEHICLE OFF (LOCK),ACCESSORY, and ON.

You can start the engine at any timeby pressing the engine start/stopbutton, while pressing the brakepedal, with the shift lever in Park orneutral position.

You can start the engine at any timeby pressing the engine start/stop

button, while pressing the clutchpedal fully, with the shift lever in anygear position.

To change the power mode withoutturning on the engine, press theengine start/stop button withoutpressing the brake pedal (automatictransmission) or the clutch pedal(manual transmission). The powermode will be changed as shown onthe next page.




Engine Start/Stop ButtonOperation

Switching the Power Modes

Changing the Power Mode withoutStarting the Engine

184

12/07/20 10:53:16 31TK4640_189

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

Automatic Transmission Manual Transmission

185

: Press the engine start/stop button.

: Press the engine start/stop button without the shift lever in P.

: Shift to Park, then press the engine start/stop button.

Do the following without pressing the brake pedal.

VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)Indicator in the button is off.

ACCESSORY

ON

: Press the engine start/stop buttonwithout pressing the clutch pedal.

Indicator in the button is on.Indicator in the button blinks(from ON to ACCESSORY)Some electrical components such as theaudio system and accessory power socketscan be operated.

Indicator in the button is on when theengine is not running.(If the engine is running, this indicator is off.)All electrical components can be used.

12/07/20 10:53:24 31TK4640_190

Automatic Transmission Manual TransmissionHow the mode is switched dependson if the shift lever is in Park or not.

Each time you press the enginestart/stop button without pressingthe clutch pedal, the power modeswitches between VEHICLE OFF(LOCK), ACCESSORY, and ONmodes. To change the mode fromON to ACCESSORY, orACCESSORY to VEHICLE OFF(LOCK), press the engine start/stopbutton twice.

If the keyless access systemmain switch in the glove box is off,make sure to insert the keylessaccess remote into the keylessaccess slot to turn on your vehicle’spower mode. For more information,refer to page .

To remove the keyless accessremote from the slot, make sure thepower mode is VEHICLE OFF(LOCK).

With the shift lever in Park, thepower mode changes from ON toVEHICLE OFF (LOCK) when youpush the engine start/stop button.

To change the mode from ON toACCESSORY with the shift leverposition in Park, take your foot offthe brake and press the enginestart/stop button twice.

To change the mode fromACCESSORY to VEHICLE OFF(LOCK), shift to Park, then pressthe engine start/stop button twice.

195


186

NOTE:

12/07/20 10:53:31 31TK4640_191

Engine is turned off andpower is shut down.The steering wheel islocked.No electrical componentscan be used.

Indicator-OffEngine is turned offand power is shutdown.The steering wheel islocked.No electricalcomponents can beused.

Use this position to startthe engine.The ignition switchreturns to the ON (II)position when yourelease the key.

Engine is turned off.Some electrical componentssuch as the audio systemand accessory powersockets can be operated.

Normal key position whiledriving.All electrical componentscan be used.

Indicator-OffThe modeautomatically returnsto ON after theengine starts.

Indicator-On or blinkingEngine is turned off.Some electricalcomponents such as theaudio system andaccessory power socketscan be operated.

Indicator-On (engine is turned off)Off (engine is running)

All electrical componentscan be used.

VEHICLE OFF(LOCK)

ACCESSORY START

Ignition SwitchPosition

Power Mode

LOCK (0) ON (II)ACCESSORY (I)

Without KeylessAccess System

With KeylessAccess System andEngine Start/StopButton

START (III)

OffIndicator is:

ON

On

Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison


entsand

Controls

187

12/07/20 10:53:42 31TK4640_192

You can start the engine in anypower mode.

To start the engine:

Depress the brake pedal and pressthe engine start/stop button.

Move the shift lever to Park (P).

After you unlock and open thedriver’s door, you will see the ‘‘TOSTART ENGINE:’’ message on themulti-information display. The ‘‘TOTURN ACCESSORY ON:’’ messagewill be shown after three seconds.The display switches between the‘‘TO START ENGINE:’’ and ‘‘TOTURN ACCESSORY ON:’’ messagesevery three seconds.

Apply the parking brake.

Press the clutch pedal down all theway.The engine does not start unlessthe clutch pedal is pressed.

Press the engine start/stop button.

1.

2.

1.

2.

3.

Automatic Transmission

Manual Transmission


Starting the Engine Starting Guidance

188


BRAKE PEDAL

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION


MANUAL TRANSMISSION

CLUTCH PEDALM/T

TO TURNACCESSORY ON:

A/T

TO START ENGINE:

12/07/20 10:53:55 31TK4640_193

After entering the vehicle, insert thekeyless access remote into the slotto start the engine (see page ).

If the keyless access remote batterydies, you may have to use the built-inkey to unlock/lock the vehicle. Thebuilt-in key is stored inside thekeyless access remote (see page

).

If the steering wheel is locked, theengine cannot start. The multi-information display shows you theabove message and the indicator inthe engine start/stop button blinks.To unlock the steering wheel, applyforce by turning it left and rightwhile pressing the engine start/stopbutton at the same time.

the multi-information display shows the‘‘INSERT KEYLESS REMOTEINTO SLOT’’ message, then the ‘‘TOSTART ENGINE:’’ message will beshown after you insert the remoteinto the slot. Each time you press theengine start/stop button, the‘‘INSERT KEYLESS REMOTEINTO SLOT’’ message is shown onthe multi-information display if theremote is not in the slot.

201

197

When the keyless access system mainswitch in the glove box is off,

To unlock the steering wheel


entsand

Controls

189

NOTE:

TO UNLOCK WHEEL

12/07/20 10:54:02 31TK4640_194

To turn the vehicle off, make surethe vehicle is completely stopped anddo the following.

If the shift lever is in any gearother than neutral, depress theclutch pedal, then press the enginestart/stop button.

The engine stops and the powermode switches from ON toVEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

Before leaving the vehicle, makesure it is off. You can verify if thepower is off by checking the enginestart/stop button LED indicator.

You can only place the vehicle in theVEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode if thetransmission is in Park. You will seethe ‘‘SHIFT TO PARK’’ message onthe multi-information display if youpress the engine start/stop button toturn the vehicle off with the shiftlever in any other position except forP (Park).

If the shift lever is in neutral, pressthe engine start/stop button.

Press the engine start/stop buttonwith your foot on the brake pedal.

Shift to park (P).

Make sure to press the brake pedalor set the parking brake beforeturning off the engine. If your foot isOFF the clutch pedal in any gearposition, pressing the engine start/stop button turns off the engine, andthe vehicle may move forward orbackward.

1.2.

Manual Transmission


On automatic transmission modelsOn manual transmission models

Stopping the Engine


Operation Guidance

190

SHIFT TO PARK

A/T model onlyA/T model

12/07/20 10:54:13 31TK4640_195

CONTINUED

If the power mode is in ACCESSORY,you may see the ‘‘ACCESSORYMODE’’ message on the multi-information display.

After the driver’s door is opened, youwill see the ‘‘TO TURN VEHICLEOFF:’’ message on the multi-information display. Press the enginestart/stop button twice with yourfoot off the brake pedal to changethe power mode from ACCESSORYto VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

Press the engine start/stop buttontwice with your foot off the brakepedal (automatic transmission) orthe clutch pedal (manualtransmission) to change the powermode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

If you open the driver’s door in theACCESSORY mode, a beeper willsound. You will also see a‘‘ACCESSORY MODE’’ or ‘‘TOTURN VEHICLE OFF:’’ message onthe multi-information display.

Before leaving the vehicle, makesure it is in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

All models


entsand

Controls

191

TO TURN VEHICLE OFFACCESSORY MODE

12/07/20 10:54:21 31TK4640_196

The engine start/stop button may beused to stop the engine due to anemergency situation even whiledriving. If you must stop the engine,do either of the following operations:

Press and hold the engine start/stop button for three seconds.Firmly press the engine start/stopbutton three times.

Do not press the button while drivingunless it is absolutely necessary forthe engine to be switched off.

If you are driving, the power modeswitches from ON to ACCESSORYor VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)whenever you perform eitherprocedure. However, the steeringwheel will NOT lock.

If you cannot stop the engine bypressing the engine start/stopbutton once when the vehicle isstopped and the shift lever is in Park(automatic transmission), do eitheremergency engine stop procedure.In this case, the power mode willchange to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK),however, the steering wheel mayNOT lock.


Emergency Engine Stop

192

12/07/20 10:54:27 31TK4640_197

CONTINUED

If you take the keyless accessremote out of the vehicle and closethe door with the power mode ON orACCESSORY, the inside and outsidebeepers sound and a ‘‘KEYLESSREMOTE NOT DETECTED’’message will be displayed on themulti-information display, and thedoors will not lock.

The displayed message goes awaywhen you bring the remote backinside the vehicle.

If the engine is running and you takethe remote out of the vehicle, it willcontinue to run, and the inside andoutside beepers will sound. Once thepower mode is changed to VEHICLEOFF (LOCK), the engine will notrestart until you bring back a remoteinto the vehicle.

Even when the remote is inside thevehicle, the beeper may sound whenthe location of the remote is notdetected due to surroundingconditions. It is not a failure. Makesure that you carry the remote withyou.

The engine does not start if you pushthe engine start/stop button whenthe remote is outside the vehicle.Check where the remote is. Makesure that the remote is in the vehiclewith you when you operate theengine start/stop button.

The outside beeper sounds when thepower mode is in ACCESSORY, anda door is opened, then closed.


Keyless Remote Not DetectedBeeper and Message

Instruments

andC

ontrols

193

12/07/20 10:54:35 31TK4640_198

The battery in the remote normallylasts about 2 years. To ensuremaximum battery life, do not storethe remote close to electrical devicessuch as computers or TVs. When themulti-information display shows‘‘CHANGE KEYLESS REMOTEBATTERY,’’ replace the battery assoon as possible (see page ).

If the remote battery becomes weakand the power door lock/unlockoperation is disabled, you shouldinsert the remote into the keylessaccess remote slot to set the powermode and start the engine. Afterinserting the remote into the slot,operate the engine start/stop buttonas previously described (see pages

and ). For more informationon the keyless access slot, see page

.

Inserting the remote does not chargethe remote battery. You shouldreplace the battery as soon aspossible.

181

184 187

197


Keyless Remote Low Battery

194

12/07/20 10:54:40 31TK4640_199

This switch is in the glove box. Youcan cancel the keyless access systemfeatures, which are locking/unlocking the doors, unlocking thetrunk, and starting the engine whilecarrying the keyless access remote.To cancel the system, turn thekeyless access system main switchoff by pushing it down.

Turning off the keylessaccess system will disable lockoutprevention.

With the keyless access remotesystem main switch off, you shouldinsert the keyless access remote intothe keyless remote slot to start theengine. For more information, seepage .

According to the message on themulti-information display, thisindicator has two indications. A‘‘CHECK KEYLESS ACCESSSYSTEM’’ message indicates aproblem with the keyless accesssystem. A ‘‘CHECK KEYLESSSTARTING SYSTEM’’ messageindicates a problem with the keylessstarting system.

This indicator normally comes on forseveral seconds when you changethe power mode to ON.

197

CONTINUED


Keyless Access Remote SystemMain Switch

Keyless Access SystemIndicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

195

NOTE:

MAIN SWITCH

OFF

12/07/20 10:54:49 31TK4640_200

Have your vehicle checked by yourdealer if:

The keyless access systemindicator comes on and stays onwhile you are driving.

The indicator comes on after theengine has started.

In this case, use the built-in key tolock/unlock the doors and insert thekeyless access remote into the slotto start the engine (see page ).

Have your vehicle checked by yourdealer if:

The multi-information displayshows ‘‘CHECK KEYLESSACCESS SYSTEM.’’

The keyless access systemindicator comes on and stays onwhile you are driving.

The indicator comes on and stayson in any power mode.

197

Check Keyless Access System Check Keyless Starting System


196

KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEMINDICATOR

KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEMINDICATOR

12/07/20 10:54:58 31TK4640_201

In this case, you should not shut offyour engine until you are in a safelocation or at your dealer, as yourvehicle may not restart.

The multi-information displayshows ‘‘CHECK KEYLESSSTARTING SYSTEM.’’

If the remote battery becomesweak and the power door lock/unlock operation is disabled.

When the keyless access remotesystem main switch in the glovebox is set to off.

In the following two cases, you haveto insert the keyless access remoteinto the keyless access remote slotto set the power mode and start theengine:

To remove the keyless accessremote, place the vehicle in theVEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode, thenpull out the keyless access remote.

If the keyless access remote hasbeen inserted into the slot with thekeyless access remote system mainswitch in the glove box turned off, itwill lock into place when the power ison. The slot will unlock when thepower is turned off.

If the keyless access remotedoes not come out of the slot easily,try to push it in before pulling it out.Make sure the vehicle is inVEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode.

CONTINUED


Keyless Access Remote Slot

Instruments

andC

ontrols

197

NOTE:KEYLESS ACCESS REMOTE

SLOT

12/07/20 10:55:06 31TK4640_202

To insert the keyless access remote:

On all models

On automatic transmission models

On manual transmission models

When you open the driver’s door,and each time you press the enginestart/stop button, you will see the‘‘INSERT KEYLESS REMOTEINTO SLOT’’ message on the multi-information display in the followingsituations:

When the keyless access systemmain switch (see page ) is off.

The multi-information display showsthe ‘‘ACCESSORY MODE’’ or ‘‘TOUNLOCK KEYLESS REMOTETURN OFF POWER’’ message toremind you to change the powermode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

The multi-information display showsthe ‘‘ACCESSORY MODE’’ messageto remind you that the power modeis in ACCESSORY.

To avoid damaging the slot, do notinsert any other objects into the slotor put a sticker on the keyless accessremote.

Inserting the remote does not chargethe remote battery. If necessary, youshould replace the battery as soon aspossible.

When the keyless access remotesystem main switch in the glove boxis set to ON, the remote remainsunlocked when you insert it into thekeyless access remote slot and thepower mode is turned on.

195


Operation GuidanceUnlocked Keyless Access Remote

198

12/07/20 10:55:16 31TK4640_203

CONTINUED

The message reminds you that thekeyless access remote is locked inthe keyless access remote slot, andthat the power mode is in theACCESSORY or ON position. Toremove the keyless access remote,turn the power mode off by pressingthe engine start/stop button twice(in ACCESSORY mode) or once (inON mode) without pressing thebrake pedal.

When the keyless access remotesystem main switch in the glove boxis set to OFF, the multi-informationdisplay will show the ‘‘TO UNLOCKKEYLESS REMOTE TURN OFFPOWER’’ message after you shift toPark.

When the keyless access remoteis not in the vehicle.

To unlock the keyless access remote:On automatic transmission models


entsand

Controls

199

12/07/20 10:55:21 31TK4640_204

To remove the keyless access remote:

On automatic transmission models

If the vehicle is left in theACCESSORY mode, the ‘‘TO TURNVEHICLE OFF’’ message is shownon the multi-information displaywhen you open the driver’s door. Ifthe vehicle is left in the VEHICLEOFF (LOCK) mode with the keylessaccess remote in the slot, the‘‘REMOVE KEYLESS REMOTEFROM SLOT’’ message is shown onthe multi-information display.

In ACCESSORY mode, the‘‘ACCESSORY MODE’’ message willbe displayed a few seconds after the‘‘TO UNLOCK KEYLESS REMOTETURN OFF POWER’’ message isdisplayed.

If you turn off the vehicle and leavethe remote in the keyless accessremote slot, you will also hear areminder beeper.

The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can press the enginestart/stop button twice withoutpressing the brake pedal to set thevehicle into the VEHICLE OFF(LOCK) mode.


200

12/07/20 10:55:27 31TK4640_205

The trunk and glove box cannot beopened when you turn the trunkmain switch off and lock the glovebox and trunk pass-through coverwith the built-in key. Then, the trunkcannot be opened by using theremote or the exterior trunk releaseswitch.

Remove the built-in key from theremote by pressing the button, thengive that remote to someone else asa valet key.

To avoid damaging the remote andthe built-in key, never pull on thebuilt-in key unless you are pressingthe release button.

The keyless access system uses anelectric field to identify the remote.

If you use medical equipment suchas a cardiac pacemaker, ask yourdoctor if the electric field used bythe remote will affect it.

The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the doors and the trunk whenthe remote battery becomes weakand the power door lock/unlockoperation is disabled.

To remove the built-in key, pull it outwhile pressing the release button. Toreinstall the built-in key, push thekey into the remote until it clicks.

Valet FunctionBuilt-in key and Remote


entsand

Controls

201

RELEASE BUTTON

BUILT-IN KEY

12/07/20 10:55:35 31TK4640_206

＊

＊

Push the right side of the switch, HI,to rapidly heat up the seat. After theseat reaches a comfortabletemperature, select LO by pushingthe left side of the switch. This willkeep the seat warm.


and .

The ignition switch must be in theON (II) position to use the heaters.

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. Because of the sensorsfor the side airbag cutoff system,there is no heater in the passenger’sseat-back.

:

184 187

TL and TL with Technology PackagemodelsSH-AWD and SH-AWD with TechnologyPackage models

Seat Heaters

202

SEAT HEATER SWITCHESHEATERS

Passenger’s Seat

Driver’s Seat

12/07/20 10:55:41 31TK4640_207

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

Do not use the seat heater in theHI setting for an extended period,because it draws large amounts ofcurrent from the battery.

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

In the HI setting, the heater turns offwhen the seat gets warm, and turnsback on after the seat’s temperaturedrops.

In the LO setting, the heater runscontinuously. It does not cycle withtemperature changes.

Seat HeatersInstrum

entsand

Controls

203

Heat induced burns arepossible when using seatheaters.

Persons with a diminishedability to sense temperature(e.g., persons with diabetes,lower-limb nerve damage, orparalysis) or with sensitive skinshould not use seat heaters.

12/08/03 20:58:17 31TK4640_208

－－－－

You must select the ON mode byoperating the engine start/stopbutton (see page ) to use theheaters and the air ventilationsystem.

To use the heaters, press the seatheater button. The indicator (red)above the button will come on. Thereare four settings in the heaters:HI Three indicators on.MID Two indicators on.LO One indicator on.OFF All indicators off.

When you press the seat heaterbutton once, the heater is set to HI.After the seat reaches a comfortabletemperature, select MID or LOW bypressing the seat heater button. Thiswill keep the seat warm. To shutdown the heater, press the seatheater button until the indicators gooff.

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters and an air ventilationsystem. The passenger seat only hasheaters in the seat bottom becauseof the side airbag system.

185

TL with Advance Package and CanadianElite Package modelsSH-AWD with Advance Package andCanadian SH-AWD Elite Packagemodels

Seat Heaters and Ventilations

204

INDICATORS

Driver’sseatHEATERS

Passenger’sseat

SEAT VENTILATIONBUTTON

SEAT HEATER BUTTON

12/07/20 10:55:53 31TK4640_209

－－－－

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters and the seatventilation:

Do not use the seat heater or theseat ventilation in the HI settingfor an extended period, because itdraws large amounts of currentfrom the battery.

To ventilate the seat, press the seatventilation button. The indicator(blue) above the button will come on.The air ventilation system has foursettings:

HI Three indicators on.MID Two indicators on.LO One indicator on.OFF All indicators off.

When you press the seat ventilationbutton once, the system is set to HI.To change to the lower mode, pressthe seat ventilation button. To turnthe air ventilation off, press the seatventilation button until the indicatorsgo off. The heater runs continuously and

does not automatically turn offafter a period of time.

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters or the seat ventilation,even on the LO setting. It canweaken the battery, causing hardstarting.

Seat Heaters and VentilationsInstrum

entsand

Controls

205

Heat induced burns arepossible when using seatheaters.

Persons with a diminishedability to sense temperature(e.g., persons with diabetes,lower-limb nerve damage, orparalysis) or with sensitive skinshould not use seat heaters.

12/08/03 20:58:23 31TK4640_210

－＊

＊

To open either frontwindow fully, push the windowswitch firmly down to the seconddetent, then release it. The windowautomatically goes down all the way.To stop the window from going allthe way down, pull back on thewindow switch briefly.

To close either front window fully,pull back the window switch firmlyto the second detent, then release it.The window automatically goes allthe way up. To stop the window fromgoing all the way up, push down onthe window switch briefly.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position to raise or lower anywindow. To open a window, push theswitch down and hold it. Release theswitch when you want the window tostop. Pull back on the switch andhold it to close the window.


and .

:

184 187

AUTO

Power Windows

206

DRIVER’S WINDOWSWITCH

MAIN SWITCHFRONT PASSENGER’SWINDOW SWITCH

INDICATOR

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

12/07/20 10:56:06 31TK4640_211

If either front window runs into anyobstacle while it is closingautomatically, it will reversedirection, and then stop. To close thewindow, remove the obstacle, thenuse the window switch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

The driver’s window autoreverse function is disabled whenyou continuously pull up the switch.

When you push the main switch in,the indicator comes on and thepassengers’ windows cannot beraised or lowered. Use the mainswitch when you have children in thevehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating thewindows unintentionally. To cancelthis feature, push on the switchagain. The switch will pop out andthe indicator will go off.

The windows and the main switchwill operate for up to 10 minutesafter you turn off the ignition switch(set VEHICLE OFF mode on modelswith keyless access system).Opening either front door cancelsthis function.

You can open all of the windows andthe moonroof from outside with theremote transmitter (the keylessaccess remote on models withkeyless access system).

CONTINUED

Auto Reverse Opening the Windows andMoonroof with the RemoteTransmitter/Keyless AccessRemote

Power WindowsInstrum

entsand

Controls

207

NOTE:

Vehicle withoutkeyless accesssystem

Vehicle withkeyless accesssystem

UNLOCK BUTTON UNLOCK BUTTON

12/07/20 10:56:15 31TK4640_212

Press the UNLOCK button onceto unlock the driver’s door.

Press the UNLOCK button asecond time, and hold it. Theremaining doors unlock, and allfour windows and the moonroofstart to open. To stop the windowsand moonroof, release the button.

To open the windows andmoonroof further, press thebutton again (within 10 seconds ofstep 1) and hold it. If the windowsand the moonroof stop before thedesired position, repeat steps 1and 2.

You cannot close the windows or themoonroof with the remotetransmitter.

You can open and close the windowsand moonroof with the key in thedriver’s door lock.

To open:Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

Turn the key clockwise, thenrelease it.

Turn the key clockwise again, andhold it. All four windows and themoonroof start to open. To stopthe windows and the moonroof,release the key.

To open the windows and themoonroof further, turn and holdthe key again (within 10 secondsof step 2).

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Power Windows

Opening/Closing the Windowsand Moonroof with the Key or theBuilt-in key

208

Close

Close

Open

Open

Vehicle without keyless access system

Vehicle with keyless access system

BUILT-IN KEY

12/07/20 10:56:25 31TK4640_213

To close:Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

Turn the key counterclockwise,then release it.

Turn the key counterclockwiseagain, and hold it. All fourwindows and the moonroof start toclose. To stop the windows andthe moonroof, release the key.

To close the windows and themoonroof further, turn and holdthe key again (within 10 secondsof step 2).

If the windows and themoonroof stop before the desiredposition, repeat steps 2 and 3.

1.

2.

4.

3.

Power WindowsInstrum

entsand

Controls

209

NOTE:

12/07/20 10:56:30 31TK4640_214

－

＊

＊

To close the moonroof fully, firmlypush the moonroof switch forward,then release it. The moonroofautomatically closes all the way. Tostop the moonroof from closing,push the switch briefly.

To open the moonrooffully, pull back the moonroof switchfirmly, then release it. The moonroofautomatically opens all the way. Tostop the moonroof from opening,push the switch briefly.

The moonroof can be tilted up in theback for ventilation, or it can be slidback into the roof. Use the switch onthe front ceiling to operate themoonroof. You must turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position to operate the moonroof.


and .

To open the moonroof, pull back onthe switch and hold it. Release theswitch when the moonroof reachesthe desired position. To close themoonroof, push the switch forwardand hold it. Release the switch tostop the operation.

To tilt up the moonroof, push on thecenter of the moonroof switch. Tostop the moonroof from tilting upfully, push the switch briefly.

:

184 187

AUTO

Moonroof

210

Open

Tilt

Close

MOONROOF SWITCH

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

12/07/20 10:56:38 31TK4640_215

To open or close the moonroofpartially, lightly pull the switch backor push it forward and hold it. Themoonroof will stop when you releasethe switch.

If the moonroof runs into anyobstacle while it is closingautomatically, it will reversedirection, and then stop. To close themoonroof, remove the obstacle, thenuse the moonroof switch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing when themoonroof is almost closed. Youshould always check that allpassengers and objects are awayfrom the moonroof before closing it.

You can open and close themoonroof for up to 10 minutes afteryou turn off the ignition switch, onmodels with keyless access system,set the power mode to VEHICLEOFF (LOCK). Opening either frontdoor cancels this function.

You can use the remote transmitter/keyless access remote or the key/built-in key to operate the moonrooffrom the outside. Refer to page

for details.207

Auto Reverse

MoonroofInstrum

entsand

Controls

211

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or itsmotor.

12/07/20 10:56:45 31TK4640_216

To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brakeindicator on the instrument panelshould go out when the parkingbrake is fully released (see page ).

If you drive without releasing theparking brake, a beeper will sound,and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASEPARKING BRAKE’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

65

65

Parking Brake

212

PARKINGBRAKE LEVER

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and hubs. A beeper will sound ifthe vehicle is driven with the parkingbrake on.

12/07/20 10:56:50 31TK4640_217

Interior Convenience ItemsInstrum

entsand

Controls

213

SIDE POCKET

CARGO HOOKS

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK

BEVERAGE HOLDER inREAR SEAT ARMREST

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

USB ADAPTERCABLE

SUN VISOR

CENTER POCKET

GLOVE BOX

VANITY MIRROR

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

BEVERAGE HOLDER

REAR DOOR POCKET

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

COAT HOOK

FRONT DOOR POCKET

12/07/20 10:56:55 31TK4640_218

Open the front beverage holder bysliding its cover backward.

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids candamage the upholstery, carpeting,and electrical components in theinterior.

The rear seat also has a beverageholder in the center armrest. To useit, pivot the armrest down.

To open the rear beverage holder,pull out the lid by the tab. To close it,push it down.

Beverage Holders

Interior Convenience Items

214

FRONT REAR

12/07/20 10:57:01 31TK4640_219

＊

＊

Your vehicle has two accessorypower sockets. One is next to theshift lever. The other is in theconsole compartment.

To access the front accessory socket,slide the lid forward until it latches.To close it, push in on the lid to slideit backward.

To use an accessory power socket,the ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

Models equipped with thekeyless access system have anengine start/stop button insteadof an ignition switch.ACCESSORY Mode is theequivalent of ACCESSORY (I),and ON Mode is the equivalentof ON (II). For more

information, see pages and.

Each socket is intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

None of the sockets will power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement.

Make sure to put the socket coverback in place to prevent any smallforeign objects from getting into thesocket.

:

187184Accessory Power Sockets


entsand

Controls

215

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

Slide the lidforward.

Pull up the lid.

FRONT

12/07/20 10:57:10 31TK4640_220

To open the console compartment,push in on the lever and lift thearmrest. To close, lower the armrest,and push it down until it latches.

Make sure to slide back the traybefore opening the consolecompartment.

Open the glove box by pulling outthe handle. Close it with a firm push.Lock or unlock the glove box withthe master key or the built-in key onmodels with keyless access system.

The glove box light comes on onlywhen the parking lights are on.

Console CompartmentGlove Box


216

GLOVE BOX

To lock

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

12/07/20 10:57:17 31TK4640_221

To use a sun visor, pull it down. Youcan also use a sun visor at the sidewindow. Remove the support rodfrom the clip, and swing the sunvisor toward the side window.You can extend the sun visor furtherby pulling it back.

To use the vanity mirror on the backof the sun visor, pull up the cover.

The vanity mirror lights come onwhen you pull up the cover.

You can put small items in thesliding tray located in the consolecompartment lid. To use the tray,push it in to open it, then slide outfully. Make sure to slide back thetray firmly until you hear a clickwhen not in use.

CONTINUED

Sun VisorVanity Mirror


entsand

Controls

217

SUN VISOR

Slide

12/07/20 10:57:26 31TK4640_222

Do not use the sun visor extensionfeature over the rearview mirror.

Make sure to slide the sun visorback to its original position beforeflipping it back in place.

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the vehicle.

To open the sunglasses holder, pushon the lid. It will unlatch and swingdown. To close it, push it until itlatches. Make sure the holder isclosed while you are driving.

To open the center pocket, push onthe lid. It will unlatch and swing up.To close it, push the lid down until itlatches.

Center Pocket Sunglasses Holder


218

Push

Push

12/07/20 10:57:33 31TK4640_223

Some larger styles of sunglassesmay not fit in the holder.

You may also store small items inthis holder. Make sure they aresmall enough to let the holder closeand latch, and that they are notheavy enough to cause the holder topop open while driving.

To use a coat hook, slide it outslightly, then pull it down.

Make sure the coat hook is pulled upwhen you are not using it. This hookis not designed for large or heavyitems.

Coat Hook


entsand

Controls

219

COAT HOOK

12/07/20 10:57:39 31TK4640_224

Door (Door activated position):

OFF position:

After all doors are closed tightly, thelights dim slightly, then fade out inabout 30 seconds.

To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIME’’ setting, see page

.

With any door left open, the lightsstay on about 15 minutes, then goout.

The individual map lights in thefront and rear come on when anydoor is opened, when the remotetransmitter (the keyless accessremote on models with keylessaccess system) is used to unlockthe doors. When the doors areclosed, each light can be turned onand off by pushing the map lightbutton ( / ).

The rear individual map lightscannot be turned on.

The front individual map lightscan be turned on and off bypressing each map light button( / ).

To turn off the setting, press theOFF button.

Your vehicle has the light controlbuttons on the front ceiling. Withthese buttons, you can select threepositions: OFF, Door (door activatedposition), and ON. To select aposition, press the appropriatebutton.

When you press the DOOR button,the green indicator in the buttoncomes on as a reminder.

121

Interior Lights

Light Control Buttons

220

MAP LIGHT BUTTONFRONT

REAR

FRONT

ONDOOR ACTIVATED

OFF

12/07/20 10:57:52 31TK4640_225

Turn on the front individual maplights by pushing each map lightbutton ( / ). Push thebutton again to turn it off. When thedoor activated position is selectedwith the light control button, the rearmap lights can be turned on bypushing each map light button( / ). Push the buttonagain to turn it off.

The lights also come on when thekey is removed from the ignitionswitch.

The lights also come on when thepower mode is set to VEHICLE OFF(LOCK).

All the individual map lights comeon and stay on.

If any map light is left on when theignition switch is turned off or theVEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode is set,and all doors are closed, it will turnoff when the vehicle is locked withthe remote transmitter (the keylessaccess remote on models withkeyless access system), or after 30minutes.

ON position:



Interior Lights

Individual Map Lights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

221

FRONT

REAR

12/07/20 10:58:02 31TK4640_226

＋－

＊

＊

The courtesy light in each front doorcomes on when the door is opened,and goes out when the door is closed.

In addition to the courtesy lights onthe ceiling, the driver’s ambient footlight comes on.

Your vehicle also has a courtesy lightin the ignition switch. This lightcomes on when you open the driver’sdoor. It fades out in about 30seconds after the door is closed.


and .

The courtesy lights come on whenthe parking lights are turned on. Toadjust its brightness, press either ofthe instrument panel brightnesscontrol buttons ( or ) with theignition switch in the ON (II)position.

:

187184


Interior Lights

Courtesy Lights

222

COURTESY LIGHTS

12/07/20 10:58:09 31TK4640_227

Your vehicle has a keyless accessremote slot light. The light comes onwhen you:

Open any door.

Set the vehicle mode to VEHICLEOFF (LOCK).

Remove the keyless access remotefrom the keyless access remoteslot.

After all doors are closed tightly, thelight dims slightly, then fades out inabout 30 seconds (depending on theinterior light dimming timer setting).The light turns off before 30 secondshave elapsed if you lock the driver’sdoor.

Interior Lights

On models with Keyless AccessSystem

Keyless Access Remote Slot Light

Instruments

andC

ontrols

223

LIGHTS

12/07/20 10:58:16 31TK4640_228

224

12/07/20 10:58:17 31TK4640_229

The standard audio system hasmany features. This sectiondescribes those features and how touse them.

The climate control system in yourvehicle provides a comfortabledriving environment in all weatherconditions.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

The security system helps to dis-courage vandalism and theft of yourvehicle.

...............Climate Control System . 226Using Automatic Climate

...................................Control . 228

Dual Temperature and Mode...................................Control . 232

..........Climate Control Sensors . 234................................Audio System . 235

................................Audio System . 236..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 237

................Playing the XM Radio . 246.................................Playing Discs . 253

...Disc Changer Error Messages . 263............................Playing an iPod . 264

.................iPod Error Messages . 271Playing a USB Flash Memory

........................................Device . 272USB Flash Memory Device

........................Error Messages . 280.............Audio System . 281

................................Audio System . 285..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 286

................Playing the XM Radio . 299................................Playing a Disc . 307

.......Disc Player Error Messages . 319Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD)

..........................................Audio . 320............................Playing an iPod . 354

.................iPod Error Messages . 363Playing a USB Flash Memory

........................................Device . 364USB Flash Memory Device

........................Error Messages . 375.............Audio System . 376

..................Protecting Your Discs . 381............AM/FM Radio Reception . 385

................Remote Audio Controls . 387......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 389

.................Radio Theft Protection . 390..........................Setting the Clock . 391

............................Security System . 395.........................................Compass . 397

...............................Cruise Control . 401HomeLink Universal

................................Transceiver . 404HandsFreeLink

(Models without navigation..................................system) . 407

HandsFreeLink(Models with navigation

..................................system) . 424..AcuraLink (U.S. models only) . 449...Rearview Camera and Monitor . 465

Models without navigation system

BluetoothModels with navigation system

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

FeaturesF

eatures

225

12/07/20 10:58:23 31TK4640_230

Climate Control System

226

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

RECIRCULATION BUTTON


PASSENGER’S SIDE MODECONTROL BUTTON

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTBUTTON

ON/OFF BUTTON

SYNC BUTTON

DISPLAY PASSENGER’S SIDE DISPLAYDRIVER’S SIDE DISPLAY

FAN CONTROL BUTTONS

DRIVER’S SIDE TEMPERATURECONTROL SWITCH

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURE CONTROLSWITCH

Models without navigation system

DRIVER’S SIDE AUTO BUTTON PASSENGER’S SIDE AUTOBUTTON


DRIVER’S SIDE MODECONTROL BUTTON

12/07/20 10:58:28 31TK4640_231

Climate Control SystemF

eatures

227

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

RECIRCULATION BUTTON


PASSENGER’S SIDE MODECONTROL BUTTON

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTBUTTON

ON/OFF BUTTON

SYNC BUTTON

PASSENGER’S SIDE DISPLAY

FAN CONTROL BUTTONS

DRIVER’S SIDE MODECONTROL BUTTON

CENTERDISPLAY

DRIVER’S SIDE DISPLAY

DRIVER’S SIDE TEMPERATURECONTROL SWITCH

PASSENGER’S SIDE TEMPERATURECONTROL SWITCH

DRIVER’S SIDE AUTO BUTTON PASSENGER’S SIDE AUTO BUTTON

Models with navigation system


12/07/20 10:58:34 31TK4640_232

On models with navigation system The automatic climate controlsystem in your vehicle picks theproper combination of airconditioning, heating, and ventilationto maintain the interior temperatureyou select, and to remove moisturefrom the air and make the interiordry. The system also adjusts the fanspeed and airflow levels.

The system automatically selectsthe proper mix of conditionedand/or heated air that will, asquickly as possible, raise or lowerthe interior temperature to yourpreference. The system alsodehumidifies the interior.

The driver’s side temperature andthe passenger’s side temperature canbe set separately. Push up the switchof the appropriate temperaturecontrol to increase the temperatureof airflow. Push down the switch todecrease it. Each set temperature isshown in the display (in the centerdisplay on models with navigationsystem).Set the desired temperature with

the temperature control switch.You can set the driver’s sidetemperature and the passenger’sside temperature separately.

Press the Driver’s or Passenger’sAUTO button. You will see AUTOand the selected temperature onthe appropriate side of the display(in the center display on modelswith navigation system).

The climate control system for yourvehicle can also be operated usingthe voice control system. See thenavigation system manual forcomplete details.

When you unlock the doors withyour remote transmitter (keylessaccess remote on models withnavigation system), the driver’s ID(Driver 1 or Driver 2) is detected,and the climate control settings areturned to the respective modeautomatically with the ignitionswitch in the ON (II) position, or thepower mode ON.

1.

2.

Using Automatic Climate ControlVoice Control System

Personalization Setting


Temperature Control

228

12/07/20 10:58:43 31TK4640_233

When you set the temperature to itslower limit ( ) or its upper limit( ), the system runs at fullcooling or heating only. It does notregulate the interior temperature.

When you adjust a fan control, thefan is taken out of AUTO mode.

To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.

Keep the system completely offfor short periods only.

To turn the system completely off,press the ON/OFF button.

Each time you press this button, theclimate control system switchesbetween on and off. Turning on thesystem with this button selects yourlast climate control selection.

You can also select the appropriatemode on the driver’s side and thepassenger’s side separately. Tochange a mode, press and releasethe appropriate side mode controlbutton. This will take the modecontrol out of AUTO mode.

In AUTO mode, the vehicle’s interiortemperature is independentlyregulated for the driver and frontpassenger according to eachadjusted temperature. The systemalso regulates each temperaturebased on the information of thesunlight sensor and the sun’s

position which is updatedautomatically by the navigation’sglobal positioning system (GPS). Ifone side of the vehicle is getting toomuch sun, the system lowers thetemperature only on that side.

When you press this button, theindicator in the button comes on, andthe passenger’s side temperatureand mode control is synchronized tothe driver’s side set temperature andmode control. Changing thepassenger’s side temperature ormode control makes the indicator gooff and takes the system out ofSYNC mode.On models with navigation system


To Turn Everything Off

ON/OFF Button

SYNC Button Features

229

12/07/20 10:58:52 31TK4640_234

When the indicator in the button ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent through the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

The outside air intakes for theclimate control system are at thebase of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

You can manually select variousfunctions of the climate controlsystem when it is in fully automaticmode. All other features remainautomatically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordAUTO in the display to go out. When you turn the A/C off, the

system cannot regulate the insidetemperature if you set thetemperature control below theoutside temperature.

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. You will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF in the display(in the center display on models withnavigation system).

Press the button to increase thefan speed and airflow. Press the

button to decrease it.

Recirculation ButtonAir Conditioning (A/C) ButtonSemi-automatic Operation

Fan Control


230

12/07/20 10:59:02 31TK4640_235

Pushing this button also turns thepower mirror heaters on and off.

This button directs the main airflowto the windshield for fasterdefrosting. It also overrides anymode selection you may have made.

Air flows from the floorvents.This button turns the rear window

defogger on and off (see page ).

The driver’s side mode and thepassenger’s side mode can beselected separately. Use theappropriate mode control button toselect the vents the air flows from.Some air will flow from thedashboard vents in all modes.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor and corner vents and thedefroster vents at the base of thewindshield.

This mode can only be selected fromthe driver’s side, however thepassenger’s side controls can stillchange the temperature.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. Forfaster defrosting, the fan speedautomatically increases. You can alsoincrease airflow to the windshield byclosing the corner vents on thedashboard. To close the vents, rotatethe wheel on the side of each cornervent.

When you turn off bypressing the button again, thesystem returns to its former settings.

Select to help clear the rearwindow.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and theback of the center console, and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard,and the vents on the back of thecenter console.

Each time you press the modecontrol button, the display shows themode selected.

145

CONTINUED

Rear Window Defogger Button Windshield Defroster Button

Mode Controls


eatures

231

12/07/20 10:59:15 31TK4640_236

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

When the indicator in thebutton is on, the SYNC

indicator also comes on. The frontpassenger’s temperature cannot beset separately from the driver’s.

Your vehicle has two temperaturecontrol switches and two modecontrol buttons, one for the driver,and one for the front passenger.

The driver’s side and the passenger’sside temperature and mode can becontrolled independently.


Dual Temperature and ModeControl

232

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL SWITCH

SYNC BUTTON

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL SWITCH

U.S. model with navigation system is shown.

DRIVER’S SIDEMODE CONTROLBUTTON PASSENGER’S

SIDE MODECONTROLBUTTON

12/07/20 10:59:21 31TK4640_237

The selected temperatures andmode appear in the display (in thecenter display on models withnavigation system). When theindicator in the SYNC button is on,you can adjust both sides to thesame temperature and mode bypushing the driver’s sidetemperature and mode controls.

When you set the temperature to itsupper or lower limit, it is displayed as

or .

Synchronized Control


eatures

233

Driver’s Side Passenger’s Side

REAR FLOOR AIR DUCTS

12/07/20 10:59:27 31TK4640_238

The climate control system has twosensors: a sunlight sensor on top ofthe dashboard, and a temperatureand humidity sensor next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

The humidity sensor helps reducewindow fogging and also monitorsand adjusts cabin humidity byautomatically changing the mode toDefrost.

The airflow from the rear vents canbe adjusted when either AUTOmode (driver or passenger) isselected or the fan mode is in the

or position.

You can adjust the direction of theairflow by moving the tab on eachvent up-and-down and side-to-side.You can also open or close the ventswith the dial between them.


Climate Control SensorsRear Ventilation

234

SUNLIGHT SENSOR

TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITYSENSOR

12/07/20 10:59:35 31TK4640_239

An audio system is standard on allmodels. Read the appropriate pages(as shown below) to use yourvehicle’s audio system.

For vehicles without navigationsystem, see pages through .

For vehicles with navigation system,see pages through .

236 284

285 380

Audio SystemF

eatures

235

Models Without navigation system Models With navigation system

12/07/20 10:59:41 31TK4640_240

Most audio system functions can becontrolled by standard buttons, bars,and knobs. In addition, you canaccess some functions by using theselector knob on the audio system.

The knob turns left and right. Use itto scroll through lists, or to makeselections or adjustments to a list ormenu item on the display. When youmake a selection, push the center ofthe selector (ENTER) to go to thatselection.

When the audio system is in XMRadio mode or playing discs, pushingthe selector (ENTER) knob switchesthe display between the normaldisplay and the extended display.The extended display has threesegments to display the detailedinformation.

To select any setting such as theclock or sound adjustment, press theSETUP button. To use any audiosystem function, the ignition switchmust be in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position. You can select theitem by turning the selector knob.To go back to the previous display,press the RETURN button.

Pressing the SETUP button againwill also cancel the setup displaymode.

When you unlock the doors withyour remote transmitter and turn theaudio system on with the ignitionswitch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON(II) position, the driver’s ID (Driver1 or Driver 2) is detected, and theradio presets and sound levelsettings (see page ) are turned tothe respective memorized modeautomatically.

243

Selector Knob SETUP Display


Audio System (Models without navigation system)

236

RETURNBUTTON

SELECTORKNOB

SETUP BUTTON

12/07/20 10:59:49 31TK4640_241

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)F

eatures

237

RETURN BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

SKIP BAR

A.SEL (AUTO SELECT)BUTTON

VOL/(VOLUME/POWER) KNOB

SELECTOR KNOB

TITLE BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONSAM/FM BUTTON

CATEGORY BAR

DISPLAY

(SOUND) BUTTONSETUP BUTTON

12/07/20 10:59:55 31TK4640_242

－

－

－The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing theVOL/ (power/volume) knob orthe AM/FM button. Adjust thevolume by turning the VOL/

knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to are displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction in AM is not available.

On the AM band, AM noisereduction turns on automatically.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, skip, scan, the presetbuttons, and auto select.

On the FM band, you can also usethe features provided by the radiodata system (RDS). For moreinformation on the RDS, see page

.

Use the selector knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob right to tune to ahigher frequency, or left to tune to alower frequency.

The skip function searchesup and down from the currentfrequency to find a station with astrong signal. To activate it, pressand hold the or side of theSKIP bar until you hear a beep, thenrelease it.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.When the system finds a strongsignal, it will stop and play thatstation for about 10 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system willscan for the next strong station andplay it for 10 seconds. When it playsa station that you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

240

To Play the Radio To Select a Station

TUNE

SKIP

SCAN

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)

238

12/07/20 11:00:04 31TK4640_243

－－Each preset button canstore one frequency on AM and twofrequencies on FM.

If you aretraveling and can no longer receiveyour preset stations, you can use theauto select feature to find stations inthe local area.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forthat preset button.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons as previously described.

, press theA. SEL (auto select) button. Thisrestores the presets you originallyset.

For information on AM/FM radiofrequencies and reception, see page

.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storesix stations each.

Use the tune, skip, scan, or RDSfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A-SEL’’flashes in the display, and the systemgoes into scan mode for severalseconds. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM and twelve FM stations inthe preset buttons.

Pick a preset button, then pressand hold it until you hear a beep.

1.

2.

3.

4.

385

To turn off auto select

CONTINUED


Preset AUTO SELECT

Features

239

12/07/20 11:00:13 31TK4640_244

You can also select the auto selectmode by using the SETUP buttonand the selector knob. Push theSETUP button to display the menuitems, then turn the selector knob toselect ‘‘AUTO SELECT.’’ Press theselector knob (ENTER) to set theselection.

To start the auto select mode, pressthe selector knob (ENTER) to select‘‘PUSH TO START.’’

To cancel the auto select mode,press the A. SEL (auto select) button,or press the SETUP button to show‘‘AUTO SELECT,’’ then press theselector knob (ENTER). When yousee ‘‘PUSH TO CANCEL,’’ pressENTER again.

On the FM band, you can select afavorite station and display theprogram service name provided bythe radio data system (RDS).

The RDS information displayfunction shows the name of the RDSstation you are listening to. With theaudio system on and the FM bandselected, you can turn this functionon or off.


Radio Data System (RDS)

RDS INFO Display

240

AUTO SELECT

12/07/20 11:00:21 31TK4640_245

－＋

To switch the function between onand off, press and release the TITLEbutton. With the system on, you willsee the ‘‘RDS INFO ON’’ message onthe display. If the station you arelistening to is an RDS station, thedisplay shows the station name.

If the station you are listening to isnot an RDS station, the displaycontinues to show the frequencywith the RDS information displayfunction on.

When you turn off this function bypressing the TITLE button, thedisplay shows ‘‘RDS NAME OFF.’’

On the FM band selected, you canselect the program categoryprovided by the RDS. Press eitherside ( or ) of the CATEGORYbar to display and select an RDScategory. The principal RDScategories are shown as follows:

ROCK: Rock, classic rock and softrock music

ALL: All RDS category stations

CONTINUED


Radio Data System (RDS) Category

Features

241

RDS CATEGORY

RDS INFO DISPLAY ON

12/07/20 11:00:30 31TK4640_246

COUNTRY: Country musicSOFT: Adult hits and soft musicTOP 40: Top 40 hitsOLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldiesR & B: Rhythm and blues, and softrhythm and bluesRELIGION: Programs concernedwith religionCLASSIC: Classical musicJAZZ: JazzINFO: News, information, sports,talk shows, foreign language,personality, public, college, andweatherTRAFFIC: Traffic information

Press either side of the CATEGORYbar to select an RDS category. Thedisplay shows the selected RDScategory name for about 10 seconds.You can use the search or scanfunction to find radio stations in theselected RDS category. If you donothing while the RDS categoryname is displayed, the selectedcategory is canceled.

This function searches up and downa frequency for the strongest signalfrom the frequencies that carry theselected RDS category information.This can help you to find a station inyour favorite category. To activate it,press and release either side( or ) of the SKIP bar. Youwill see the selected RDS categoryname blinking while searching it.When the system finds a station, theselected RDS category name will bedisplayed again for about 5 seconds.

If the system does not find a station,‘‘NOTHING’’ blinks for about fiveseconds, then the system goes backto the last selected station.

The scan function samples allstations with strong signals on theselected RDS category. To activate it,press and release the SCAN button.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal in the selectedRDS category. You will also see theselected RDS category nameblinking while searching it. When itfinds a strong signal, it will stop andplay that station for about 10 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system willscan for the next strong station andplay it for 10 seconds. When it playsa station that you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.


RDS Program Search RDS Program SCAN


242

12/07/20 11:00:42 31TK4640_247

－

－

－

－

CONTINUED

Adjusts the bass.

Adjusts the treble.

Adjusts the front-to-backstrength of the sound.

Adjusts the side-to-side strength of the sound.

Press the SETUP button to displaythe sound settings. Turn the selectorknob to select an appropriate setting:BASS, TREBLE, FADER,BALANCE, CENTER, SUBW(subwoofer), Dolby PL (Prologic) II,and SVC (speed-sensitive volumecompensation). Press the selector(ENTER) knob to enter the setting,then turn the selector knob to adjustthe setting.

You can use the RDS programsearch or scan function even if theRDS information display function isoff.


BASS

TREBLE

FADER

BALANCE

Adjusting the Sound

Features

243

Selector knob adjustabledirection is shown.

SUBWOOFER is selectable.FADER is selectable.

12/07/20 11:00:51 31TK4640_248

－－

－

－

The SVC mode controls the volumebased on vehicle speed. The fasteryou go, the louder the audio volumebecomes. As you slow down, theaudio volume decreases.

The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVCHIGH. Turn the selector knob toadjust the setting to your liking. Ifyou feel the sound is too loud,choose low. If you feel the sound istoo quiet, choose high.

Adjusts the volume levelbased on the vehicle speed.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the selector knob toadjust the setting to your liking.

When the level reaches the center,you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.

Adjusts the strength ofsound from the center speaker.

Adjusts the strength ofsound from the subwoofer speaker.

If the fader adjustment is set to F9(maximum front level), thesubwoofer is turned off.

DolbyPL (ProLogic) II signal processingcreates multi-channel surroundsound from 2 channel stereo audiosources. Dolby ProLogic II can onlybe activated when listening to DISC(CD-DA, MP3/WMA), XM Radio,and AUX. When ProLogic II is active,‘‘PL II’’ is shown in the audio display.

Manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories. Dolby, ProLogic, MLP Lossless and the double-D symbol are trademarks of DolbyLaboratories.

To return to normal play, push theRETURN or SETUP button.

Except SVC adjustment


Speed-sensitive VolumeCompensation (SVC)

SVCCENTER

SUBW

Dolby PL (ProLogic) II

244

12/07/20 11:01:00 31TK4640_249

＋－You can use the instrument panelbrightness control buttons ( or )to adjust the illumination of the audiosystem (see page ). The audiosystem illuminates when the parkinglights are on, even if the radio isturned off.

143


Audio System Lighting

Features

245

12/07/20 11:01:04 31TK4640_250

Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system)

246

SCAN BUTTON

SKIP BAR


TITLE BUTTON

CATEGORY BAR

DISPLAY

SELECTOR KNOB

XM RADIO BUTTON

SETUP BUTTONRETURN BUTTON

12/07/20 11:01:09 31TK4640_251

－

To listen to XM Radio, turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position, and press the

button. The last channel youlistened to will show in the display.Adjust the volume by turning theVOL/ knob.

To switch betweenchannel mode and category mode,press and hold the TITLE buttonuntil the mode changes.

In the channel mode, you can selectall of the available channels. In thecategory mode, such as Jazz, Rock,Classical, etc., you can select all ofthe channels within that category.

Each time you press and release theTITLE button, the display changes inthe following sequence: name, title,and category.

You can also change the mode fromthe menu items. Press the SETUPbutton to display the menu items,then turn the selector knob to selectMODE/CATEGORY or MODE/CHANNEL and press the selectorknob (ENTER). Each time you pressand release the selector knob(ENTER), the display changesbetween CHANNEL andCATEGORY. To enter the setting,press the TITLE button.

You may experience periods whenXM Radio does not transmit theartist’s name and song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.

Your vehicle is capable of receivingXM Radio anywhere in the UnitedStates and Canada, except Hawaii,Alaska, and Puerto Rico. XM is aregistered trademark of Sirius XMRadio , Inc. and XM CANADA is aregistered business name ofCanadian Satellite Radio Inc.

XM Radio receives signals from twosatellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, XM Radioallows you to view channel andcategory selections in the display.

CONTINUED

Operating the XM Radio

MODE

Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system)F

eatures

247

12/07/20 11:01:18 31TK4640_252

－

－＋－－

The SCAN function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the stations within thatcategory are scanned. To activatescan, press the SCAN button. Thesystem plays each channel innumerical order for a few seconds,then selects the next channel. Whenyou hear a channel you want tocontinue listening to, press thebutton again.

You can also select a channel orcategory from the list by using theselector knob. Push the selectorknob (ENTER) to switch the displayto the list displayed with threesegments, then turn the knob toselect a channel or category. Pressthe selector knob (ENTER) to setyour selection.

Presseither side of the CATEGORY bar toselect another category.

Turn the selector knob tochange channel selections. Turn theknob right for higher numberedchannels and left for lowernumbered channels. In the categorymode, you can only select channelswithin that category.

SCAN

CATEGORY ( or )TUNE


248

Channel list is shown.

12/07/20 11:01:24 31TK4640_253

－

－

－

－

－

You can store up to 12preset channels using the six presetbuttons. Each button stores onechannel from the XM1 band and onechannel from the XM2 band.

To store a channel:Press the button. EitherXM1 or XM2 will show in thedisplay.

Use the selector knob, or theCATEGORY bar or SCAN buttonto tune to a desired channel.

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can be selected.In channel mode, all channels can beselected.

Pick the preset button you wantfor that channel. Press and holdthe button until you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

Once a channel is stored, simplypress and release the proper presetbutton to tune to it.

Press the button again.The other XM band will show.Store the next six channels usingsteps 2 and 3.

The signal iscurrently too weak. Move the vehicleto an area away from tall buildings,and with an unobstructed view of thesouthern horizon.

XM is loading theaudio or program information.

The channelcurrently selected is no longerbroadcasting.

The encryptioncode is being updated. Wait until theencryption code is fully updated.Channels 0 and 1 should still worknormally.

3.

4.

5.

2.

1.

CONTINUED

Preset

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’

XM Radio Display Messages

‘‘LOADING’’

‘‘OFF AIR’’

‘‘UPDATING’’


eatures

249

12/07/20 11:01:35 31TK4640_254

－

－

－

The selected channelnumber does not exist, or is not partof your subscription, or this channelhas no artist or title information atthis time.

The selectedchannel has no artist or titleinformation at this time.

There is a problemwith the XM antenna. Please consultyour dealer.

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.

Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator. Carryinglarge items on a roof rack can alsoblock the signal.

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.

Driving in tunnels.

Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.

Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.

Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.

Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.


‘‘ - - - - ’’

‘‘NO INFO’’

‘‘ANTENNA’’

250

12/07/20 11:01:43 31TK4640_255

When DPLII is turned on (see page), sound coming from the rear

speakers may be distorted due to thecompression of the music beingbroadcast. Turn DPLII off if thishappens.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect XM Radioreception.


244

628


eatures

251

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstacles tothe south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

GROUND REPEATER

12/07/20 11:01:47 31TK4640_256

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Radio. With the ignitionswitch in the ACCESSORY (I) or theON (II) position, press the

button. A variety of musictypes and styles will play.

If you decide to purchase XM radioservice, contact XM Radio at

, or at1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contactXM CANADA at , orat 1-877-209-0079. You will need togive them your radio I.D. numberand your credit card number. To getyour radio I.D. number, press the

button, then turn theselector knob until ‘‘CH 000’’ appearsin the display. Your I.D. will appearin the display.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in theXM Radio mode while you wait foractivation. This should take about 30minutes.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated,‘‘CATEGORY’’ or ‘‘CHANNEL’’ willappear in the display, and you’ll beable to listen to XM Radio broadcasts.XM Radio will continue to send anactivation signal to your vehicle forat least 12 hours from the activationrequest. If the service has not beenactivated after 36 hours, contactXM Radio. In Canada, contact XMCANADA .

www.siriusxm.com

www.xmradio.ca


Receiving XM Radio Service

252

12/07/20 11:01:53 31TK4640_257

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)F

eatures

253

RETURN BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

SKIP BAR


PRESET BUTTONS

CATEGORY BAR

TITLE BUTTON

AUX BUTTON

DISC EJECT BUTTON

DISC SLOT

DISC LOAD BUTTON

CD BUTTON

SETUP BUTTON

MP3/WMA INDICATOR

SELECTOR KNOB

12/07/20 11:01:58 31TK4640_258

You operate the disc changer withthe same controls used for the radio.To select the disc changer, press theCD button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in thedisplay. The disc and track numbers,and the elapsed time are shown inthe display. You can also select thedisplayed information with theTITLE button (see page ). Thesystem will continuously play a discuntil you change modes.

To load or play discs, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position.

A disc compressed in AAC formatcannot be played in this audiosystem.

Video CDs and DVDs do not work inthis unit.

Depending on the software the fileswere made with, it may not bepossible to play some files, or displaysome text data.

This audio system can also playCD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed inMP3 or WMA format. When playinga disc in MP3, you will see ‘‘MP3’’ inthe display. In WMA format, ‘‘WMA’’will appear in the display. The disc,folder and track numbers aredisplayed. You can select up to 255folders or tracks.

256

To Play a Disc

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)

254

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

12/07/20 11:02:04 31TK4640_259

Your vehicle’s in-dash disc changerholds up to six discs.

To load more than one disc, pressthe LOAD button until you hear abeep and see ‘‘LOAD’’ in thedisplay. To load only one disc,press and release the LOADbutton.

The disc number for an emptyposition begins blinking.

When the disc load indicator turnsgreen and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in thedisplay again, insert the next discin the slot. Do not try to insert adisc until ‘‘LOAD’’ appears. Youcould damage the audio unit.

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. If you are not loadingall six positions, the system beginsplaying the last disc loaded.

You can also load a disc into anempty position while a disc is playingby pressing the appropriate presetbutton. The system stops playing thecurrent disc and starts the loadingsequence. It then plays the disc justloaded.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this unit.

Insert the disc into the disc slotwhen the green disc load indicatorcomes on. Insert it only abouthalfway; the drive will pull it in therest of the way. You will see ‘‘DISCREAD’’ in the display while thedisc load indicator turns red andblinks as the disc is loaded.

If a file on a WMA disc is protectedby digital rights management(DRM), the audio unit displaysUNSUPPORTED, and then skips tothe next file.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

CONTINUED

Loading Discs


eatures

255

NOTE:

12/07/20 11:02:12 31TK4640_260

Each time you press the TITLEbutton, the display shows you thetext, if the disc was recorded withtext data.

The display shows up to 16characters of selected text data (thefolder name, file name, etc.).

When a new folder, file, or track isselected.

When you change the audio modeto play a disc with text data or inMP3 or WMA.

When you insert a disc, and thesystem begins to play.

You will also see some text dataunder these conditions:

When playing a CD-DA with textdata, the album and track name areshown in the display. With a disc inMP3 or WMA, the display shows thefolder and file name.

When you turn on the audio systemnext time, the system keeps yourselection with the TITLE button.

When you press and release theTITLE button while a disc withouttext data is playing, you will see ‘‘NOINFO’’ on the display.

With the folder name, you will seethe FOLDER indicator in the display.The TRACK indicator is shown withthe file or track name.

You can see the album, artist, andtrack name in the display. If a disc isrecorded in MP3 or WMA, you cansee the folder and file name, and theartist, album, and track tag.

If you select name off, the textdisplay is turned off.

If the text data has more than 16characters, you will see the first 16characters and the indicator inthe display. Press and hold theTITLE button until the next 16characters are shown. You can seeup to 32 characters of the text data.

If you press and hold the TITLEbutton again, the display shows thefirst 16 characters again.

If any letter is not available, it isreplaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.When the disc has no text data, youwill see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.

Text Data Display Function


256

12/07/20 11:02:23 31TK4640_261

－Use the SKIP bar while a disc isplaying to select passages andchange tracks (files in MP3 or WMAmode).

In MP3 or WMA mode, use theCATEGORY bar to select folders onthe disc and use either side of theSKIP bar to change files.

To select a different disc, use theappropriate preset buttons (1through 6). If you select an emptyposition, the system will go into theloading sequence (see page ).

In MP3 or WMA mode, you can alsoselect a folder or track/file from thelist by using the selector knob. Pushthe selector knob (ENTER) toswitch the display to the listdisplayed with three segments, thenturn the knob to select a folder.Press the selector knob (ENTER) tochange the display to the track/filelist, then turn the same knob toselect a track/file. Press the selectorknob (ENTER) to set your selection.

Each time you press andrelease the side of the SKIP bar,the player skips forward to thebeginning of the next track (file inMP3 or WMA mode). Press andrelease the side of the bar toskip backward to the beginning ofthe current track. Press it again toskip to the beginning of the previoustrack.

To move rapidly within a track or file,press and hold either side ( or

) of the SKIP bar.

255

CONTINUED

To Change or Select Tracks/Files SKIP


eatures

257

Folder Selection

Track SelectionPress ENTER.

12/07/20 11:02:32 31TK4640_262

－

＋－

＋－

In MP3 or WMA modeTo

select a different folder, press eitherside ( or ) of the CATEGORYbar to move to the beginning of thenext folder. Press the side to skipto the next folder, and press theside to skip to the beginning of theprevious folder.

You can select any type of repeat,random and scan modes by using theSETUP button and the selector knob.Push the SETUP button to displaythe menu items, then turn theselector knob to select ‘‘PLAYMODE.’’ Press the selector knob(ENTER) to set the selection.

Turn the selector knob to select anappropriate repeat, random or scanmode, then press the selector knob(ENTER) to set your selection.

FOLDER SELECTIONTo Select Repeat, Random or ScanMode:


258

MENU ITEMS

12/07/20 11:02:39 31TK4640_263

－－

－

－

To cancel the selected repeat,random, or scan mode, press theSETUP button to show ‘‘PLAYMODE,’’ then press the selectorknob (ENTER). When you see‘‘NORMAL PLAY,’’ press ENTERagain.

Tocontinuously replay a track (file inMP3 or WMA mode), selectREPEAT ONE TRK from the menuitems. You will see REPEAT in thedisplay. Select normal play to turn itoff.

This featurecontinuously replays the current disc.To activate disc repeat, selectREPEAT DISC from the menu items.You will see D-REPEAT in thedisplay. Select normal play to turn itoff.

This feature,when activated, plays the files withinthe current folder in random order,rather than in the order they arecompressed in MP3 or WMA. Toactivate folder random play, selectRANDOM IN FLD from the menuitems. You will see F-RANDOM inthe display. The system will thenselect and play files randomly. Thiscontinues until you deactivate folderrandom play by selecting normal play,or you select a different folder withthe CATEGORY bar.

This feature,when activated, replays all the fileson the selected folder in the orderthey are compressed in MP3 orWMA. To activate folder repeatmode, select REPEAT ONE FLDfrom the menu items. You will seeF-REPEAT in the display. Thesystem continuously replays thecurrent folder. Select normal play toturn it off. Selecting a differentfolder with the CATEGORY bar alsoturns off the repeat feature.

Pressing either side of the SKIP baralso turns off the repeat feature.

CONTINUED

In MP3 or WMA mode

In MP3 or WMA mode

REPEAT ONE TRK REPEAT DISC

RANDOM IN FLD

REPEAT ONE FLD


eatures

259

PLAY MODE ITEMS

12/07/20 11:02:47 31TK4640_264

－－－

You can also select the scan featurefrom the menu items with theselector knob (see page ).

This featureplays the tracks within a disc (thefiles in MP3 or WMA mode) inrandom order. To activate randomplay, select RANDOM IN DISC fromthe menu items. You will seeRANDOM in the display. Selectnormal play to return to normal play.

The SCAN functionsamples all the tracks on the disc inthe order they are recorded on thedisc (all files in the selected folder inMP3 or WMA mode). To activate thescan feature, press and release theSCAN button. You will see SCAN inthe display. You will get a 10 secondsampling of each track/file in thedisc/folder. Press and hold theSCAN button to get out of scanmode and play the last track sampled.

This functionsamples the first file in each folderon the disc in the order they arestored. To activate the folder scanfeature, press and release the SCANbutton repeatedly. You will seeF-SCAN in the display. You will get a10 second sampling of the first file ineach folder. Press and hold theSCAN button to get out of the folderscan mode and play the last filesampled.

You can also select the folder scanfeature from the menu items withthe selector knob (see page ).258

258

In MP3 or WMA modeRANDOM IN DISC SCAN TRKSCAN FLD


260

12/07/20 11:02:52 31TK4640_265

－

Pressing either side of the SKIP bar,or selecting a different disc (usingthe preset buttons) or folder (usingthe CATEGORY bar) turns off theSCAN or F-SCAN feature.

This feature, whenactivated, samples the first track oneach disc in order (the first file inthe main folder on each disc in MP3or WMA mode). To activate the discscan feature, press and release theSCAN button repeatedly untilD-SCAN shows in the display. Thesystem will then play the first track/file in the first main folder on thefirst disc for about 10 seconds. If youdo nothing, the system will then playthe following first track/file for 10seconds each. When it plays a track/file that you want to continuelistening to, press and hold theSCAN button again.

When the first track on the last disc,or the first file in the last main folderon the last disc begins to play, thedisc scan mode will be canceled.Pressing either side of the SKIP baror selecting a different folder withthe CATEGORY bar also turns offthe scan feature.

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom scan, disc scan, then to normalplay.

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom file scan, folder scan, disc scan,then to normal play.

You can also select the disc scanfeature from the menu items withthe selector knob (see page ).

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the disc. If you eject the disc,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe disc after 10 seconds and beginplaying.

To eject all discs, press and hold theeject button until the first disc beginsto eject.

You can also eject the disc when theignition switch is off.

To play the radio when a disc isplaying, press the AM/FM or

button. Press the AUX buttonto switch to an appropriate audio unit(if it is connected to the auxiliaryinput jack or the USB adapter cable).Press the CD button again to switchback to the disc changer.258

CONTINUED

In MP3 or WMA mode


SCAN DISC

To Stop Playing a Disc

Features

261

12/07/20 11:03:01 31TK4640_266

You can also press the MODEbutton on the steering wheel tochange modes.

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with the VOL/

knob or by turning off theignition switch, the disc will stay inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the disc will begin playingwhere it left off.

To remove the disc currently in play,press the eject button. When a disc isremoved from a slot, the systemautomatically begins the loadsequence so you can load anotherdisc in that position. If you do notremove the disc from the changerwithin 10 seconds, the disc willreload into the slot. Then the systemreturns to the previous mode (AM,FM, or XM Radio).

To remove a different disc from thechanger, first select it with theappropriate preset button. When thatdisc begins playing, press the ejectbutton. Continue pressing the ejectbutton to remove all the discs fromthe changer.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off. The disc thatwas last selected is ejected first.

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.381


Removing Discs from the In-dashDisc Changer

Protecting Discs

262

12/07/20 11:03:08 31TK4640_267

The chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.For additional information ondamaged discs, see page .

The audio system will try to play thedisc. If there is still a problem, theerror message will reappear. Pressthe eject button, and pull out the disc.Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

CauseError Message Solution

382

High Temperature

Track/File format notsupported

Mechanical Error

Servo Error

Disc Error

Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Current track will be skipped. The nextsupported track or file plays automatically.Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).Check the disc for serious damage, signs ofdeformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt(see page 382). Insert the disc again. If the codedoes not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot beremoved, consult your dealer. Do not try toforce the disc out of the player.

Check the disc for serious damage, signs ofdeformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt(see page 382).

Disc Changer Error Messages (Models without navigation system)F

eatures

263

HEAT ERROR

UNSUPPORTED

BAD DISCPLEASE CHECK

OWNERSMANUAL PUSH

EJECTMECH ERROR

CHECK DISC LOADBAD DISC

PLEASE CHECKOWNERSMANUAL

CHECK DISCEJECT

12/07/20 11:03:15 31TK4640_268

Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)

264

SKIP BAR


SELECTOR KNOB

TITLE BUTTON

AUX BUTTON

iPod INDICATOR

SETUP BUTTONRETURN BUTTON

USB INDICATOR

12/07/20 11:03:19 31TK4640_269

This audio system can select andplay the audio files on the iPod withthe same controls used for the discplayer. To play an iPod, connect it tothe USB adapter cable in the consolecompartment by using your dockconnector, then press the AUXbutton. The ignition switch must bein the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position. The iPod will also becharged with the ignition switch inthese positions.

The audio system reads and playsplayable sound files on the iPod. Thesystem cannot operate an iPod as amass storage device. The system willonly play songs stored on the iPodwith iTunes.

iPod and iTunes are registeredtrademarks owned by Apple Inc.

iPod models confirmed to becompatible with your audio systemusing the USB adapter cable are:

Do not connect your iPod using ahub.

Do not keep the iPod in thevehicle. Direct sunlight and highheat will damage it.

Do not use an extension cablebetween the USB adapter cableequipped with your vehicle andyour dock connector.

We recommend backing up yourdata before playing it.

Some devices cannot be poweredor charged via the USB adapter. Ifthis is the case, use the accessoryadapter to supply power to yourdevice.

This system may not work with allsoftware versions of these devices.

CONTINUED

ModeliPod (5th generation)iPod classic 80 GB/160 GBiPod classic 120 GBiPod classic 160 GB (launch in 2009)iPod nano (1st to 5th generation)iPod touch (1st to 4th generation)


To Play an iPod

Features

265

NOTE:

12/07/20 11:03:28 31TK4640_270

Pull out the USB connector fromthe holder.

Connect your dock connector tothe iPod correctly and securely.

Install the dock connector to theUSB adapter cable securely.

If the iPod indicator does not appearin the audio display, check theconnections, and try to reconnect theiPod a few times.

1. 2.

3.


Connecting an iPod

266

DOCK CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTER CABLE

USB CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTER CABLE

12/07/20 11:03:34 31TK4640_271

－

You can also select a file from anylist on the iPod menu: playlists,artists, albums and songs, by usingthe selector knob. Push the selectorknob (ENTER) to switch the displayto an iPod menu, then turn theselector knob to select a desired list.Press ENTER to set your selection.

Use the SKIP bar while an iPod isplaying to select passages andchange files.

Each time you press andrelease the side of the SKIP bar,the system skips forward to thebeginning of the next file. Press andrelease the side of the bar toskip backward to the beginning ofthe current file. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previous file.

To move rapidly within a file, pressand hold either side ( or )of the SKIP bar.

Turning the selector knob to theright or the left also changes the file.

If the audio system still does notrecognize the iPod, the iPod mayneed to be reset. Follow theinstructions that came with youriPod, or you can find resetinstructions online at

Each time you press the TITLEbutton the display mode switchesbetween the album name, the songname, the artist name, or name off(which turns off the text display).

The display shows up to 16characters (including spaces) of theselected data. If the text data hasmore than 16 characters, you will seethe first 16 characters and the

indicator in the display. Pressand hold the TITLE button until thenext 16 characters are shown.

CONTINUED

www.apple.com/

To Select a File from iPod MenuTo Change or Select Files



SKIP

Features

267

Push ENTER.

12/07/20 11:03:44 31TK4640_272

You can select any type of repeat andshuffle mode by using the SETUPbutton and the selector knob. Pressthe SETUP button to display themenu items, then turn the selectorknob to select ‘‘PLAY MODE.’’ PressENTER to set the selection.

Turn the selector knob to select aplay mode: normal play, shuffle off,shuffle all, shuffle album, repeat off,or repeat one track, then pressENTER to set your selection.

To cancel the selected mode, pressthe SETUP button and turn theselector knob to show ‘‘PLAYMODE,’’ then press ENTER. Whenyou see ‘‘NORMAL PLAY,’’ pressENTER again.

Pressing the RETURN button goesback to the previous display andpressing the SETUP button cancelsthis setting mode.

If you select ‘‘ALL,’’ all available fileson the selected list are played.

The display shows items on theselected list. Turn the selector knobto select an item, then press ENTERto set your selection.

To Select Repeat or Shuffle Mode:


268

PLAY MODE ITEMS

MENU ITEMS

12/07/20 11:03:54 31TK4640_273

－

－

－

－

－

This featureplays all available files in a selectedlist (playlists, artists, albums orsongs) in random order.You will see SHUFFLE in the display.Select the normal play mode orSHUFFLE OFF to turn off thisfeature.

This featureplays all available albums in aselected list (playlists, artists, albumsor songs) in random order. The filesin each album are played in therecorded order. You will see ALBSHUF in the display.Select the normal play mode orSHUFFLE OFF to turn off thisfeature.

Pressing either side of the SKIP baror turning the selector knob changesa file while keeping the shufflefunction.

Available operating functions vary onmodels or versions. Some functionsmay not be available on the vehicle’saudio system.

Pressing either side of the SKIP baror turning the selector knob changesthe file while keeping the repeatfeature.

Thisfeature continuously plays a file. Youwill see REPEAT in the display.Select normal play or REPEAT OFFto turn it off.

This feature turnsoff the repeat mode.

This featureturns off either of the shuffle modes(SHUFFLE ALL and SHUFFLEALBUM).

SHUFFLE ALL

SHUFFLE ALBUM

REPEAT ONE TRK

REPEAT OFF

SHUFFLE OFF

Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)F

eatures

269

NOTE:

12/07/20 11:04:03 31TK4640_274

＊

＊

If you see an error message in thedisplay, see page .

The displayed message mayvary on models or versions.On some models, there is nomessage to disconnect.

If you reconnect the same iPod, thesystem may begin playing where itleft off, depending on what mode theiPod is in when it is reconnected.

To play the radio, press the AM/FM,or button. Press the CD buttonto switch to the disc mode (if a discis loaded). Press the AUX button toswitch the audio mode between the

audio and iPod.


You can disconnect the iPod at anytime when you see the ‘‘OK todisconnect’’ message in the iPoddisplay. Always make sure you seethe ‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message inthe iPod display before youdisconnect it. Make sure to followthe iPod’s instructions on how todisconnect the dock connector fromthe USB adapter cable.

:

271

Bluetooth

Disconnecting an iPodTo Stop Playing Your iPod iPod Error Messages


270

12/07/20 11:04:11 31TK4640_275

If you see an error message on theaudio display while playing an iPod,find the solution in the chart to theright. If you cannot clear the errormessage, take your vehicle to yourdealer.

Error Message Cause Solution

USB ROM Error

Appears when anincompatible device isconnected.

No files in iPod

Use of unsupportediPod

Recognition failure ofiPod

There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.Disconnect the device. Then, turn the audiosystem off, and turn it on again. Do notreconnect the device that caused the error.

Appears when the iPod is empty. Store somefiles in the iPod.Appears when an unsupported iPod isconnected. See page 265 for specificationinformation on iPods. If it appears when asupported iPod is connected, update the iPodsoftware to the newer version.Appears when the system does notacknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.

iPod Error Messages (Models without navigation system)F

eatures

271

USB ERRORBAD USBDEVICE


iPod NO SONG

UNSUPPORTEDVER.

CONNECT RETRY

12/07/20 11:04:16 31TK4640_276

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)

272

RETURN BUTTON

SKIP BAR


SELECTOR KNOB

TITLE BUTTON

AUX BUTTON

USB INDICATOR

CATEGORY BAR

SETUP BUTTON

FILE TYPE INDICATOR

12/07/20 11:04:21 31TK4640_277

＊

＊

This audio system can select andplay the audio files on a USB flashmemory device with the samecontrols used for the disc player. Toplay a USB flash memory device,connect it to the USB adapter cablein the console compartment, thenpress the AUX button. The ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position.

The audio system reads and playsthe audio files on the USB flashmemory device in MP3, WMA orAAC formats. Depending on theformat, the display shows MP3,WMA or AAC when a USB flashmemory device is playing.

The recommended USB flashmemory devices are 256 MB orhigher, and formatted with the FATfile system. Some digital audioplayers may be compatible as well.

Some USB flash memory devices(such as devices with security lock-out features, etc.) will not work inthis audio unit.

Do not use a device such as a cardreader or hard drive as the deviceor your files may be damaged.

Do not connect your USB flashmemory device using a hub.

Do not use an extension cable tothe USB adapter cable equippedwith your vehicle.

Do not keep a USB flash memorydevice in the vehicle. Directsunlight and high heat will damageit.

We recommend backing up yourdata before playing a USB flashmemory device.

Only AAC format files recordedwith iTunes are playable on thisaudio unit.

:

CONTINUED

To Play a USB Flash MemoryDevice

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)F

eatures

273

NOTE:

12/07/20 11:04:30 31TK4640_278


Some versions of MP3, WMA, orAAC format may not be supported. Ifan unsupported file is found, theaudio unit displays UNSUPPORTED,then skips to the next file.

In WMA or AAC format, DRM(digital rights management) filescannot be played. If the system findsa DRM file, the audio unit displaysUNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skipsto the next file.

Depending on the type andnumber of files, it may take sometime before they begin to play.

Depending on the software thefiles were made with, it may not bepossible to play some files, ordisplay some text data.

Depending on the type ofencoding and writing softwareused, there may be cases wherecharacter information does notdisplay properly.

The order of files in USB playbackmay be different from the order offiles displayed in PC or otherdevices etc. Files are played in theorder stored in USB flash memorydevice.


274

Combining a low sampling f requencywith a low bitrate may result inextremely degraded sound quality.

12/07/20 11:04:37 31TK4640_279

Connect the USB flash memorydevice to the USB adapter cablecorrectly and securely.

When the USB flash memory deviceis connected, the USB indicator isshown in the display.

Each time you press the TITLEbutton, the display mode shows youin sequence, the folder name, the filename, the artist name, the albumname, the song name, or name off(which turns off the text display).

Pull out the USB connector fromthe holder.

The display shows up to 16characters (including spaces) of theselected data. If the text data hasmore than 16 characters, you will seethe first 16 characters and the

indicator in the display. Pressand hold the TITLE button until thenext 16 characters are shown.1. 2.

CONTINUED

Connecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice



eatures

275

USB ADAPTER CABLEUSB ADAPTER CABLE

USB CONNECTOR

12/07/20 11:04:45 31TK4640_280

－

－

＋－

Use the SKIP bar while a USB flashmemory device is playing to selectpassages and change files.

Each time you press andrelease the side of the SKIP bar,the system skips forward to thebeginning of the next file. Press andrelease the side of the bar toskip backward to the beginning ofthe current file. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previous file.


Turning the selector knob to theright or the left also changes the file.

You can also select a folder or filefrom the list by using the selectorknob. Push the selector knob(ENTER) to switch the display to thefolder list, then turn the selectorknob to select a folder. PressENTER to change the display to thefile list, then turn the same knob toselect a file. Press ENTER to setyour selection.

To select adifferent folder, press and releaseeither side of the CATEGORY bar.Press the side to skip to the nextfolder, and press the side to skipto the beginning of the previousfolder.

To Change or Select Files To Select a File from Folder and FileLists

SKIP

Folder Selection


276

Folder Selection

Track SelectionPress ENTER.

12/07/20 11:04:53 31TK4640_281

Turn the selector knob to select anappropriate repeat, random or scanmode, then press the selector knob(ENTER) to set your selection.

Pressing the RETURN button goesback to the previous display andpressing the SETUP button cancelsthis setting mode.

You can select any type of repeat,random and scan modes by using theSETUP button and the selector knob.Push the SETUP button to displaythe menu items, then turn theselector knob to select ‘‘PLAYMODE.’’ Press the selector knob(ENTER) to set the selection.

To cancel the selected mode, pressthe SETUP button and turn theselector knob to show ‘‘PLAYMODE,’’ then press ENTER. Whenyou see ‘‘NORMAL PLAY,’’ pressENTER again.

CONTINUED

To Select Repeat, Random or ScanMode:


eatures

277

MENU ITEMS

12/07/20 11:05:01 31TK4640_282

－

－－

－

－This

feature continuously plays a file.Select normal play to turn it off.Pressing either side of the SKIP baralso turns off this feature.

This functionsamples all files in the selectedfolder in the order they are stored.To activate the scan feature, pressand release the SCAN button. Youwill see SCAN in the display. You willget a 10 second sampling of each filein the folder. Press and hold theSCAN button to get out of the scanmode and play the last file sampled.

You can also select the scan featurefrom the menu items with theselector knob (see page ).

This featurereplays all the files on the selectedfolder in the order they are stored.Select normal play to turn it off.Pressing either side of theCATEGORY bar also turns off thisfeature.

This featureplays the files in the selected folderin random order. You will seeF-RANDOM in the display. Selectnormal play to turn it off.

This featureplays all the files in random order.You will see RANDOM in the display.Select normal play to turn it off.

277REPEAT ONE TRK

SCAN TRKREPEAT ONE FLD

RANDOM IN FLD

RANDOM IN DISC


278

PLAY MODE ITEMS

12/07/20 11:05:09 31TK4640_283

－

If you see an error message in thedisplay, see page .

Select normal play to turn eitherscan feature off. Pressing either sideof the CATEGORY or SKIP bar alsoturns off the feature.

This functionsamples the first file in each folder inthe order they are stored. Toactivate the folder scan feature,press and release the SCAN buttonrepeatedly. You will see F-SCAN inthe display. You will get a 10 secondsampling of the first file in eachfolder. Press and hold the SCANbutton to get out of the folder scanmode and play the last file sampled.

You can also select the folder scanfeature from the menu items withthe selector knob (see page ).

To change modes, press the AM/FM or button. Press the CDbutton to switch to the disc mode (ifa disc is loaded). Press the AUXbutton to switch the audio modebetween the USB orAudio.

You can disconnect the USB flashmemory device at any time even ifthe USB mode is selected on theaudio system. Make sure to followthe USB flash memory device’sinstructions when you remove it.

If you reconnect the same USB flashmemory device, the system willbegin playing where it left off.


277

280

Bluetooth

USB Flash Memory Device ErrorMessages

To Stop Playing a USB FlashMemory Device

SCAN FLD


Disconnecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice

Features

279

12/07/20 11:05:18 31TK4640_284

If you see an error message on theaudio display while playing a USBflash memory device, find thesolution in the chart to the right. Ifyou cannot clear the error message,take your vehicle to your dealer.


USB ROM Error

Appears when anincompatible device isconnected.

Use of unsupportedfiles

No files in USB flashmemory device

Use of unsupportedUSB flash memorydevice

There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.Disconnect the device. Then, turn the audiosystem off, and turn it on again. Do notreconnect the device that caused the error.

Appears when the files in the USB flashmemory device are DRM or an unsupportedformat. This error message appears for about 3seconds, then plays the next song.Appears when the USB flash memory device isempty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC filesin the USB flash memory device. Save someMP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flashmemory device.Appears when an unsupported device isconnected. See page 273 for the specificationinformation for the USB flash memory device.If it appears when the supported device isconnected, reconnect the device.

USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models without navigation system)

280

USB ERRORBAD USBDEVICE


UNPLAYABLE FILE

USB NO SONG

UNSUPPORTED

12/07/20 11:05:22 31TK4640_285

CONTINUED

Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system)F

eatures

281

SKIP BAR

SELECTOR KNOB

TITLE BUTTON

AUX BUTTON

SETUP BUTTON


12/07/20 11:05:27 31TK4640_286

＊＊

Your vehicle is equipped with aAudio system, which

allows you to listen to streamingaudio from your Audiocompatible phone. This function isonly available on phones that arepaired and linked to the vehicle’s

HandsFreeLink (HFL)system (see page ).

Make sure that your phone is pairedand linked to HFL.Press the AUX button with theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position. The audiodisplay shows the Audiomessage and mark. Until the phoneis recognized, you will see ‘‘NOCONNECT’’ on the display. Thismessage will go off when the phoneis recognized, then the systembegins to play.

If more than one phone is paired tothe HFL system, there will be adelay before the system begins toplay.

After a device is linked, press theTITLE button to confirm the devicename. The name of the device willappear on the audio display.

In some states, provinces,and territories, it may be illegal toperform some data device functionswhile driving.

If an iPod, USB flash memorydevice, or audio unit connectedto the auxiliary input jack wasselected at the last mode, youwill see iPod, USB, or AUX inthe audio display. Push the AUXbutton again to play audio filesfrom your Audiophone.

To begin to play the audio files, youmay need to operate your phone. Ifso, follow the phone maker’soperating instructions.

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phoneswith streaming audio capabilities arecompatible with the system. You canfind an approved phone by visiting

, or bycalling the HandsFreeLinkconsumer support at 1-888-528-7876.In Canada, visit ,or call (888) 528-7876.

:

412

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

www.acura.com/handsfreelink


To Play Audio FilesBluetooth

Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system)

282

NOTE:

12/07/20 11:05:36 31TK4640_287

In the following conditions, thedisplay shows ‘‘NO CONNECT’’message.

The phone is not linked to HFL.The phone is not turned on.The phone is not in the vehicle.Another HFL compatible phone,which is not compatible for

Audio, is alreadyconnected.

Press the side of the SKIP barto skip forward to the next file, andpress the side to skip backwardto the beginning of the current file.Push the side again to skip tothe previous file.

Turning the selector knob to theright or left also changes a file.

The resume/pause mode can stopplaying a file temporarily. Press theSETUP button to display the audiosettings.

Turn the selector to selectRESUME/PAUSE mode, then pressENTER to set your selection. Repeatto resume play.

The pause function may notbe available on some phone devices.

Press the SETUP button to displaythe audio settings. Turn the selectorto select a desired sound mode, thenpress ENTER to set your selection.Turn the selector to your liking (seepage for more sound settinginformation).

The skip function may not beavailable on some phone devices.

243

Bluetooth

CONTINUED

To skip a file

To pause or resume a file To change sound settings

Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system)F

eatures

283

NOTE:NOTE:

12/07/20 11:05:50 31TK4640_288

If you receive a call when theAudio is playing, press the

HFL Talk button on the steeringwheel. The display switches to theHFL mode (see page ).

After ending the call, press the HFLBack button to go back to the

Audio mode.

If you receive a call while the systemis in the pause mode, the mode willbe canceled and Audiowill continue to play.

Select any other audio mode bypressing a button: AM/FM,

or CD (if a disc is loaded),on the audio control panel, or pressthe mode button on the steeringwheel to select another audio mode.If an iPod or USB flash memorydevice is connected to the USBadapter cable, or audio unit isconnected to AUX jack, pressing theAUX button also changes the mode.

Switching to another mode pausesthe music playing from your phone.


628

407

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system)

To switch to HFL mode To turn off the Bluetooth Audiomode

284

12/08/03 20:58:31 31TK4640_289

Most audio system functions can stillbe controlled by standard buttons,dials, and knobs, but some functionscan only be accessed using theinterface dial. The interface dial hastwo parts, a dial and a selector.

The dial turns left and right. Use it tomake selections or adjustments to alist or menu on the screen.

The selector can be pushed left,right, up, down, and in. Use theselector to scroll through lists, toselect menus, and to highlight menuitems. When you make a selection,press ENTER to go to that selection.

The audio system can also beoperated by voice control. See thenavigation system manual forcomplete details.

When you unlock the doors withyour remote and turn the audiosystem on, the driver’s ID (Driver 1or Driver 2) is detected, and theradio presets and sound levelsettings (see page ) are turned tothe respective memorized modeautomatically.

296

Interface Dial Voice Control System


Audio System (Models with navigation system)F

eatures

285

SELECTOR ENTER

DIAL

12/07/20 11:06:05 31TK4640_290

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

286

INTERFACE DIAL

(SOUND) BUTTON

AM/FM BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

CATEGORY BAR

TUNE BAR

AUDIO BUTTON

NAVIGATION SCREEN


SKIP BAR

CENTER DISPLAY

SCAN/A.SEL(SCAN/AUTO SELECT) BAR

TITLE BUTTON

12/07/20 11:06:11 31TK4640_291

The power mode must be inACCESSORY or ON. Press theAUDIO button to view the audiocontrol display. Turn the system onby pressing the VOL/ knob orthe AM/FM button. Adjust thevolume by turning theVOL/ knob.

Your vehicle has the engine start/stop button instead of an ignitionswitch. For more information on howto select the power mode, see page

.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, skip (seek), scan, thepreset buttons, and auto select.On the FM band, you can also usethe features provided by the radiodata system (RDS). For moreinformation on the RDS, see page

.

On the AM band, AM noisereduction turns on automatically.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to are shown onthe display. To change bands, pressthe AM/FM button. You can alsochange bands by pushing theinterface selector up. Each time youpush it up, the band will change toFM1, FM2 or AM. On the FM bands,STEREO will be shown on thenavigation screen and ST on thecenter display, if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

184

290

CONTINUED

To Play the AM/FM Radio To Select a Station

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)F

eatures

287

BAND

STEREO INDICATOR

12/07/20 11:06:21 31TK4640_292

－

－

－Use the TUNE bar to tunethe radio to a desired frequency.Press the side of the bar to tuneto a higher frequency, or the

side to tune to a lowerfrequency. To tune with theinterface dial, push the interfaceselector down, and turn the interfacedial to select Tune. Then pressENTER on the interface selector,and turn the interface dial to thedesired frequency. To exit theTUNE mode, press ENTER on the

interface selector, then push theinterface selector up to go back.

The skip (seek)function searches up and down fromthe current frequency to find astation with a strong signal. Toactivate it, press either side ( or

) of the SKIP bar, then releaseit.

The SCAN functionsamples all stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN side ofthe SCAN A.SEL bar, then release it.

To scan with the interface dial, pushthe interface selector down, and turnthe interface dial to select Scan, thenpress ENTER on the interfaceselector.


TUNE

SKIP (SEEK)

SCAN

288

TUNE

SCAN

12/07/20 11:06:28 31TK4640_293

－

－

When the system finds a strongsignal, it will stop and play thatstation for about 10 seconds. If youdo nothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and play itfor 10 seconds. When it plays astation that you want to listen to,press the SCAN side of the bar again.

Press the preset button, and holdit until you hear a beep. You canalso store frequencies with theinterface dial. Select the preseticon you want to store thefrequency on, then press ENTERon the interface selector, and holdit until you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

If you aretraveling and can no longer receiveyour preset stations, you can use theauto select feature to find stations inthe local area.

Each preset button orpreset icon can store one frequencyon AM and two frequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storesix stations each.

Use the tune, skip (seek), scan, orRDS function to tune the radio to adesired station.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

To store a preset memory location:


AUTO SELECT

Preset

Features

289

A.SEL INDICATOR

A.SEL

12/07/20 11:06:37 31TK4640_294

Push the interface selector down todisplay the AUDIO MENU. Turn theinterface dial to select A.SEL, thenpress ENTER on the interfaceselector. Turn the interface dial toselect ON, then press ENTER on theinterface selector. You will seeA.SEL on the center display and theaudio control display (if selected),and the system goes into auto selectmode for several seconds.

You can also press the A.SEL side ofthe SCAN/A.SEL bar. You will seeA.SEL on the center display or thescreen, and the system goes intoauto select mode for several seconds.

You will see ‘‘0’’ displayed if autoselect cannot find a strong station forevery preset button (icon).

The system stores the frequencies ofsix AM and twelve FM stations inthe preset buttons (icons).

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons (icons) as previouslydescribed.

select A.Sel onthe audio menu again and turn theinterface dial to select A.SEL OFF,or press the A.SEL side of the baragain. This restores the presets youoriginally set.

For information on AM/FM radiofrequencies and reception, see page

.

On the FM band, you can select afavorite station and display theprogram service name provided bythe radio data system (RDS).

The RDS INFO display functionshows the name of the station youare listening to. With the audiosystem on and the FM band selected,you can turn this function on or off.

385

To cancel auto select,


Radio Data System (RDS)

RDS INFO Display

290

12/07/20 11:06:45 31TK4640_295

If the station you are listening to isnot an RDS station, the audio screenand the center display continue toshow the frequency.

To switch the RDS INFO displayfunction on and off, press andrelease the TITLE button. With thesystem on, you will see the ‘‘RDSINFO ON’’ message on the centerdisplay. If the station you arelistening to is an RDS station, thedisplayed frequency switches to thestation name.

When you turn off this function bypressing the TITLE button, thecenter display shows ‘‘RDS INFOOFF.’’

On the FM band selected, you canselect the program type provided bythe RDS. Press the AUDIO button todisplay the radio information on thescreen. Push down the interfaceselector, then turn the interface dialto select RDS search. Press ENTERto set your selection. The principalRDS categories are shown asfollows:

If the station you arelistening to is an RDS station, theaudio screen will always display theRDS information.

CONTINUED

Radio Data System (RDS) Category


eatures

291

NOTE:RDS INFO MESSAGE

RDS SEARCH

12/07/20 11:06:52 31TK4640_296

＋－

ALL: All RDS category stations

TOP 40: Top 40 hitsROCK: Rock, classic rock and softrock musicOLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldiesJAZZ: JazzSOFT: Adult hits and soft musicR & B: Rhythm and blues, and softrhythm and bluesCLASSIC: Classical musicRELIGION: Programs concernedwith religionINFO: News, information, sports,talk shows, foreign language,personality, public, college, andweather

Turn the interface dial to select anRDS category. You can use thesearch or scan function to find radiostations on the selected RDScategory by pressing the interfaceselector to the left or the right. PressENTER to set your selection. If youdo nothing while the RDS category isselected, the selected category iscanceled.

You can also select an RDS categorywith the CATEGORY bar. Presseither side ( or ) of theCATEGORY bar to display an RDScategory in the center display. Selecta category by pressing either side ofthe bar.

TRAFFIC: Traffic information

COUNTRY: Country music


292

RDS CATEGORY

RDS CATEGORY

12/07/20 11:07:04 31TK4640_297

This function searches up and downfor strong signal frequencies thatcarry the selected RDS categoryinformation. This can help you tofind a station in your favoritecategory. To activate it, press andrelease either side ( or ) ofthe SKIP bar. You will also see theselected RDS category nameblinking in the center display whilesearching it.

To activate RDS category searchwith the interface dial, push theAUDIO button to display the FMradio information on the screen.Push the interface selector down,and turn the interface dial to selectRDS search. Press ENTER on theinterface selector. The screen showsyou the RDS category list.

While the RDS category is selected,move the interface selector to theleft or right to select SEEK up,SEEK down, or SCAN in the upperright corner of the screen. PressENTER to activate the RDS categorysearch (SEEK up/down).

Turn the interface dial to the desiredRDS category.


CONTINUED


RDS Category Search

Features

293

SEEK is selected.

SEEK/SCAN ICON (RDS Search mode)

RDS CATEGORY LIST

12/07/20 11:07:12 31TK4640_298

To activate RDS category scan withthe interface dial, push the AUDIObutton to display the FM radioinformation on the screen. Push theinterface selector down, and turn theinterface dial to select RDS searchon the audio menu. Press ENTER onthe interface selector. The screenshows you the RDS category list.

If you do nothing, the system willscan for the next strong station andplay it for 10 seconds. When it playsa station that you want to listen to,press the SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar again.

The scan function samples allstations with strong signals on theselected RDS category one by one.To activate it, press and release theSCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar.You will see SCAN in the centerdisplay. The system will scan for astation with a strong signal in theselected RDS category. You will alsosee the selected RDS category nameblinking in the center display whilescanning it. When the system findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 10 seconds.



RDS Category SCAN

294

RDS CATEGORY LIST

SEEK/SCAN ICON (RDS Search mode)

SCAN is selected.

12/07/20 11:07:18 31TK4640_299

While the RDS category is selected,move the interface selector to theleft or the right to select SCAN.Then press ENTER to activate theRDS SCAN.

To activate radio text display, usethe interface dial. Push the interfaceselector down, and turn the interfacedial to select Read Radio Text. PressENTER on the interface selector toenter the setting.

This function displays the radio textinformation of the selected RDSstation.

If the selected RDS station has theradio text information, you will seethe text indicator on the screen.

Turn the interface dial to the desiredRDS category.

CONTINUED

Radio Text Display


eatures

295

TEXT INDICATOR

READ RADIO TEXT

12/07/20 11:07:26 31TK4640_300

To adjust the sound, press theAUDIO button, push the interfaceselector down, and turn the interfacedial to Sound Setup. Then pressENTER on the interface selector.

BASS, TREBLE, FADER, andBALANCE are each adjustable. Youcan also adjust the strength of thesound coming from the center andsubwoofer speakers. In addition, youcan set the Dolby PL (ProLogic) IIand Speed-sensitive volumecompensation (SVC).

These adjustments can be made withthe (Sound) button or theinterface dial.

The display shows up to 64characters on the selected RDSstation.

Adjusting the Sound


296

SOUND SETUP

12/07/20 11:07:33 31TK4640_301

－

－

Thesemodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.Fader adjusts the front-to-backstrength, while balance adjusts theside-to-side strength. To adjust faderand balance, select FADER orBALANCE, then press ENTER onthe interface selector. The currentsetting is shown on the screen. Turnthe interface dial or VOL/ knobto the desired level, and enter yourselection by pressing ENTER on theinterface selector. To equalize thefader or balance, turn the interfacedial or VOL/ knob until themarks on the sound grid come to thecenter of the adjustment bar.

If the fader adjustment is set to F9(maximum front level), thesubwoofer is turned off.

Turn the VOL/ knob orinterface knob to adjust the settingto your liking. You can check thelevel on the navigation screen or onthe center display. When the levelreaches the center, you will see ‘‘C’’in the center display.

The system will return to the audioplaying mode in the center displayabout 10 seconds after you stopadjusting a mode.

If you do not make an adjustmentwithin 10 seconds, you will need toselect the mode again.

To adjust bassand treble, select BASS or TREBLE,and press ENTER on the interfaceselector. The current setting isshown on the display. Turn theinterface dial or VOL/ knob tothe desired level, and enter yourselection by pressing ENTER on theinterface selector.

You can also adjust the sound bypushing the (Sound) buttonrepeatedly. Each mode is shown inthe center display as you push thebutton.

Select the mode you want to adjustby turning the interface dial thenpress ENTER.

CONTINUED

FADER/BALANCE

BASS/TREBLE


eatures

297

12/07/20 11:07:44 31TK4640_302

－

－

－

Adjusts the strength ofsound from the center speaker.

To adjust thestrength of the sound from thesubwoofer speaker, select it andpress ENTER on the interfaceselector. Turn the interface dial tothe desired level, and enter yourselection by pressing ENTER on theinterface selector.

The SVC mode controls the volumebased on vehicle speed. The fasteryou go, the louder the audio volumebecomes. As you slow down, theaudio volume decreases.

The SVC has four modes: OFF,LOW, MID, and HIGH. The defaultsetting is MID. To change the SVCmode, select SVC, then pressENTER on the interface selector.The current setting is shown on the

screen. Turn the interface dial to thedesired level, and enter yourselection by pressing ENTER on theinterface selector. If you feel thesound is too loud, choose low. If youfeel the sound is too quiet, choosehigh.

DolbyPL (ProLogic) II signal processingcreates multi-channel surroundsound from 2 channel stereo audiosources. Dolby ProLogic II can onlyactivate when listening to DISC(CD-DA, MP3, WMA, AAC), XMRadio, AUX (USB, iPod , AUX,

Audio), and HDD Audio.When ProLogic II is available, ‘‘PLII’’ is shown in the audio display.

When ProLogic II is not available inthe selected audio source, ‘‘DPL2 N/A’’ is shown on the center display.

To set this feature on or off, selectDolby PL II, and press ENTER onthe interface selector. Rotate theinterface dial to ON or OFF, andpress ENTER.

Manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories. Dolby, ProLogic, MLP Lossless and the double-D symbol are trademarks of DolbyLaboratories.

In some audio playing modes(XM, AUX), when DPLII is on, themusic coming from the rearspeakers may sound distorted. Thisis due to compression of the music,and it does not indicate a problemwith the setting.

Bluetooth

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

Dolby PL (ProLogic) II


Speed-sensitive VolumeCompensation (SVC)

298

NOTE:

12/07/20 11:07:51 31TK4640_303

CONTINUED

Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)F

eatures

299

INTERFACE DIAL

NAVIGATION SCREEN


SKIP BAR


PRESET BUTTONS

XM RADIO BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON

CATEGORY BAR

TUNE BAR

AUDIO BUTTON

(SOUND) BUTTON

CENTER DISPLAY

12/07/20 11:07:57 31TK4640_304

To listen to XM Radio, set the powermode to ACCESSORY or ON. Pushthe button to select the XMRadio. The last channel you listenedto will show in the audio screen (ifselected) and the center display.Adjust the volume by turning theVOL/ knob.


.

Each time you push the interfaceselector up, the band will change toXM1 or XM2. Push the AUDIObutton to display XM information onthe screen. You can operate the XMradio system with the interface dial.

Your vehicle is capable of receivingXM Radio anywhere in the UnitedStates and Canada, except Hawaii,Alaska, and Puerto Rico. XM is aregistered trademark of Sirius XMRadio , Inc. and XM CANADA is aregistered business name ofCanadian Satellite Radio Inc.

XM Radio receives signals from twosatellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, XM Radioalso allows you to view channel andcategory selections in the audiodisplay.

184

Operating the XM Radio

Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)

300

12/07/20 11:08:04 31TK4640_305

－

－

－

－＋－

Each time you press and release theTITLE button, the center displaychanges in the following sequence:NAME (artist name), TITLE (musictitle), and CHANNEL NAME(channel name).

On the screen, you will see theselected CHANNEL (number),CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),and TITLE (music title).

You may experience periods whenXM Radio does not transmit theartist’s name and song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.

To switch between thecategory mode and channel mode,push the interface selector down todisplay AUDIO MENU, then turnthe interface dial to select Mode, andpress ENTER on the interfaceselector.

Turn the interface dial to select CHor CAT, then press ENTER on theinterface selector. Move theinterface selector up to go back.

You can also switch the mode bypressing the TITLE button for 3seconds.

In the category mode, such as Jazz,Rock, Classical, etc., you cannavigate through all of the channelswithin that category. In the channelmode, you can select all of theavailable channels.

Press either side of theTUNE bar to change channelselections. Press the side of thebar for higher numbered channelsand the side for lowernumbered channels. You can alsochange channels with the interfaceselector. Push down the interface

selector to select AUDIO MENU,then turn the interface dial to chooseTune and press ENTER on theinterface selector. Turn the interfacedial to the appropriate direction. Inthe category mode, you can onlyselect channels within that category.

Push down theinterface selector to select AUDIOMENU, then turn the interface dialto select Channel List and pressENTER on the selector. Turn theinterface dial to select a channel,then press ENTER to set yourselection.

Presseither side of the bar to selectanother category.

CONTINUED

MODE

TUNE

CHANNEL LIST

CATEGORY ( or )


eatures

301

12/07/20 11:08:11 31TK4640_306

－

－

－－

The scan function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the channels within thatcategory are scanned. To activateSCAN, press the SCAN side of theSCAN/A.SEL bar. You will seeSCAN on the screen and centerdisplay.

The system plays each channel innumerical order for a few seconds,then selects the next channel. Whenyou hear a channel you want tocontinue listening to, press theSCAN side of the bar to cancel.

This functionsamples all channels. Push down theinterface selector to select AUDIOMENU, then turn the interface dialto select Channel Scan and pressENTER on the interface selector.

Press the button. EitherXM1 or XM2 will be shown on thedisplay.

To store a channel:

You can store up to 12preset channels using the six presetbuttons. Each button stores onechannel from the XM1 band and onechannel from the XM2 band.

Thisfunction samples the stations in theselected category. Push down theinterface selector to select AUDIOMENU, then turn the interface dialto select Category Scan and pressENTER on the interface selector.

1.

SCAN

CHANNEL SCAN

PresetCATEGORY SCAN


302

XM BAND

12/07/20 11:08:19 31TK4640_307

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

The encryptioncode is being updated. Wait until theencryption code is fully updated.Channels 0 and 1 should still worknormally.

XM is loading theaudio or program information.

The channelcurrently selected is no longerbroadcasting.

Once a channel is stored, pressand release the proper presetbutton to tune to it.

Press the button or scrollup again. The other XM band willbe shown. Store the next sixchannels using steps 2 and 3.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

Pick the preset button you wantfor that channel. Press and holdthe preset button until you hear abeep. You can also pick thenumber with the interface dial.Select your desired number andpress and hold ENTER on theinterface selector.

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can beselected. In channel mode, allchannels can be selected.

Use the tune, list, or scan functionto tune to a desired channel.

The signal iscurrently too weak. Move the vehicleto an area away from tall buildings,and with an unobstructed view of thesouthern horizon.

The selected channelnumber does not exist, or is not partof your subscription, or this channelhas no artist or title information atthis time.

There isa problem with the XM antenna.Please consult your dealer.

The selectedchannel has no artist or titleinformation at this time.

5.

3.

4.

2.

CONTINUED

‘‘UPDATING’’

‘‘LOADING’’

‘‘OFF AIR’’XM Radio Display Messages

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’

‘‘ - - - - ’’

‘‘CHECK ANTENNA’’

‘‘NO INFO’’


eatures

303

12/07/20 11:08:30 31TK4640_308

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas. Satellite signalsare more likely to be blocked by tallbuildings and mountains the farthernorth you travel from the equator.

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.

Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.

Driving in tunnels.Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.

Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.

When DPLII is turned on (see page), sound coming from the rear

speakers may be distorted due to thecompression of the music beingbroadcast. Turn DPLII off if thishappens.

298


304

GROUND REPEATER

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstaclesto the south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

12/07/20 11:08:38 31TK4640_309

CONTINUED

To replay and see the stored file,press the AUDIO button to selectthe audio display on the navigationscreen.

Push down the interface selectorto display the audio menu. Turnthe interface dial to select Note,then press ENTER.

This function stores the soundcontent played on the selected XMRadio station with the channel,category, name, and title information.

To activate this function, press andhold the button for about 2seconds while a song or passagewhich you want to store is playing.You can record for up to 10 seconds.To stop recording, press the AM/FM button or button.

Once you store the recorded soundfile, you can replay it and confirm theinformation. The system can storeup to 30 sound files. If you continueto store more files, the oldest onewill be deleted each time you add anew file.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect XM Radioreception.


628

U.S. models only


Note Function

Features

305

NOTE ICON

12/07/20 11:08:48 31TK4640_310

＋

Turn the selector dial to select asound file, then press ENTER. Thedisplay shows the category, nameand title information of the selectedfile.

To delete all files, push the interfaceselector to the left to select‘‘DELETE ALL,’’ then press ENTER.To delete one file, select the file youwant to delete and push the interfaceselector to the right, then pressENTER.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Radio. With the power modein ACCESSORY or ON, press the

button. A variety of musictypes and styles will play.


.

After you have registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in theXM Radio mode while you wait foractivation. This should take about 30minutes.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, CAT(category) or CH (channel) willappear in the center display, andyou’ll be able to listen to XM Radiobroadcasts. XM Radio will continueto send an activation signal to yourvehicle for at least 12 hours from theactivation request. If the service hasnot been activated after 36 hours,contact XM Radio. In Canada,contact XM CANADA .

If you decide to purchase XM radioservice, contact XM Radio at

, or at1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contactXM CANADA at , orat 1-877-209-0079. You will need togive them your radio I.D. numberand your credit card number. To getyour radio I.D. number, press theside of the CATEGORY bar until ‘‘0’’

appears in the display. Your I.D. willappear in the displays.

184

www.siriusxm.com

www.xmradio.ca


Receiving XM Radio Service

306

SOUND FILE RECORDED DATE

12/07/20 11:08:57 31TK4640_311

CONTINUED

Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)F

eatures

307

INTERFACE DIAL


SKIP BAR

NAVIGATION SCREEN

DISC SLOT

EJECT BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

CATEGORY BAR

AUDIO BUTTON

VOL/(VOLUME/POWER)KNOB

DISC BUTTON

CENTER DISPLAY

12/07/20 11:09:03 31TK4640_312

The disc packages or jackets shouldhave one of these marks.

The disc player can also play MP3,WMA, or AAC format that saved onCD-R/RW or DVD-R/RW (see page

).

If a file on WMA or AAC disc isprotected by digital rightsmanagement (DRM), the audiosystem skips to the next file.

DVD-A discs not meeting DVDverification standards may not beplayable.

Video CDs and DVD-V format discswill not work in this unit.

Some CD-DA and CD-ROM mixeddiscs are not playable.

Your vehicle’s audio system has anin-dash disc player. To operate thedisc player, the power mode must bein the ACCESSORY or ON.


.

CD (CD-DA, CD-TEXT)CD-R/CD-RW (MP3, WMA, AAC)DVD-ADVD-R/DVD-RW (MP3, WMA,AAC)

The disc player can play these discformats:

184

313

Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)

308

NOTE:

12/08/08 20:02:36 31TK4640_313

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

It is possible to select up to 999 filesfor inclusion in CD-Rs and CD-RWs,and up to 3,500 files for inclusion inDVD-Rs and DVD-RWs.

Insert a disc about halfway into thedisc slot. The drive will pull the discin the rest of the way to play it. Youoperate the disc player with thesame controls used for the radio.The number of the current track isshown in the display. When playing adisc in MP3, WMA or AAC, thenumbers of the current folder andfile are shown. The system willcontinuously play a disc until youchange modes.

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.

Manufactured under license underU.S. Patent’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674;5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 &other U.S. and worldwide patentsissued & pending. DTS and DTSDigital Surround are registeredtrademarks and the DTS logos andSymbol are trademarks of DTS, Inc.All Rights Reserved. Reverseengineering or disassembly isprohibited.

Depending on the software the fileswere made with, it may not bepossible to play some files, or displaysome text data.

381

To Load a Disc


eatures

309


12/07/20 11:09:20 31TK4640_314

Select the disc player by pressing theDISC button. The system will beginplaying the last selected track in thedisc. You will see the current trackposition highlighted.

Title information will be displayed ina list when the information is foundin the Gracenote Album Info(Gracenote Media Database) on thebuilt-in hard disk drive. When youplay a CD recorded with text data,you will see the genre, artist name,album and track name on the screen.When you play MP3/WMA/AACdiscs, you will see the genre, artistname, album name and track nameon the screen. If the disc was notrecorded with this information, it willnot be displayed.

Each time you press the TITLEbutton, the center display changesfrom artist name to album name, totrack name and then to normaldisplay that shows the track numberand the elapsed time. When playinga disc in MP3/WMA/AAC, thedisplay mode changes from foldername, to file name, to artist tag, toalbum tag, to track tag, and then tonormal display.

Each time you press and release theside of the skip bar, the player

skips forward to the beginning of thenext track. Press and release the

side of the skip bar to skipbackward to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press the sideagain to skip to the previous track.To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold either side of the skip bar.

When you insert a CD for the firsttime, the system automatically startsrecording to the hard disc. Forinformation on recording from musicCDs, see page .

When you insert a CD for the firsttime, a Gracenote notificationappears. For more information, seepage .

322

351

To Play a Disc To Change Tracks


310

12/07/20 11:09:27 31TK4640_315

You can also choose a track directlyfrom a track list. If there are no tracknames, you will see ‘‘No Title’’displayed. Turn the interface dial toselect the desired track, then pressENTER on the interface selector.

To replay the current trackcontinuously, push the interfaceselector down while playing a disc.Turn the interface dial to selectRepeat on the AUDIO MENU, andpress ENTER on the interfaceselector. Turn the interface dial toselect Repeat icon, and pressENTER on the interface selector.

To turn this feature off, turn theinterface dial to select the OFF icon,and press ENTER on the interfaceselector.

To Choose a Track Track Repeat


eatures

311

REPEAT OFF ICON

TRACK REPEAT ICONTRACK LIST

TRACK REPEAT INDICATOR

12/07/20 11:09:35 31TK4640_316

This feature plays the tracks within adisc in random order. When playingMP3, WMA or AAC format discs, allthe tracks within the disc are playedin random order, regardless of theconfiguration of the folder.

Push the interface selector downwhile playing a disc. Turn theinterface dial to select Random onthe AUDIO MENU, and pressENTER on the interface selector.

The scan function samples all trackson the disc in the order they arerecorded on the disc.

To activate scan, press the SCANside of the SCAN/A.SEL bar, orpush the interface selector downwhile playing a disc. Turn theinterface dial to select Scan on theAUDIO MENU, and press ENTERon the interface selector.


Turn the interface dial to select thetrack random icon, and pressENTER on the interface selector.

Random Play Track Scan


312

TRACK RANDOM INDICATOR

SCAN ICONTRACK RANDOM ICON

RANDOM OFF ICON

12/07/20 11:09:45 31TK4640_317

This audio system plays CD-ROM,CD-R/RW, DVD-ROM, andDVD-R/RW compressed in MP3,WMA, or AAC formats. You canselect up to 255 folders or tracks.

To take the system out of disc mode,press the AM/FM button, the

button, or the HDD/AUXbutton. To return to disc mode, pressthe DISC button.

Turn the interface dial to select theScan icon, and press ENTER on theinterface selector. You will hear a 10-second sampling of each track on thedisc. When you return to disc mode,the disc will begin playing fromwhere it left off.

To turn this feature off, press theSCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL baragain, or turn the interface dial toselect the OFF icon, and pressENTER on the interface selector.The system begins to play the lasttrack sampled.

Your vehicle has the engine start/stop button instead of an ignitionswitch. For more information to turnthe power mode off, see page .

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with the VOL/

knob or the engine start/stopbutton, the disc will stay in the drive.When you turn the system back on,the disc will begin playing where itleft off.


184

CONTINUED

Playing an MP3/WMA/AAC DiscTo Stop Playing a Disc


eatures

313

12/07/20 11:09:53 31TK4640_318

Combining a low sampling frequencywith a low bitrate may result inextremely degraded sound quality.

To play an MP3/WMA/AAC disc,use the disc controls previouslydescribed, along with the followinginformation.

While playing an MP3/WMA/AACdisc, you can select a folder withinthe disc by pressing either side ofthe category bar. Each time youpress either side of the bar, thefolder title and its first file’sinformation appear on the centerdisplay and on the navigation screenin hierarchical order of the folderswhich contain files within the disc.

If the root folder has some additionalfolders in the lower layer, they willbe listed on the screen.

Using the interface selector, you cansee the list of all the folders within adisc. While playing an MP3/WMA/AAC disc, push the interface selectorup. The folder list in the currentlyplaying disc will appear on the screen.

Changing and Selecting the Folders/Files


Changing the Folders

314

NOTE:

FOLDER LIST

12/07/20 11:10:00 31TK4640_319

Select a desired folder by turning theinterface dial, then press ENTER.The display returns to normal play,and the first track in the selectedfolder begins to play.

To change a file, turn the interfacedial to select a desired file, thenpress ENTER.

This feature, when activated, replaysall files on the selected folder in theorder they are compressed. Toactivate folder repeat play, push theinterface selector down while playinga disc. Turn the interface dial toselect Repeat on the AUDIO MENU,and press ENTER on the interfaceselector. Turn the interface dial toselect the folder repeat icon, andpress ENTER on the interfaceselector.



Folder Repeat

Features

315

FOLDER REPEAT ICON

FOLDER REPEAT INDICATOR

REPEAT OFF ICON

FILE LIST

12/07/20 11:10:07 31TK4640_320

This feature, when activated, playsall files in the current folder inrandom order. To activate folderrandom play, push the interfaceselector down while playing a disc.Turn the interface dial to selectRandom on the AUDIO MENU, andpress ENTER on the interfaceselector. Turn the interface dial toselect the folder random icon, andpress ENTER on the interfaceselector.

To turn this feature off, turn theinterface dial to select OFF icon, andpress ENTER on the interfaceselector.

This feature samples all files in theselected folder in the order they arestored. To activate this feature, pressthe SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SELbar. You can also select the SCANicon with the interface dial. Push theselector down, turn the dial to select

Scan on the AUDIO MENU, thenpress ENTER. Turn the dial to selectthe scan icon, then press ENTER.The system begins to play a file forabout 10 seconds, and continues tosample the remaining files.

To turn this feature off, press theSCAN side of the bar again, or selectOFF icon by turning the dial, thenpress ENTER.


Folder Random

File Scan

316

FOLDER RANDOM INDICATOR

FOLDER SCAN ICON

FILE SCAN ICON

SCAN OFF ICON

FOLDER RANDOM ICON

12/07/20 11:10:15 31TK4640_321

→→ →

This feature, when activated,samples the first file of each folderfor 10 seconds. To scan a folder,press the SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar. Or, push the interfaceselector down while playing a disc.Turn the interface dial to select Scanon the AUDIO MENU, and pressENTER on the interface selector.Turn the interface dial to select thefolder scan icon, and press ENTERon the interface selector.

When playing MP3, WMA or AACformat disc, each time you press theSCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar,the system changes in the followingsequence: Scan Scan first track infolder OFF Scan.

The system plays the first file in thefirst folder for about 10 seconds. Ifyou do nothing, the system will thenplay the first files in the next foldersfor 10 seconds. After playing the firstfile in the last folder, the systemplays normally.

To turn this feature off, turn theinterface dial to select OFF icon, andpress ENTER on the interfaceselector. The last track sampledbegins to play.


Folder Scan

Features

317

NOTE:

12/07/20 11:10:21 31TK4640_322

To remove the disc, press the eject( ) button.

If you do not remove the disc fromthe slot, the system will reload thedisc after 10 seconds. The disc startsplaying automatically.

Use the disc controls previouslydescribed.

For information on how to handleand protect discs, see page .381


Removing a Disc from the Player Playing a DVD-A Disc

Protecting Discs

318

12/07/20 11:10:26 31TK4640_323

The chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thecenter display while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in thecenter display while playing a disc,press the eject button. After ejectingthe disc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.For additional information ondamaged discs, see page .

The audio system will try to play thedisc. If there is still a problem, theerror message will reappear. Pressthe eject button, and pull out the disc.Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.


382

Servo Error

Mechanical Error

FOCUS ErrorDisc violates copyrightDisc not supportedLoad Error

Track/File format notsupportedHigh Temperature

Press the eject button and pull out the disc.Check the disc for serious damage, signs ofdeformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt(see page 382 ). Insert the disc again. If thecode does not disappear, or the disc cannot beremoved, consult your dealer. Do not try toforce the disc out of the player.

Current track will be skipped. The nextsupported track or file plays automatically.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

Disc Player Error Messages (Models with navigation system)F

eatures

319

BAD DISCPLEASE CHECK

OWNERSMANUALBAD DISC


PUSH EJECTMECH ERROR

CHECK DISC

CHECK DISCLOAD

UNPLAYABLEFILE

HEAT ERROR

12/07/20 11:10:32 31TK4640_324

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

320

TITLE BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

NAVIGATION SCREEN

INTERFACE DIAL

HDD/AUX BUTTON

CENTER DISPLAY

SKIP BARCATEGORY BAR

VOL/(VOLUME/POWER)KNOB


12/07/20 11:10:37 31TK4640_325

－

－－－－－－－

－

Recording function from followingmedia is not supported.CD-DA which prohibits thecopying by SCMSCD-DA with copy controlSACD (Super Audio CD)DTS-CDDVD-ACD-R/RWDVD-R/RWCopy controlled CDs (Playbackcannot be guaranteed)DTS-CDs (Only enabled forplayback)

The Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audiofunction can record tracks frommusic CDs to the navigation system’shard disc. This function also allowsfor various playing methods, such asplaying recorded tracks on an artist-by-artist or genre-by-genre basis. Forexample, you can play the tracks thatyou want to listen to in any orderthat you like for each playlist.

Music data recorded on HDD canonly be used for personalenjoyment.

Data is recorded using ultra-efficient compression technology,therefore, sound quality may varyslightly from the original.

Title information will be displayedwhen the information is found inthe Gracenote Album Info(Gracenote Media Database) onthe built-in hard disk drive. Seepage .

If the HDD is ever replaced, all datawill be lost and stored music will notbe recovered.

Only recordings from a standardCD-DA (44.1 kHz, 16 bit stereoPCM digital sound data) to HDDare supported.

Digital music files, such as MP3,WMA, AAC etc., in CD-R, DVD-Rand USB flash memory devicescannot be copied to HDD.Likewise, digital music filesrecorded to HDD cannot be copiedto CD-R, DVD-R and USB devices.

351

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)F

eatures

321

NOTE:

12/07/20 11:10:45 31TK4640_326

Playlists are track lists in a certainplayback group.

This playlist is automaticallygenerated when the music CD isrecorded. The maximum numberof original playlists that can bestored to the HDD is 999, with 99songs on each playlist. Each albumname on the music CD is countedas a playlist.

Songs that have been recorded onthe HDD are categorized in groupsfor easy searching.

For more information of how tosearch a music, see page .

There are six categories:Album record date: Album titles arearranged by date of recording.Album: Album names are arrangedin alphabetical order.Artist: Artist names are arranged inalphabetical order.Genre: Songs are arranged by genre.Playlist: Any of six playlists that arearranged by the user.Track: Track titles are arranged inalphabetical order.

If you play a music CD that has notyet been recorded on the HDD, thesystem will automatically beginrecording to the HDD once the discis loaded. To turn this feature off,see page .

The HDD has six playlist folders foruser customizing. Each playlist canbe edited by the user, and will storeup to 999 songs. For moreinformation on how to edit the userplaylist, see page .

329

328

324


Playlists

Original Playlist

User Playlist

Track Search Methods Recording a Music CD to HDDAudio

322

12/07/20 11:10:57 31TK4640_327

The icons show the recordingconditions for each track:Rec icon: Now recordingRec ready icon: Next to be recordedRec done icon: Recording finished

Please note that there will be nocompensation offered in the caseof unsuccessful recording of audiodata or the loss of audio data dueto any cause whatsoever.

During recording, operation of thisproduct may be slower.

If you stop the engine or thepower system is turned off whilerecording a CD, there may bepauses between songs when youplay back from the HDD.

Tracks from music CDs arerecorded at four times theplayback speed. You can listen totracks as they are being recorded.

Forward/rewind, repeat, randomand scan functions are notavailable during recording.

You can listen to tracks from otherplaylists that have already beenrecorded while recording. Pressthe HDD/AUX button and switchover to HDD Audio.

With the factory settings, all of thesongs on a music CD areautomatically recorded.

Recording settings cannot bechanged during recording.

If the number of songs in theplaylist exceeds 999, the oldestsong will be overwritten each timeyou add a new song.


eatures

323

NOTE:REC DONE ICON

REC READY ICON

REC ICON

12/07/20 11:11:07 31TK4640_328

To change the setting to manualmode, push the interface selectordown on the HDD screen. Turn theinterface dial to select HDD Setupand press ENTER. Turn the interface dial to select

MANUAL and press ENTER on theinterface selector.

Push down the interface selector togo back to the audio screen.

In order to suspend recording, pushthe interface selector down, selectCancel CD Recording, and pressENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the dial to select CD Recordingand press ENTER on the interfaceselector.


To Cancel Recording a Music CDto HDD

Changing the Recording SettingsRecording a Track on a Music CDManually

324

HDD SETUP CD Recording ICON

12/07/20 11:11:16 31TK4640_329

To change the setting toautomatically record all of the trackson a music CD, move the interfaceselector down on the HDD Audioscreen. Turn the interface dial toselect HDD Setup, and press ENTERon the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial to selectAUTO, and press ENTER on theinterface selector.

To play tracks on HDD, push theHDD/AUX button until the HDDAudio screen appears. Playback willstart automatically with the trackpreviously selected.

Select a track to record from themusic CD, push the HDD/AUXbutton, then push the interfaceselector down to display the audiomenu. Turn the interface dial toselect Record CD, and then pressENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the dial to select CD Recordingand press ENTER on the interfaceselector.


To Record a Track Manually Recording All of the Tracks on aMusic CD Automatically

Playing Tracks on HDD

Features

325

Record CD ICON

12/07/20 11:11:24 31TK4640_330

＊

＋

－

＋

－

＊

To change a track or tracklist , presson the Category bar or the Skip bar.

To replay the current trackcontinuously, push the interfaceselector down during track playback.

Turn the interface dial to selectRepeat on the HDD AUDIO MENU,and press ENTER on the interfaceselector. Turn the interface dial toselect the repeat icon, then pressENTER on the interface selector.

To fast forward, press and hold theside of the SKIP bar. To

rewind, press and hold the sideof the SKIP bar.The tracklist has six search

mode categories: albums, artists,tracks, playlists, genres, andrecord date. Within the selectedcategory, the tracklist will bechanged with the category bar.

:

The next tracklist is selected.If you press during the lasttracklist, the first tracklist isselected.The previous tracklist is selected.If you press during the firsttracklist, the last tracklist isselected.

Category Bar

Skip BarReturns to the beginning of thesong that is being played. Presstwice to play, the previous track. Ifyou press this bar during the firstsong, the last song is selected.The next song is selected. If youpress this bar during the last song,the first song is selected.


Changing a Track/Tracklist Repeat Playback

Fast Forwarding and Rewinding

326

REPEAT ICON

REPEAT OFF ICON

12/07/20 11:11:34 31TK4640_331

To turn this feature off, turn theinterface dial to select the OFF icon,then press ENTER on the interfaceselector.

This function plays tracks in thecurrent search mode in randomorder. To activate random play, pushthe interface selector down duringtrack playback. Turn the interfacedial to select Random on the HDDAUDIO MENU. Press ENTER onthe interface selector.

Turn the interface dial to select thetrack random icon, and pressENTER on the interface selector.

To turn this feature off, turn theinterface dial to select the OFF icon,then press ENTER on the interfaceselector.


Random Playback

Features

327

RANDOM OFF ICON

RANDOM ICON

12/07/20 11:11:41 31TK4640_332

This function samples the tracks inthe current search mode in the orderthat they were recorded.

To activate scan, push the interfaceselector down during track playback.Turn the interface dial to select Scanon the HDD AUDIO MENU, andpress ENTER on the interfaceselector.

Turn the interface dial to select thescan icon. Press ENTER on theinterface selector. You will hear a 10-second sampling of each track in thecurrent search mode.

To turn this feature off, turn theinterface dial to select the OFF icon.Press ENTER on the interfaceselector to play the last tracksampled.

The HDD has two types of theplaylists: original playlist and userplaylist. On the original playlist, themusic CD is recorded automaticallywhen it is played. In addition, youcan create up to six user playlists onthe HDD. In each playlist, you canstore a desired music data from theoriginal playlists or music CDs.


Scan Playback Making a User Playlist

328

SCAN OFF ICON SCAN ICON

12/07/20 11:11:48 31TK4640_333

While a track is playing on anOriginal Playlist or User PlaylistPlayback screen, turn theinterface dial and select the trackthat you want to add to a UserPlaylist, then press ENTER on theinterface selector.

The track options box is displayed.Select Add to Playlist, then pressENTER on the interface selector.

After storing music data, you cancustomize the original and userplaylists (see page ).

On the Playlists screen, turn theinterface dial and select thePlaylist to which the song is to beadded, then press ENTER on theinterface selector. You will bereturned to the Playback screen.

While playing music in the HDDplayback screen, push the interfaceselector up to select MUSICSEARCH. You can search a track byalbums, artists, tracks, playlists,genres, or record date, or you canshuffle all tracks.

1.

2.

3.

337

CONTINUED


Adding a Track to a User Playlist Searching the Music

Features

329

12/07/20 11:11:57 31TK4640_334

Shuffles the playback of all tracksthat have been recorded on HDD.

To shuffle all tracks, push theinterface selector up to display the‘‘Search music by’’ screen, and thenpush the interface selector down.Shuffled playback begins.

Push the interface selector up todisplay the ‘‘Search music by’’ screen,and turn the interface dial to select‘‘Albums.’’ Press ENTER on theselector, and the album list will bedisplayed in alphabetical order.

If you push the interface selectorright or left, you can change thealphabet tag.

Turn the interface dial to select thealbum you want to listen to, thenpress ENTER on the selector.

The first track on the selected albumbegins to play.

If you push the interface selectordown to select ‘‘PLAY SELECTED,’’all available files on the selected itemare played. Press the AUDIO buttonto go back to the Playback screen.

SHUFFLE ALL TRACKS

Searching Music by Album


330

Push the selector down.

ALPHABET TAG

12/07/20 11:12:06 31TK4640_335

CONTINUED

Push the interface selector up todisplay the Search music by screen,and turn the interface dial to select‘‘Artists.’’ Press ENTER on theinterface selector, and the artist listwill be displayed in alphabeticalorder.

Turn the interface dial to select theartist you want to listen to, and pressENTER on the interface selector.


The first track on the selected artistbegins to play.

Push the interface selector up todisplay the Search music by screen,and turn the interface dial to select‘‘Tracks.’’ Press ENTER on theinterface selector, and the track listwill be displayed in alphabeticalorder.



Searching Music by Artist Searching Music by Track

Features

331

12/07/20 11:12:15 31TK4640_336

Turn the interface dial to select atrack you want to listen to, thenpress ENTER on the interfaceselector.


The selected track begins to play.

Push the interface selector up todisplay the Search music by screen,and turn the interface dial to select‘‘Playlists.’’ Press ENTER on theinterface selector then the playlistwill be displayed.

The first track on the selectedplaylist begins to play.

Turn the interface dial to select theplaylist you want to listen to, thenpress ENTER on the interfaceselector.


Searching Music by Playlists


332

12/07/20 11:12:22 31TK4640_337

CONTINUED

Push the interface selector up todisplay the Search music by screen,and turn the interface dial to select‘‘Genres.’’ Press ENTER on theinterface selector, and the genre listwill be displayed.

Turn the interface dial to select thegenre you want to listen to, and thenpress ENTER on the interfaceselector.

The first track on the selected genrebegins to play.


Push the interface selector up todisplay the Search music by screen,and turn the interface dial to selectRecord Date. Press ENTER on theinterface selector. The album list willbe displayed.

Turn the interface dial to select thealbum you want to listen to, thenpress ENTER on the selector.

Searching Music by Genre Searching Music by Record Date


eatures

333

RECORDED DATE

12/07/20 11:12:31 31TK4640_338

The first track on the selected albumbegins to play. The audio system, including the

music search feature Song ByVoice , can be operated by voicecontrol. See the navigation systemmanual for complete details.

You can set the Song By Voicefeature on or off. To change thesetting:

Push the interface selector downto select AUDIO MENU. Turn theinterface dial to select HDD Setupand press ENTER.

Turn the dial to select MusicSearch Setup and press ENTER.

1.

2.

Searching Music by Voice


334

TM

12/07/20 11:12:38 31TK4640_339

＜＞

Turn the interface dial to selectSong By Voice, then press ENTER.

Turn the interface dial to selectON or OFF, then press ENTER.Push down the interface selectorto go back to the audio screen.

Turn the interface dial to selectPhonetic Modification, then pressENTER.

Follow the steps 1 and 2 on pageto display Music Search Setup.

The phonetics can be modified on allartists, songs and albums on theHDD and iPod connected to the USBconnector cable.

To set a new phonetic, turn thedial to select NewModification , then pressENTER.

Turn the dial to select HDD oriPod, then press ENTER.

To edit a phonetic, turn the dial toselect an item on the list, thenpress ENTER.

1.

2.

3.

4.

3.

4.

5.

334

CONTINUED


Modifying the Phonetics

Features

335

12/07/20 11:12:47 31TK4640_340

Turn the dial to select an item onthe selected list.

Turn the dial to select an item tomodify: Artist, Album or Song,then press ENTER.

Play to listen to the phonetic tobe setEdit to modify the phoneticCancel

Select a letter by turning the dial,then press ENTER.

On the Enter a phonetic screen,enter a new phonetic.

Turn the dial to select a mode:

7.

6. 8. 9.


336

12/07/20 11:12:55 31TK4640_341

After storing the data, you canchange some items: order of trackson the user playlist, name of theplaylist, track title, artist name, andmusic genre. You can also add atrack to the playlist, and delete thetrack or the album from the playlist.

While playing back an OriginalPlaylist or User Playlist that youwant to add to a different UserPlaylist, push the interfaceselector down to display AUDIOMENU.

Turn the interface dial and selectEdit Album (or Edit Playlist if youwant to edit an User Playlist), andthen press ENTER on theinterface selector.

After entering the phonetic, pushthe interface selector down toselect OK.

You will see the PhoneticModification List. Push theinterface selector down to selectOK to set your setting.

1.2.

11.

10.

CONTINUED

Customizing Original/UserPlaylist

Adding an Original Playlist or UserPlaylist to a Different User Playlist


eatures

337

EDIT ALBUM

12/07/20 11:13:03 31TK4640_342

Turn the interface dial to selectthe playlist, then press ENTER.

Push the interface selector downto display the AUDIO MENU forthe playlist.

On the HDD audio screen, pushup the interface selector to selectMUSIC SEARCH. Select Playlistby turning the interface dial, thenpress ENTER.

On the Edit Album (or EditPlaylist) screen, turn the interfacedial and select Add to Playlist, andthen press ENTER on theinterface selector.

On the Playlist screen, turn theinterface dial and select a desiredUser Playlist, then press ENTERon the interface selector. You willbe returned to the Playbackscreen for the Original Playlist orUser Playlist.

1. 2.

3.

3.

4.

Changing the Order of Tracks withinthe User Playlist


338

12/07/20 11:13:11 31TK4640_343

Select a desired playlist to changethe user playlist name, or a desiredalbum to change the originalplaylist name (album name). Referto the Music Search function onpage for how to select aplaylist or an album. Push theinterface selector down to displaythe AUDIO MENU for a selectedplaylist or album.

Push the interface selector downto return to the Playback screen ofthe User Playlist.

Turn the interface dial to selectwhere the track is to be moved,then press ENTER on theinterface selector.

Turn the interface dial and selectEdit Playlist, then press ENTERon the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial to selectEdit Order, then press ENTER onthe interface selector.

Turn the interface dial to selectthe track to be moved, then pressENTER on the interface selector.

1.7.

8.

4.

5.

6.

329

CONTINUED

Changing the Name of the OriginalPlaylist or User Playlist


eatures

339

To change user playlist name

To change original playlist name

12/07/20 11:13:21 31TK4640_344

After inputting the name, push theinterface selector down to selectOK.

The confirmation screen isdisplayed. Confirm that the newname is correct, and then push theinterface selector down to selectOK. You will be returned to theEdit Album or Edit Playlist screenfor the Original Playlist or UserPlaylist.

Push the selector down to selectOK. The screen returns to theplaylist.

Select a letter by turning theinterface dial, then press ENTER.

On the Enter an album namescreen, input the new OriginalPlaylist name or User Playlistname.

Turn the interface dial and selectEdit Playlist (or Edit Album to editOriginal Playlist), then pressENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial to selectEdit Playlist Name (or Edit AlbumName to edit Original Playlist),then press ENTER on theinterface selector.

On the Edit Album Name screen,turn the interface dial to selectEdit Album, then press ENTER onthe interface selector.

5.

6.

7.

8.

2.

3.

4.


340

12/07/20 11:13:29 31TK4640_345

CONTINUED

The track options box is displayed.Select Edit Track Info, then pressENTER on the interface selector.

On the Edit Track screen, turn theinterface dial and select EditTrack Name, then press ENTERon the interface selector.

Select a desired playlist, then turnthe interface dial to select thetrack of which you want to changethe name, then press ENTER onthe interface selector. Refer to theMusic Search function on page

for how to select a playlist.

The OPTIONS icon will appear inthe selected track. Press ENTERon the interface selector.

1.

2. 3.

4.

329

Changing the Track Titles


eatures

341

OPTIONS ICON

12/07/20 11:13:37 31TK4640_346

Select a desired playlist to changethe user playlist artist name or adesired album to change theoriginal playlist artist name. Referto the Music Search function onpage for how to select aplaylist or an album. Push theinterface selector down to displayAUDIO MENU for a selectedplaylist or album.

Turn the interface dial and selectEdit Album (or Edit Playlist if youwant to edit User Playlist), thenpress ENTER on the interfaceselector.

Turn the interface dial to selectEdit Album Name (or Edit PlaylistName), then press ENTER on theinterface selector in Edit Album(or Edit Playlist) screen.

After selecting the track for whichyou want to change the track title,you can also push the interfaceselector down to display the AUDIOMENU, and then select Edit Track.The subsequent procedure is thesame as step 4.

On the Edit Track Name screen,turn the interface dial and selectEdit Track, then press ENTER onthe interface selector.

Input the new track name on theEnter a track name screen.

After inputting the name, push theselector down to select OK.

The confirmation screen isdisplayed. Confirm that the newtrack name is correct, and thenpush the interface selector downto select OK. You will be returnedto the Edit screen of the OriginalPlaylist or User Playlist.


1.

2.

3.

329

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.


Changing the Artist Name of theOriginal Playlist or User Playlist

342

NOTE:

12/07/20 11:13:45 31TK4640_347

CONTINUED


Confirm that the new name iscorrect, and then push theinterface selector down to selectOK. You will be returned to theEdit Album Name screen.

The confirmation screen isdisplayed. Choose if you wouldlike to apply the new name to boththe album artist and/or the trackartist. Select Yes or No by turningthe dial, then press ENTER.

On the Edit Album Name screen,turn the interface dial to selectEdit Artist, then press ENTER onthe interface selector.

On the Enter an artist namescreen, input the new artist name.

After inputting the name, push theinterface selector down to selectOK.

8.

9.

7.4.

5.

6.


eatures

343

12/07/20 11:13:53 31TK4640_348


Select a desired playlist to changethe artist name. Refer to theMusic Search function on page

for how to select a playlist.Rotate the interface dial to select atrack and press ENTER on theinterface selector.

The track options box is displayed.Select Edit Track Info, then pressENTER on the interface selector.

On the Edit Track screen, turn theinterface dial and select EditTrack Name, then press ENTERon the interface selector.

On the Edit Track Name screen,turn the interface dial and selectEdit Artist, then press ENTER onthe interface selector.

Input the new track name on theEnter an artist name screen.

After inputting the name, push theselector down to select OK. Youwill be returned to the Edit TrackName screen.

2.

1.

329

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.


Changing the Artist Name of theTrack

344

OPTIONS ICON

12/07/20 11:14:02 31TK4640_349

CONTINUED

After selecting the track for whichyou want to change the artist’s name,you can also push the interfaceselector down to display the AUDIOMENU, and then select Edit Track.The subsequent procedure is thesame as step 4.

Select a desired playlist to changethe user playlist music genre, or adesired album to change theoriginal playlist music genre. Referto the Music Search function onpage for how to select aplaylist or an album. Push theinterface selector down to displayAUDIO MENU for a selectedplaylist or album.



8.1.

329

2.


Changing the Musical Genre

Features

345

NOTE:

12/07/20 11:14:09 31TK4640_350

Turn the interface dial to selectEdit Album Name (or Edit PlaylistName), then press ENTER on theinterface selector in Edit Album(or Edit Playlist) screen.

On the Edit Album Name screen,turn the interface dial and selectEdit Genre, and then pressENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial to select agenre, and then press ENTER.You will be returned to the EditAlbum Name screen.


Select the track with the interfacedial from the playback screenwhile it is playing. Press ENTERon the interface selector.


The track options box is displayed.Select Delete and press ENTERon the interface selector.

3.

4.

5.

6.

2.

1.

3.


Deleting a Track

346

12/07/20 11:14:18 31TK4640_351

Even if all the tracks are deletedfrom the User Playlist, the datafolder for that playlist cannot bedeleted, and their names (playlistand artist) are left. You can storetracks again on that playlist.

When you delete a track from theOriginal Playlist, the track is alsodeleted from the User Playlist inwhich the deleted track wasstored.

On the HDD playback screen ofthe album in which you want todelete, push the interface selectordown to display the AUDIOMENU.


On the Edit Album (or EditPlaylist) screen, turn the interfacedial and select Delete Album (orDelete Playlist), then pressENTER on the interface selector.

Select OK to confirm you want todelete the track. You will bereturned to the Playback screenfor the Original Playlist or UserPlaylist.

4.

3.

1.

2.

CONTINUED


Deleting an Album or Playlist

Features

347

NOTE:

12/07/20 11:14:25 31TK4640_352

Push the interface selector downto display the AUDIO MENU.

Turn the interface dial and selectGet Album Info, then pressENTER on the interface selector.

On the ‘‘Select an Album’’ screen,turn the interface dial and selectthe title information for theOriginal Playlist, then pressENTER. You will be returned tothe ‘‘Audio Menu’’ screen.

When you delete the OriginalPlaylist, any tracks stored in aUser Playlist are also deleted.

Even if all the tracks are deletedfrom the User Playlist, the datafolder for that playlist cannot bedeleted, and their names (playlistand artist) are left. You can storetracks again on that playlist.

The Confirmation is displayed.Select OK and then press ENTER.You will be returned to theplayback screen for the OriginalPlaylist or User Playlist.

1.

2.

3.

4.


Acquiring Title Information

348

NOTE:

12/07/20 11:14:32 31TK4640_353

You can update the GracenoteAlbum Info (Gracenote MediaDatabase) that is included with thenavigation system.

Consult your dealer, or visit(in U.S.), or

(in Canada), to acquireupdated files.

Insert the update disc into the discslot, or connect the USB flashmemory device that includes theupdate.

You can check the HDD Audiocapacity and remaining space as wellas the Gracenote Music RecognitionService (CDDB) version includedwith the navigation system on theHDD Setup screen.

To check the HDD audio capacity,push the interface selector down todisplay the AUDIO MENU. Turn theinterface dial to select HDD Setup,then press ENTER.

1.

www.acura.comwww.acura.ca

CONTINUED

Updating Gracenote Album Info(Gracenote Media Database)

Checking HDD Audio Capacity


eatures

349

NOTE:

MAXIMUM CAPACITY

VERSION

REMAINING CAPACITY

12/07/20 11:14:40 31TK4640_354

Turn the interface dial and selectUpdate Gracenote Info, then pressENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the dial to select USB orDISC on the Update GracenoteAlbum info screen, then pressENTER on the selector.

Turn the dial to select Yes on theconfirmation screen, and theupdate will start.

Turn the interface dial to selectOK on the confirmation screen.

Push the interface selector downto select AUDIO MENU in theHDD playback screen or CDplayback screen.

Turn the interface dial to selectHDD Setup, then press ENTER onthe interface selector.

After updating is complete, pressENTER on the confirmationscreen.

Once you perform an update, anyinformation you edited before will beoverwritten.

Any music, data, calendar entries,etc. that have been stored on theHDD can be deleted.

Press the INFO button, rotate theinterface dial to select ‘‘Set up,’’and press ENTER.

Move the interface selector to theright to navigate to the ‘‘Set up(Other)’’ screen.

On the ‘‘Set up (Other)’’ screen,rotate the interface dial to select‘‘Clear Personal Data,’’ and pressENTER.

Select the item you wish to delete,then press ENTER.

A trash icon appears next to theselected item. Select ‘‘OK’’ tocontinue by pressing the interfaceselector down.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Clearing the HDD


350

NOTE:

12/07/20 11:14:53 31TK4640_355

Gracenote is an internet-based musicrecognition service that allows artist,album, and track information fromCDs to display on the HDD. Moreinformation about Gracenote, itsfeatures, and downloads areavailable at (in U.S.)or (in Canada).

Music recognition technology andrelated data are provided byGracenote . Gracenote is theindustry standard in musicrecognition technology and relatedcontent delivery. For moreinformation visit www.gracenote.com.

When music is recorded to the HDDfrom a CD, information such as therecording artist and track name areretrieved from the GracenoteDatabase and displayed (whenavailable). Gracenote may notcontain information for all albums.

A confirmation screen verifyingwhether the deletion is to becontinued or not will be displayed.Select Yes to delete, or No tocancel.

A second confirmation will appear.Select Yes to delete, or No tocancel.

When you are finished deletingthe data, press ENTER to showthe navigation screen.

If you select ‘‘Music on HDD,’’the system will automatically restartafter deletion.

6.

7.

8.

www.acura.comwww.acura.ca

CONTINUED

Gracenote Music RecognitionService (CDDB)


eatures

351

NOTE:

12/08/08 20:02:44 31TK4640_356

You agree not to assign, copy,transfer, or transmit the GracenoteSoftware or any Gracenote Data toany third party.

YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OREXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA,THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE,OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLYPERMITTED HEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusivelicense to use the Gracenote Data,the Gracenote Software, andGracenote Servers will terminate ifyou violate these restrictions. If yourlicense terminates, you agree tocease any and all use of theGracenote Data, the GracenoteSoftware, and Gracenote Servers.

CD and music-related data fromGracenote, Inc., copyright 2000 topresent Gracenote. GracenoteSoftware, copyright 2000 to presentGracenote. One or more patentsowned by Gracenote apply to thisproduct and service. See theGracenote website for a non-exhaustive list of applicableGracenote patents. Gracenote,CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS, theGracenote logo and logotype, andthe ‘‘Powered by Gracenote’’ logo areeither registered trademarks ortrademarks of Gracenote in theUnited States and/or other countries.

This application or device containssoftware from Gracenote, Inc. ofEmeryville, California (‘‘Gracenote’’).The software from Gracenote (the‘‘Gracenote Software’’) enables thisapplication to perform disc and/orfile identification and obtain music-related information, including name,artist, track, and title information(‘‘Gracenote Data’’) from onlineservers or embedded databases(collectively, ‘‘Gracenote Servers’’)and to perform other functions. Youmay use Gracenote Data only bymeans of the intended End-Userfunctions of this application or device.

You agree that you will useGracenote Data, the GracenoteSoftware, and Gracenote Servers foryour own personal non-commercialuse only.

Gracenote End User LicenseAgreement


352

12/08/08 20:02:50 31TK4640_357

Gracenote makes no representationsor warranties, express or implied,regarding the accuracy of anyGracenote Data from in theGracenote Servers. Gracenotereserves the right to delete datafrom the Gracenote Servers or tochange data categories for any causethat Gracenote deems sufficient. Nowarranty is made that the GracenoteSoftware or Gracenote Servers areerror-free or that functioning ofGracenote Software or GracenoteServers will be uninterrupted.

Gracenote is not obligated to provideyou with new enhanced or additionaldata types or categories thatGracenote may provide in the futureand is free to discontinue its servicesat any time.

Gracenote reserves all rights inGracenote Data, the GracenoteSoftware, and the Gracenote Servers,including all ownership rights. Underno circumstances will Gracenotebecome liable for any payment toyou for any information that youprovide. You agree that Gracenote,Inc. may enforce its rights under thisAgreement against you directly in itsown name.

The Gracenote service uses a uniqueidentifier to track queries forstatistical purposes. The purpose of arandomly assigned numericidentifier is to allow the Gracenoteservice to count queries withoutknowing anything about who you are.For more information, see the webpage for the Gracenote PrivacyPolicy for the Gracenote service.

The Gracenote Software and eachitem of Gracenote Data are licensedto you ‘‘AS IS.’’

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALLWARRANTIES EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOTLIMITED TO, IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY, FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTEDOES NOT WARRANT THERESULTS THAT WILL BEOBTAINED BY YOUR USE OFTHE GRACENOTE SOFTWAREOR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER.IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTEBE LIABLE FOR ANYCONSEQUENTIAL ORINCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FORANY LOST PROFITS OR LOSTREVENUES.

Gracenote 2011


eatures

353

12/07/20 11:15:12 31TK4640_358

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)

354

INTERFACE DIAL

AUDIO BUTTON

CANCEL BUTTON

SKIP BAR

HDD/AUX BUTTON

CENTER DISPLAY


NAVIGATION SCREEN

ALBUM ART

12/07/20 11:15:17 31TK4640_359

The audio system reads and playsplayable sound files on the iPod. Thesystem cannot operate an iPod as amass storage device. The system willonly play songs stored on the iPodwith iTunes.

iPod and iTunes are registeredtrademarks owned by Apple Inc.

This audio system can select andplay the audio files on the iPod withthe same controls used for the in-dash disc player. To play an iPod,connect it to the USB adapter cablein the console compartment by usingyour dock connector, then press theHDD/AUX button. The power modemust be ACCESSORY or ON. TheiPod will also be charged with thepower mode in these settings.


.

You can select the AUX mode byusing the voice control buttons.

iPod models confirmed to becompatible with your audio systemusing the USB adapter cable are:

The audio system, including themusic search feature Song ByVoice , can be operated by voicecontrol. See the navigation systemmanual for complete details.

This system may not work with allsoftware versions of these devices.

184

CONTINUED

ModeliPod (5th generation)iPod classic 80 GB/160 GBiPod classic 120 GBiPod classic 160 GB (launch in 2009)iPod nano (1st to 6th generation)iPod touch (1st to 4th generation)

To Play an iPod

Voice Control System

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)F

eatures

355

TM

12/07/20 11:15:25 31TK4640_360

Do not connect your iPod using ahub.

Do not keep the iPod and dockconnector cable in the vehicle.Direct sunlight and high heat willdamage it.

Do not use an extension cablebetween the USB adapter cableequipped with your vehicle andyour dock connector.

We recommend backing up yourdata before playing it.


Unclip the USB connector bypulling it up, and pull out the USBadapter cable in the consolecompartment.

Connect your dock connector tothe iPod correctly and securely.

Install the dock connector to theUSB adapter cable securely.

1. 2.

3.


Connecting an iPod

356

NOTE:

USB ADAPTER CABLE

USB CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTER CABLE

DOCK CONNECTOR

12/07/20 11:15:34 31TK4640_361

－

CONTINUED

If the iPod indicator does not appearin the audio display, check theconnections, and try to reconnect theiPod a few times.

If the audio system still does notrecognize the iPod, the iPod mayneed to be reset. Follow theinstructions that came with youriPod, or you can find resetinstructions online at

Use the SKIP bar while an iPod isplaying to select passages andchange files.

Each time you press andrelease the side of the SKIP bar,the system skips forward to thebeginning of the next track. Pressand release the side of the barto skip backward to the beginning ofthe current track. Press it again toskip to the beginning of the previoustrack.

To move rapidly within playing track,press and hold either side ( or

) of the SKIP bar.

You can also select a track from anycategory on the list: Playlists, Artists,Albums, Songs, Genres, Composersand Podcasts by using the interfacedial.

Push the interface selector up todisplay the Music Search screen.Turn the interface dial to select adesired search method.

The current file number and total ofthe selected playable files aredisplayed in the center display.Pressing the AUDIO button displaysthe artist, album and track (file)names on the navigation screen.

If a music file on your iPod hasalbum art, it will be shown in thedisplay.

You can set this album art displayfunction on and off (see page ).361

www.apple.com/


To Change or Select Files

SKIP

Features

357

12/07/20 11:15:43 31TK4640_362

Press ENTER on the interfaceselector to display the items on thatlist, then turn the interface dial tomake a selection. Press ENTER toset your selection.

If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on the artists list,the albums list is displayed.


Push the interface selector down toselect ‘‘PLAY SELECTED’’ on anylist. All available files on the selectedlist are played.

If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on the albumslist, all the tracks become availablefor selection.

The track order that appears at thistime varies depending on the iPodmodel and software.

Press the AUDIO button to go backto the normal audio playing display.Pressing the CANCEL button goesback to the previous screen, andpressing the MAP button cancels theaudio control display on the screen.


358

12/07/20 11:15:51 31TK4640_363

－－

CONTINUED

This featurecontinuously plays a file.

Turn the interface dial, selectRepeat, and press ENTER.

Turn the interface dial, select theRepeat icon and press ENTER.Playback of the track that iscurrently being played will berepeated.

To cancel this function, turn theinterface dial and select the RepeatOFF icon, and then press ENTER.

This feature shufflesplayback of tracks contained withinthe iPod. This function can beestablished at the same time thatRepeat Playback is set up.

Press the AUDIO button to displaythe audio control screen, thenpush the interface selector downto display the AUDIO MENU. On the iPod screen, push the

interface selector down to displaythe AUDIO MENU.

3.

1.

2.

1.


REPEAT SHUFFLE

Features

359

REPEAT

SHUFFLE ICON

12/07/20 11:16:00 31TK4640_364

－

Turn the interface dial, select theShuffle icon and press ENTER onthe interface selector.

Shuffle playback will begin. Tocancel this function, turn theinterface dial and select the ShuffleOFF icon, and then press ENTER onthe interface selector.

On the iPod screen, push theinterface selector down to displaythe AUDIO MENU.

Turn the interface dial, selectShuffle and press ENTER on theinterface selector.

Turn the interface dial, selectShuffle and press ENTER on theinterface selector.

Turn the interface dial, select theAlbum Shuffle icon and pressENTER on the interface selector.Shuffle playback of the album willbegin.

Shufflesplayback of all available albums,which are selected by the desiredlist: playlists, artists, albums, songs,genres, composers or podcasts. Thisfunction can be selected at the sametime that Repeat Playback is setup.

To cancel this function, turn theinterface dial and select the ShuffleOFF icon, and then press ENTER onthe interface selector.

Available operating functions vary onmodels or versions. Some functionsmay not be available on the vehicle’saudio system.

1.

2.

3.

2.

3.


ALBUM SHUFFLE

360

NOTE:

ALBUM SHUFFLE ICON

12/07/20 11:16:09 31TK4640_365

CONTINUED

Turn the interface dial to selectSong By Voice, then press ENTER.

Turn the interface dial to selectON or OFF, then press ENTER.Push down the interface selectorto go back to the audio screen.

To change this feature on or off:

Push the interface selector downto select AUDIO MENU.

You can search a song by the SongBy Voice feature. See the navigationsystem manual for complete details.

To change this feature on or off:

Turn the dial to select MusicSearch Setup and press ENTER.

Push the interface selector downto select AUDIO MENU.

Turn the dial to select Album Art,then press ENTER.

Turn the interface dial to selectON or OFF, then press ENTER.

3.

1.

2.

4.1.

2.

3.


Searching Music by VoiceSelecting Album Art

Features

361

ALBUM ART

12/07/20 11:16:20 31TK4640_366

＊

＊

If you see an error message in thecenter display, see page .

The displayed message mayvary on models or versions. Onsome models, there is nomessage to disconnect.

When you disconnect the iPod whileit is playing, the center display andthe audio screen (if selected) showUSB NO DATA.

If you reconnect the same iPod, thesystem may begin playing where itleft off, depending on what mode theiPod is in when it is reconnected.

To play the radio, press the AM/FM,or button. Press the DISCbutton to switch to the disc mode.Press the HDD/AUX button toswitch the audio mode betweenHDD Audio, USB andAudio.


To modify the phonetics:Select the Music Search Setupscreen as described previously.

Turn the interface dial to selectPhonetic Modification, then pressENTER.

Follow the steps 2 to 11 on pagesthrough .

You can disconnect the iPod at anytime when you see the ‘‘OK todisconnect’’ message in the iPoddisplay. Always make sure you seethe ‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message inthe iPod display before youdisconnect it. Make sure to followthe iPod’s instructions on how todisconnect the dock connector fromthe USB adapter cable.

:

2.

3.

1.

363

335 337

Bluetooth

iPod Error Messages

To Stop Playing Your iPod

Disconnecting an iPod

Modifying the Phonetics


362

When you connect your iPod to thenavigation system, the most recentsettings (Shuf f le, Repeat, etc.) will becarried over.

12/07/20 11:16:31 31TK4640_367

If you see an error message in thecenter display while playing an iPod,find the solution in the chart to theright. If you cannot clear the errormessage, take your vehicle to yourdealer.

SolutionError Message

Appears when an unsupported iPod is inserted.Appears when the iPod cannot be authenticated.Appears when there are no files in the iPod.

iPod Error Messages (Models with navigation system)F

eatures

363

UNSUPPORTED Ver.CONNECT RETRY

NO SONG

12/07/20 11:16:35 31TK4640_368

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)

364

SKIP BAR

CENTER DISPLAY

NAVIGATION SCREEN

HDD/ AUX BUTTON

CATEGORY BAR

AUDIO BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL



12/07/20 11:16:40 31TK4640_369

＊

＊

This audio system can select andplay the audio files on a USB flashmemory device with the samecontrols used for the disc player. Toplay a USB flash memory device,connect it to the USB adapter cablein the console compartment, thenpress the HDD/AUX button untilyou see ‘‘USB’’ in the display. Thepower mode must be ACCESSORYor ON.


.

Do not use a device such as a cardreader or hard drive as it or yourfiles may be damaged.

Do not connect your USB flashmemory device using a hub.

Do not use an extension cable tothe USB adapter cable equippedwith your vehicle.

Do not keep a USB flash memorydevice in the vehicle. Directsunlight and high heat will damageit.

We recommend backing up yourdata before playing a USB flashmemory device.

The audio system reads and playsthe audio files on the USB flashmemory device in MP3, WMA orAAC formats.

Depending on the type andnumber of files, it may take sometime before they begin to play.

Only AAC format files recordedwith iTunes are playable on thisaudio unit.

The recommended USB flashmemory devices are 256 MB orhigher, and formatted with the FATfile system. Some digital audioplayers may be compatible as well.

Some USB flash memory devices(such as devices with security lock-out features, etc.) will not work inthis audio unit.

:

184

CONTINUED

To Play a USB Flash MemoryDevice

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)F

eatures

365

NOTE:

12/07/20 11:16:50 31TK4640_370

Some versions of MP3, WMA, orAAC format may not be supported. Ifan unsupported file is found, theaudio unit displays UNSUPPORTED,then skips to the next file.

In WMA or AAC format, DRM(digital rights management) filescannot be played. If the system findsa DRM file, the audio unit displaysUNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skipsto the next file.

Depending on the software thefiles were made with, it may not bepossible to play some files, ordisplay some text data.

Depending on the type ofencoding and writing softwareused, there may be cases wherecharacter information does notdisplay properly.


The order of files in USB playbackmay be different from the order offiles displayed in PC or otherdevices etc. Files are played in theorder stored in USB flash memorydevice.

You can select the AUX mode byusing the voice control buttons, butcannot operate the play modefunctions.



366

Combining a low sampling f requencywith a low bitrate may result inextremely degraded sound quality.

12/07/20 11:16:56 31TK4640_371

Unclip the USB connector bypulling it up, and pull out the USBadapter cable in the consolecompartment.

Connect the USB flash memorydevice to the USB adapter cablecorrectly and securely.

When the USB device is connectedand the USB mode is selected on theaudio system, the USB indicator isshown in the center display. It alsoshows the folder and file numbers.Pressing the AUDIO button displaysthe USB indicator, the folder and filenames, and the elapsed time in thenavigation screen.

1. 2.

CONTINUED

Connecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice


eatures

367

USB ADAPTER CABLE

USB CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTER CABLE

12/07/20 11:17:02 31TK4640_372

－

－

＋－

You can also select a folder or filefrom the list by using the interfacedial. Press the AUDIO button toshow the audio display on thenavigation screen. Use the interfacedial to highlight the file, then pressENTER to set your selection.

Use the SKIP bar while a USB flashmemory device is playing to selectpassages and change files.

Each time you press andrelease the side of the SKIP bar,the system skips forward to thebeginning of the next file. Press andrelease the side of the bar, toskip backward to the beginning ofthe current file. Press it twice to skipto the beginning of the previous file.


To select adifferent folder, press and releaseeither side of the CATEGORY bar.Press the side to skip to the nextfolder, and press the side to skipto the beginning of the previousfolder.

To Select a File from Folder and FileLists

To Change or Select Files

SKIP

Folder Selection


368

12/07/20 11:17:09 31TK4640_373

Push the selector up to display the‘‘Select a folder’’ screen. Then turnthe interface dial to select a folder,and press ENTER.

If you have more than one layer offolders (folders within folders), youcan also see each folder on thescreen.

Push the interface selector down todisplay the AUDIO MENU.

You can select any type of repeat,random or scan mode on the audiomenu screen.

Move the interface selector up toselect BACK to show the USBscreen, or press the CANCEL buttonto return to the previous screen.

To go back to the normal playingdisplay, press the AUDIO button.Pressing the CANCEL button goesback to the previous screen andpressing the MAP button cancels theaudio mode display.

CONTINUED


To Select Repeat, Random or ScanMode:

Features

369

12/07/20 11:17:15 31TK4640_374

This function replays all the tracks ina folder in the order that they werestored.

On the USB main screen, push theinterface selector down to displaythe AUDIO MENU.

Turn the interface dial to selectRepeat and press ENTER.

Turn the interface knob, select theTrack Repeat icon and pressENTER on the interface selector.Playback of the track that iscurrently being played will berepeated.

To cancel this function, turn theinterface dial and select the RepeatOFF icon, and then press ENTER.

Pressing either side of the SKIP baralso cancels this function.

This function repeats playback of thetrack.


Turn the interface dial to selectRepeat and press ENTER.

3.

1.

2.

1.

2.

FOLDER REPEATTRACK REPEAT


370

FOLDER REPEAT ICON

REPEAT OFF ICON

TRACK REPEAT ICON

12/07/20 11:17:26 31TK4640_375

Turn the interface dial, select theTrack Random icon and pressENTER on the interface selector.The tracks are played in randomorder.

To cancel this function, turn theinterface dial and select the RandomOFF icon, and then press ENTER onthe interface selector.

This function plays all the tracks onthe USB flash memory device inrandom order.


Turn the interface dial, selectRandom and press ENTER on theinterface selector.

Turn the interface dial, select theFolder Repeat icon and pressENTER on the interface selector.Playback of the folder that iscurrently being played will berepeated.

To cancel this function, turn theinterface dial and select the RepeatOFF icon, and then press ENTER onthe interface selector.

1.

2.

3.3.

CONTINUED

TRACK RANDOM


eatures

371

TRACK RANDOM ICON

RANDOM OFF ICON

12/07/20 11:17:35 31TK4640_376

This function samples all the tracksin the current folder in the order thatthey were recorded.


Turn the interface dial, select theScan icon and press ENTER onthe interface selector.

Turn the interface dial, select theFolder Random icon and pressENTER on the interface selector.The files are played in randomorder.

To cancel this function, turn theinterface dial and select the RandomOFF icon, and then press ENTER onthe interface selector.

This function plays all of the tracksin the current folder in random order.


Turn the interface dial, selectRandom and press ENTER on theinterface selector.

3.

1.

2.

1.

2.

TRACK SCANFOLDER RANDOM


372

TRACK SCAN ICON

SCAN OFF ICON

FOLDER RANDOM ICON

12/07/20 11:17:46 31TK4640_377

Turn the interface dial, selectFolder Scan icon and pressENTER on the interface selector.

The first file of the first folder issampled for 10 seconds. If no otheroperations are carried out, the firstfiles of the remaining folders areplayed for 10 seconds. After the firstfile of the last folder is played back,regular playback is resumed.

To cancel this function, turn theinterface dial and select the ScanOFF icon, and then press ENTER onthe interface selector.

This function samples the first file ineach folder within the USB flashmemory device.


Turn the interface dial, select theScan icon and press ENTER onthe interface selector.

You can also select the scan featurewith the SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar on the control panel.Press and release the SCAN side ofthe bar. Press and hold the SCANside of the bar to get out of the scanmode and play the last file sampled.

Turn the interface dial, selectTrack Scan icon and press ENTERon the interface selector. Eachtrack or file is sampled for 10seconds. When all the tracks inthe folder have been scanned,regular playback is resumed.

To cancel this function, turn theinterface dial and select the ScanOFF icon, and then press ENTER onthe interface selector to play the lasttrack sampled.

1.

2.

3.3. FOLDER SCAN


eatures

373

FOLDER SCAN ICON

12/07/20 11:17:56 31TK4640_378

If you see an error message in thecenter display, see page .

You can disconnect the USB flashmemory device at any time even ifthe USB mode is selected on theaudio system. Always follow the USBflash memory device’s instructionswhen you remove it.

When you disconnect the USB flashmemory device while it is playing,the center display and the audioscreen (if selected) show NO DATA.

To play the radio, press the AM/FM,or button. Press the DISCbutton to switch to the disc mode.Press the HDD/AUX button toswitch the audio mode betweenHDD Audio, USB andAudio.


If you reconnect the same USB flashmemory device, the system willbegin playing where it left off.

375

Bluetooth

USB Flash Memory Device ErrorMessages

To Stop Playing a USB FlashMemory Device


Disconnecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice

374

12/07/20 11:18:04 31TK4640_379

If you see an error message in thecenter display while playing a USBflash memory device, find thesolution in the chart to the right. Ifyou cannot clear the error message,take your vehicle to your dealer.

Error Message Solution

The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the USB flashmemory device. There is a possibility that the files have beendamaged.Appears when an unsupported USB flash memory device is inserted.Appears when the file is copyright protected, such as DRM.Appears when there are no playable files in the USB flash memorydevice.

USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models with navigation system)F

eatures

375

FILE ERROR

UNSUPPORTEDUNPLAYABLE FILE

NO SONG

12/07/20 11:18:07 31TK4640_380

Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)

376

INTERFACE DIAL

AUDIO BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON

SKIP BAR

HDD/AUX BUTTON

CENTER DISPLAY

NAVIGATION SCREEN

12/07/20 11:18:12 31TK4640_381

＊

＊

Make sure that your phone is pairedand linked to HFL.

Your vehicle is equipped with aAudio system, which

allows you to listen to streamingaudio from your Audiocompatible phone. This function isonly available on phones that arepaired and linked to the vehicle’s

HandsFreeLink (HFL)system (see page ).


.

To begin to play the audio files, youmay need to operate your phone. Ifso, follow the phone maker’soperating instructions.

Press the HDD/AUX button withthe power mode ACCESSORY orON. When the phone is recognized,you will see the Audio

message and icon on the centerdisplay and the audio control displayon the navigation screen (if selected),and the system begins to play.

If an iPod or USB flash memorydevice or audio unit connectedto the auxiliary input jack wasselected at the last mode, youwill see iPod, USB or AUX in thecenter display and the audiocontrol display on the navigationscreen (if selected). Push theHDD/AUX button again to playaudio files from yourAudio phone.

In some states, provinces,and territories, it may be illegal toperform some data device functionswhile driving.

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phoneswith streaming audio capabilities arecompatible with the system. You canfind an approved phone by visiting

, or bycalling the HandsFreeLinkconsumer support at 1-888-528-7876.In Canada, visit ,or call (888) 528-7876.

:

432184

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

Bluetooth



CONTINUED

To Play Audio FilesBluetooth

Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)F

eatures

377

NOTE:

12/07/20 11:18:21 31TK4640_382

Once a device is linked, the name ofthe device will appear on the screen.Pressing the TITLE button switchesthe center display between the

Audio and the devicename.

If more than one phone is paired tothe HFL system, there will be adelay before the system begins toplay.

In the following conditions, thedisplay shows ‘‘NO CONNECT’’message after pressing the TITLEbutton.

The phone is not linked to HFL.

The phone is not turned on.

The phone is not in the vehicle.

Another HFL compatible phone,which is not compatible for

Audio, is alreadyconnected.

You can select the AUX mode byusing the voice control buttons, butcannot operate the play modefunctions.

Press the side of the SKIP barto skip forward to the next file, andpress the side to skip backwardto the beginning of the current file.Push the side again to skip tothe previous file.

If your Audio compatiblephone does not operate as described,make sure it is an Acura approvedphone. To find out if your phone isapproved, go to

(in Canada,), or call the

HandsFreeLink consumer supportat 1-888-528-7876.

The skip function may not beavailable on some phone devices.

A device name may not bedisplayed on some phone devices.

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

www.acura.com/handsfreelink www.handsfreelink.ca


To skip a file


378

NOTE:

NOTE:

12/07/20 11:18:29 31TK4640_383

The resume/pause mode can stopplaying a file temporarily.

Turn the interface dial to switch thesetting between the resume/pausemode and the sound setup mode.Select Resume/Pause, then pressENTER to set your selection. Eachtime you press ENTER, the systemswitches between the resume modeand pause mode.

The pause function may notbe available on some phone devices.

Press the AUDIO button to displaythe audio control display. Turn thedial to switch the setting betweenthe resume/pause mode and thesound setup mode. Select SoundSetup, then press ENTER to set yourselection.

CONTINUED

To pause or resume a file To change sound settings

Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)F

eatures

379

NOTE:

12/07/20 11:18:36 31TK4640_384

Turn the dial to select a sound setupmode, then press ENTER to set yourselection. See page for moresound setting information.

Switching to another mode pausesthe music playing from your phone.

If you receive a call when theAudio is playing, press the

PICK-UP button on the steeringwheel. The screen and the centerdisplay switch to the HFL mode (seepage ).

After ending the call, press theHANG-UP button to go back to the

Audio mode.

Select any other audio mode bypressing a button; AM/FM, ,DISC, or HDD/AUX on the audiocontrol panel, or press the MODEbutton on the steering wheel toselect another audio mode.


427

296 628

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

To turn off the Bluetooth Audiomode

To switch to HFL mode


380

12/07/20 11:18:43 31TK4640_385

Play only standard, round, 5-inch(12 cm) discs. Smaller or odd-shaped discs may jam in the driveor cause other problems.

Handle your discs properly toprevent damage and skipping.

When recording a CD-R, CD-RW,DVD-R or DVD-RW the recordingmust be closed for it to be used bythe disc player.

When using DVD-R/RW discs,they should meet DVD verificationstandards.

When using CD-R, CD-RW,DVD-R or DVD-RW discs, useonly high quality discs labeled foraudio use.

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,use only high quality discs labeledfor audio use.

When recording a CD-R orCD-RW, the recording must beclosed for it to be used by the discchanger.

On models with navigation systemOn models without navigation system

All modelsGeneral Information

Protecting Your DiscsF

eatures

381


12/07/20 11:18:50 31TK4640_386

When a disc is not being played,store it in its case to protect it fromdust and other contamination. Toprevent warpage, keep discs out ofdirect sunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.

A new disc may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on therecording surface of the disc,causing skipping or other problems.Remove these pieces by rubbing theinner and outer edges with the sideof a pencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe disc changer.

Handle a disc by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the disc.These, along with contaminationfrom finger prints, liquids, and felt-tip pens, can cause the disc to notplay properly, or possibly jam in thedrive.

The in-dash disc player has asophisticated and delicatemechanism. If you insert a damageddisc as indicated in this section, itmay become stuck inside anddamage the audio unit.

Examples of these discs are shownas follows.

Protecting Discs Additional Information onRecommended Discs

Protecting Your Discs

382

12/07/20 11:18:58 31TK4640_387

Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick discs

Damaged discs Poor quality discs

Small, irregular shaped discs1.

2. 3.

4.

CONTINUED

Protecting Your DiscsF

eatures

383

Sealed

Warped BurrsChipped/Cracked

Bubbled/Wrinkled

With Label/Sticker

Using PrinterLabel Kit

With PlasticRing

3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape

Can Shape Arrow Shape

12/07/20 11:19:10 31TK4640_388

Discs with scratches, dirty discs

CD-R or CD-RW may not play dueto the recording conditions.

Scratches and fingerprints on thediscs may cause the sound to skip.

CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R orDVD-RW may not play due to therecording conditions.

Recommended discs are printedwith the following logo.

Audio unit may not play thefollowing formats.

This audio unit cannot play a Dual-disc .

5.



Protecting Your Discs

384

Fingerprints, scratches, etc.

12/07/20 11:19:20 31TK4640_389

Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

Your vehicle’s radio can receive thecomplete AM and FM bands.

How well your vehicle’s radioreceives stations is dependent onmany factors, such as the distancefrom the station’s transmitter,nearby large objects, andatmospheric conditions.

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least 10 kHzapart (530, 540, 550). Stations on theFM band are assigned frequencies atleast 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

CONTINUED

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

AM/FM Radio ReceptionF

eatures

385

12/07/20 11:19:29 31TK4640_390

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources(such as garages or parkingstructures) can cause temporaryreception problems.


628

AM/FM Radio Reception

386

12/07/20 11:19:35 31TK4640_391

▲ ▼

＋

－

＋－

＋－

＋

－

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The VOL button adjusts the volumeup ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button, hold it untilthe desired volume is reached, thenrelease it.

The MODE button changes themode. Pressing the buttonrepeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,XM1, XM2, disc (if a disc is loaded),HDD (on models with navigationsystem), Audio (if paired),AUX (if an appropriate audio unit isconnected).

If an iPod or a USB flash memorydevice is plugged into the system,you can also select AUX.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press the top ( ) ofthe button, the system goes to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previouspreset station. If you press and holdthe CH button ( ) or ( ), thesystem goes into the skip (seek)mode. It stops when it finds a stationwith a strong signal.

If you are playing a disc, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack/file (file in MP3, WMA, orAAC format) each time you pressthe top ( ) of the CH button. Pressthe bottom ( ) to return to thebeginning of the current track/file.Press it twice to return to theprevious track/file.

In MP3, WMA or AAC mode, youcan use the seek function to selectfolders. Press and hold the top ( )of the CH button until you hear abeep to skip forward to the first fileof the next folder. Press the bottom( ) to skip backward to the previousfolder.

Bluetooth

CONTINUED

Remote Audio ControlsF

eatures

387

MODE BUTTON

VOL BUTTON CH BUTTON

12/07/20 11:19:43 31TK4640_392

＋

－

＋

－

When playing a USB flash memorydevice, you can also use the seekfunction to skip the folder. Toactivate this, press and hold eitherside of the CH button until you heara beep.

If you are playing a conventional CD(without the text data and notcompressed in MP3 or WMA), youcan use the skip function to selectdiscs. Press and hold the top ( ) ofthe CH button until you hear a beep,to skip forward to the next disc.Press and hold the bottom ( ) toskip backward to the previous disc.

If you are playing a USB flashmemory device or iPod with the USBadapter cable, press and release thetop ( ) of the CH button to skipforward to the beginning of the nextfile. Press the bottom ( ) to skipbackward to the beginning of thecurrent file. Press it twice to returnto the previous file.


Remote Audio Controls

388

12/07/20 11:19:47 31TK4640_393

The auxiliary input jack is inside theconsole compartment. The systemwill accept auxiliary input fromstandard audio accessories using a1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo miniplug.

When you plug in a mini-jack cablebetween a compatible audio unit andthe jack, you will see AUX in thedisplay and the system automaticallyswitches to AUX mode.

When a compatible audio unit isconnected to the jack, press theHDD/AUX button (AUX button onmodels without navigation system)to select it.

Auxiliary Input JackF

eatures

389

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK

12/07/20 11:19:52 31TK4640_394

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, the audiosystem disables itself. If this happens,you will see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in thefrequency display next time you turnon the system. Use the presetbuttons to enter the five-digit code.The code is on the Anti-theftIdentification Card included in yourowner’s manual kit. When it isentered correctly, the radio will startplaying.

The Anti-theft Identification Cardalso lists your audio serial number. Itis best to store the card in a safeplace at home. In addition, youshould write the audio system’sserial number in this owner’s manual.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have ten tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in ten attempts, you

must then leave the system on forone hour before trying again.

The system will retain your AM andFM presets even if power isdisconnected.

If you have an Acura Ownersaccount, it is easy to retrieve the anti-theft code online without having toaccess the serial number.

We recommend that you register thesecurity code at Acura Owners(myacura.com). If you lose the Anti-theft Identification Card beforeregistering the code at AcuraOwners, you must obtain the codefrom your dealer or

. To do this, youwill need the audio system’s serialnumber. If you do not have the serialnumber with you, ask your dealer orgo to

for information on how to retrieve it.

If you lose the Anti-theftIdentification Card, you must obtainthe code from your dealer. To do this,you will need the audio system’sserial number. If you do not have theserial number with you, ask yourdealer how to retrieve it.

You need to enter a separate codefor the navigation system toreactivate. The Anti-theft Card alsolists the navigation system’s securitycode and serial number. Follow thesame procedure to retrieve the serialnumber and obtain the code, andread the navigation system manualfor details.https://radio-

navicode.acura.com/

https://radio-navicode.acura.com/

Canadian owners

Models with navigation system

U.S. owners

Radio Theft Protection

390

NOTE:

13/04/02 19:11:38 31TK4640_395

To set the time, press the CLOCKbutton until you hear a beep. Thedisplayed time begins to blink.

Change the hours by pressing the H(hour) button until the numbersadvance to the desired time. Changethe minutes by pressing the M(minute) button until the numbersadvance to the desired time.

Press the CLOCK button again toenter the set time.

CONTINUED


Setting the ClockF

eatures

391


MINUTE BUTTON(PRESET 5)

RESET BUTTON(PRESET 6)

CLOCK BUTTON

HOUR BUTTON(PRESET 4)

12/07/20 11:20:06 31TK4640_396

Turn the selector knob to select‘‘CLOCK ADJUST.’’

Press the selector knob (ENTER)to enter your selection. Thedisplay changes to the clockadjusting display.

You can also adjust the clock andswitch the clock display between24-hours and 12-hours in the menumode.

To adjust the clock setting:

Press and release the SETUPbutton. The display shows you themenu items.

You can adjust the clock settingwith the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position.

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, press and holdthe CLOCK button, then press the R(reset) button to set the time back tothe previous hour. If the displayedtime is after the half hour, the sameprocedure sets the time forward tothe beginning of the next hour.

For example:

The navigation system receivessignals from the global positioningsystem (GPS), and the displayedtime is updated automatically by theGPS. Refer to the navigation systemmanual for how to adjust the time.

1:06 would RESET to 1:00.1:52 would RESET to 2:00.

1.

2.

3.



Setting the Clock

Adjusting the Clock with SETUPButton

392

12/07/20 11:20:16 31TK4640_397

△

CONTINUED

Turn the selector knob to selectthe item which you want to adjust.Turning the selector knob willchange the selected item betweenthe clock display setting, hours,minutes, and SET. The selecteditem is indicated with in thedisplay.

Press the selector knob (ENTER)to enter your selection. Thedisplay will return to the clockadjusting display.

Turn the selector knob to changethe setting between 12H and 24H.

Turn the selector knob to countthe numbers up or down.

To set the time, turn the selectorknob and select the hours or theminutes, then press the knob toenter your selection. The displaychanges to the setting display.

5.

6.

7.

8.

4.

Setting the ClockF

eatures

393

MINUTE SETTING

12/07/20 11:20:26 31TK4640_398

Press either the RETURN orSETUP button to go back to thenormal display.

To enter the clock setting, turnthe selector knob to select ‘‘SET,’’then press the knob. The displaywill return to the menu itemdisplay.

Press the selector knob (ENTER)to enter your selection. Thedisplay will return to the clockadjusting display.

While setting the clock, pressingthe RETURN button will go backto the previous display.Pressing the SETUP button againwill cancel this setting mode.

11.

10.

9.

Setting the Clock

394

12/07/20 11:20:31 31TK4640_399

＊

CONTINUED

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights and taillights flashes ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle or remove the audio unit.This alarm continues for twominutes, then the system resets. Todeactivate the system before the twominutes have elapsed, unlock thedriver’s door with the key or use theremote transmitter/keyless accessremote.

You can also deactivate the systemby grabbing either front door handlewhile carrying the keyless accessremote to unlock the door.

The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, hood, and trunk. For thesystem to activate, you must lock thedoors from the outside with the key,

or use driver’s lock tab, master doorlock switch, or remote transmitter(keyless access remote on modelswith keyless access system). Thesecurity system indicator on theinstrument panel starts blinkingimmediately to show you the systemis setting itself.

Once the security system sets,opening any door, the trunk, or hoodwithout using the key or the remotetransmitter/keyless access remote,will cause the alarm to activate. Italso activates if the ignition switchis turned to the ON (II) position, theaudio unit is removed from thedashboard, or the wiring is cut.

You can also set the security systemby pressing the lock button on eitherfront door handle while carrying thekeyless access remote.



Security SystemF

eatures

395


A/T model is shown.

12/07/20 11:20:37 31TK4640_400

＊

With the system set, you can stillopen the trunk with the remotetransmitter/keyless access remotewithout triggering the alarm. Thealarm will sound if the trunk isopened with the trunk release buttonon the driver’s door, the trunkrelease handle behind the trunkpass-through cover, or theemergency trunk opener.

The security system does not set ifany door, the trunk, or hood is notfully closed. Before you leave thevehicle, make sure the doors, trunkand hood are securely closed.

To see if the system sets after youexit the vehicle, press the LOCKbutton on the remote transmitter/keyless access remote within fiveseconds. If the system is set, thehorn will beep once.


and .

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

:

184 187

Security System

396

12/07/20 11:20:42 31TK4640_401

Compass operation can be affectedby driving near power lines orstations, across bridges, throughtunnels, over railroad crossings, pastlarge vehicles, or driving near largeobjects that can cause a magneticdisturbance. It can also be affectedby accessories such as antennas androof racks that are mounted bymagnets.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the compass isself-calibrating, then the compassdisplay is shown in the display.

The compass may need to bemanually calibrated after exposure toa strong magnetic field. If thecompass seems to be continuallyshowing the wrong direction and isnot self-calibrating, or the compassdisplay is blinking with the CALindicator on, do the followingprocedure.

Do this procedure in an openarea, away from buildings, powerlines, and other vehicles.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Press and hold the SETUP buttonfor about 5 seconds. The displayshows you the compass settingmenu items.

1.

2.


CONTINUED

Compass OperationCompass Calibration

CompassF

eatures

397

NOTE:


COMPASS COMPASS SETTING MENU ITEMS

12/07/20 11:20:52 31TK4640_402

Turn the selector knob to select‘‘CALIBRATION.’’

Press the selector knob (ENTER)to enter your selection. Thedisplay shows you ‘‘PUSH CALSTART.’’

While setting the compass, pressthe RETURN button to go back tothe previous display. Pressing theSETUP button will cancel thecompass setting mode.

When the calibration is successfullycompleted, the CAL indicator goesoff and the compass display will stopblinking and show an actual heading.

The audio system is not related tothe compass system. Even if thecompass system is calibrating, thedisplay returns to the normal displaywhich you last selected.

Press the selector knob (ENTER).The compass display is blinkingand the CAL indicator is shown.

Drive the vehicle slowly in twocomplete circles.

3. 4.

5.

6.

Compass

398

12/07/20 11:21:00 31TK4640_403

Once the correct zone is displayed,press the selector knob. Thedisplay then returns to normal.

Find the zone for your area on themap (see page ). If the correctzone is not shown, turn theselector knob to cycle the zonelists up or down.

In most areas, there is a variationbetween magnetic north and truenorth. Zone selection is required sothe compass can compensate for thisvariation. To check and select thezone, do this:

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

If necessary, press the RETURNbutton to return to the previousdisplay. Pressing the SETUPbutton will cancel the compasssetting mode.

Press and hold the SETUP buttonfor about 5 seconds. The displayshows you the compass settingmenu items.

Turn the selector knob to select‘‘ZONE.’’ Press the selector knob(ENTER) to enter your selection.The display shows you thecurrently selected zone number.

4. 5.

2.

3.

1.

400

CONTINUED

Compass Zone Selection

CompassF

eatures

399

ZONE NUMBER

12/07/20 11:21:09 31TK4640_404

The audio system is not related tothe compass system. Even if thecompass system is in the zonesetting mode, the display returns tothe normal display which you lastselected.

Compass

400

Zone Map

13/04/02 19:13:46 31TK4640_405

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Push in the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel. The CRUISEMAIN indicator on the instrumentpanel will come on.

Press and release the SET/DECEL button on the steeringwheel. The CRUISE CONTROLindicator on the instrument panelcomes on to show the system isnow activated.

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your vehicle speedincreases going down a hill, use thebrakes to slow down. This will cancelthe cruise control. To resume the setspeed, press the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatoron the instrument panel will comeback on.

The cruise control system can beleft on, even when it is not in use.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Using the Cruise Control

Cruise ControlF

eatures

401

RES/ACCELBUTTON

SET/DECELBUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON

CANCEL BUTTON

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

12/07/20 11:21:21 31TK4640_406

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

To increase the speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, your vehicle speeds up about1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Push on the accelerator pedal.Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed, then press the SET/DECEL button.

Even with cruise control turned on,you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/DECELbutton. Each time you do this,your vehicle will slow down about1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Press and hold the SET/DECELbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

If you need to decrease yourspeed quickly, use the brakes as younormally would.

Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator onthe instrument panel will go out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the SET/DECEL button.

Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal causes the cruisecontrol to cancel.

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise Control

402

NOTE:

12/07/20 11:21:29 31TK4640_407

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel.

Pressing the CRUISE button turnsthe system completely off and erasesthe previous cruising speed.

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, thesystem will remember the previouslyset cruising speed. To return to thatspeed, accelerate to above 25 mph(40 km/h), and then press andrelease the RES/ACCEL button. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator comeson. The vehicle will accelerate to thesame cruising speed as before.

Resuming the Set SpeedCanceling Cruise Control

Cruise ControlF

eatures

403

CANCEL BUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON

12/07/20 11:21:35 31TK4640_408

×

－

－

The HomeLink UniversalTransceiver built into your vehiclecan be programmed to operate up tothree remote controlled devicesaround your home, such as garagedoors, lighting, or home securitysystems.

Before programming yourHomeLink to operate a garage dooropener, confirm that the opener hasan external entrapment protectionsystem, such as an ‘‘electronic eye,’’or other safety and reverse stopfeatures.

If your garage door wasmanufactured before April 1, 1982,you may not be able to programHomeLink to operate it. These unitsdo not have safety features thatcause the motor to stop and reverseit if an obstacle is detected duringclosing, increasing the risk of injury.Do not use HomeLink with any

garage door opener that lacks safetystop and reverse features.

Units manufactured between April 1,1982 and January 1, 1993 may beequipped with safety stop andreverse features. If your unit doesnot have an external entrapmentprotection system, an easy test toconfirm the function andperformance of the safety stop andreverse feature is to lay a 2 4under the closing door. The doorshould stop and reverse uponcontacting the piece of wood.As an additional safety feature,garage door openers manufacturedafter January 1, 1993 are required tohave external entrapment protectionsystems, such as an electronic eye,which detect an object obstructingthe door.

Refer to the safety information thatcame with your garage door opener

to test that the safety features arefunctioning properly. If you do nothave this information, contact themanufacturer of the equipment.Before programming HomeLink to agarage door or gate opener, makesure that people and objects are outof the way of the device to preventpotential injury or damage.When programming a garage dooropener, park just outside the garage.

If you justreceived your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button. To do this,press and hold the two outsidebuttons on the HomeLinktransceiver for about 10 20 seconds,until the red indicator flashes.Release the buttons, then proceed tostep 1.

General Safety Information


Training HomeLink

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Before you begin

404

12/07/20 11:21:44 31TK4640_409

If you are training the second or third buttons, go directly to step 1.

CONTINUED

HomeLink Universal TransceiverF

eatures

405

12/07/20 11:21:57 31TK4640_410

HomeLink is a registeredtrademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.


628

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

406

12/07/20 11:22:01 31TK4640_411

－

－

Bluetooth


www.handsfreelink.ca,

HandsFreeLink (HFL)allows you to place and receivephone calls using voice commands,without handling your cell phone.

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list ofcompatible phones, pairingprocedures, and special featurecapabilities:

Press andrelease to give a command or answera call.

Press andrelease to end a call, go back to theprevious command, or cancel thecommand.

In the U.S., visit, or call (888) 528-7876.

Air or wind noise from thedashboard and side vents,windows and moonroof mayinterfere with the microphone.Adjust or close them as necessary.

In Canada, visitor call (888) 528-7876.

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton each time you want tomake a command. After the beep,speak in a clear, natural tone.

CONTINUED

Using HFL

HFL Talk button

HFL Back button

HFL ButtonsVoice Control Tips

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)F

eatures

407

MICROPHONE

HFL BACK BUTTON

HFL TALK BUTTON

12/07/20 11:22:11 31TK4640_412

＃＃＃＃

Try to reduce all backgroundnoise. If the microphone picks upvoices other than yours,commands may be misinterpreted.

Many commands can be spokentogether. For example, you cansay ‘‘Call 123-456- ’’ or‘‘Dial Peter.’’

To change the volume level ofHFL, use the audio system volumeknob or the steering wheel volumecontrols.

To hear general HFL information,including help on pairing a phoneor setting up the system, say‘‘Tutorial.’’

For help at any time, including alist of available commands, say‘‘Hands free help.’’

As an incoming call notification, youwill see the following display:

Some phones may send battery,signal strength, and roaming statusinformation to HFL.

When there is an incoming call, orHFL is in use, ‘‘HANDSFREELINK’’will appear on the display.

‘‘ ’’ indicator will be displayed onthe audio display when a phone islinked.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)

Help Features

Information Display

408

SIGNALSTRENGTH

HFLMODE

BATTERYLEVEL STATUS

ROAM STATUS PHONE NUMBER

ROAM STATUS

SIGNAL STRENGTH

BLUETOOTH INDICATOR

12/07/20 11:22:21 31TK4640_413

＃＃＃＃

CONTINUED

How to Use HFL


eatures

409

‘‘Phone Setup’’

‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial’’

‘‘Pair’’

‘‘Edit’’

‘‘Delete’’

‘‘Jim Smith’’

‘‘Set PairingCode’’

The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

‘‘List’’

‘‘Status’’

‘‘Next Phone’’

Press HFLTalk button

Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.

‘‘123-456- ’’

Pair a phone to the system

Edit the name of a paired phone

Delete a paired phone from the system

Hear a list of all phones paired to the system

Hear which paired phone is currently linked to the system

Search for another previously paired phone to link to

Set the pairing code to a ‘‘Fixed’’ or ‘‘Random’’ number

Enter desired phone number

Once a phonebook entry is stored, you can say a name here.

(See page 412)

(See page 413)

(See page 413)

(See page 413)

(See page 414)

(See page 414)

(See page 414)

(See page 415)

(See page 415)

12/07/20 11:22:29 31TK4640_414


410

‘‘Redial’’

‘‘Transfer’’

‘‘Mute’’

‘‘Send’’

‘‘Phonebook’’

‘‘Store’’

‘‘Edit’’

‘‘Delete’’

‘‘ReceiveContact’’

‘‘List’’



Redial the last number called

Transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL

Mute your voice to the person at the other end of the call

Store a phonebook entry

Edit the number of an existing phonebook entry

Hear a list of all stored phonebook entries

(See page 415)

(See page 416)

(See page 417)

Send numbers or names during a call (See page 417)

(See page 418)

(See page 418)

Delete a phonebook entry (See page 419)

If your phone supports this function, use this to transfer contacts fromyour phone to HFL (See page 419)

(See page 419)

12/07/20 11:22:34 31TK4640_415

＊

＊

CONTINUED


eatures

411

‘‘Change Language’’

‘‘Hands Free Help’’

‘‘SystemSet up’’

‘‘Tutorial’’

‘‘Clear’’

‘‘Auto Transfer’’

‘‘Call Notification’’

‘‘Security’’

‘‘Change Passcode’’



: Canadian models

Apply a security passcode to the system that must be input at each keycycle to access the system

Set how you would like to be notified of an incoming call

Hear a list of available commands and additional information describing each command

(See page 420)

Change your security passcode(See page 421)

(See page 421)

Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when youenter the vehicle(See page 421)

Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries and securitypasscode(See page 422)

Change language from English to French (See page 422)

Hear a tutorial for general rules on using the system(See page 408)

(See page 408)

12/07/20 11:22:41 31TK4640_416

To use HFL, you need to pair yourBluetooth-compatible cell phone tothe system.

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton. If you are pairing a phonefor the first time, HFL will giveyou information about the pairingprocess. If it is not the first phoneyou are pairing, say ‘‘

’’ and say ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts and putyour phone in discovery or searchmode. HFL will give you a 4-digitpairing code and begin searchingfor your phone.

When your phone finds aBluetooth device, select HFL fromthe options and enter the 4-digitcode from the previous step.

Follow the HFL prompts andname the newly paired phone.

This command group is available forpaired cell phones.

You cannot pair your phone whilethe vehicle is moving.

Your phone must be in discoveryor search mode to pair. Refer toyour phone’s manual.

Up to six phones can be paired.

Your phone’s battery may drainfaster when it is paired to HFL.

If after three minutes your phoneis not ready to pair or a phone isnot found, the system will time outand return to idle.

1.

2.

3.

4.


To pair a cell phone:

Phone pairing tips

Phonesetup Pair

Phone Setup

412

12/07/20 11:22:54 31TK4640_417

Say ‘‘ .’’

Say ‘‘ ’’ after the prompts.

If there is more than one phonepaired to the system, HFL will askyou which phone’s name you wantto change. Follow the HFLprompts and rename the phone.

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton before a command.


Say ‘‘ .’’


HFL will ask you which phone youwant to delete. Follow the HFLprompts to continue with thedeletion.


HFL will read out all the pairedphone’s names.


Say ‘‘ .’’1.

2.

3. 3.

1.

2.1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Phone setup

Edit

Phone setup

DeleteList

Phone setup

To hear the names of all pairedphones:

To rename a paired phone: To delete a paired phone:


eatures

413

12/07/20 11:23:05 31TK4640_418


Say ‘‘ .’’


HFL will tell you which phone islinked to the system.


Say ‘‘ .’’Say ‘‘ .’’


Say ‘‘ ’’ after theprompts.

HFL disconnects the linked phoneand searches for another pairedphone.

Once another phone is found, it islinked to the system. HFL willinform you which phone is nowlinked.

If no other phones are found orpaired, HFL will inform you that theoriginal phone is linked again.


If you want HFL to create arandom code each time you pair aphone, say ‘‘ .’’ If you wantto choose your own 4-digit code tobe used each time, say ‘‘ ’’and follow the HFL prompts.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

To hear which paired phone iscurrently linked:

To change from the currently linkedphone to another paired phone:

To change the pairing code setting:

Phone setup

Status

Phone setupPhone setup

Next phoneSet pairing code

Random

Fixed


414

12/07/20 11:23:16 31TK4640_419

You can make calls using any phonenumber or a name in the HFLphonebook. You can also redial thelast number called.

Bluetooth is the wireless technologythat links your phone to HFL. HFLuses a Class 2 Bluetooth, whichmeans the maximum range betweenyour phone and vehicle is 30 feet (10meters).

During a call, HFL allows you to talkup to 30 minutes after you removethe key from the ignition switch.However, this may weaken thevehicle’s battery.


Say ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts and saythe name stored in the HFLphonebook that you want to call.

Follow the HFL prompts toconfirm the name and make thecall.


Say ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts and saythe phone number you want to dial.

Follow the HFL prompts toconfirm the number and say‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’

Once connected, you will hear theperson you called through the audiospeakers.

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton and say ‘‘ .’’

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

Making a Call

Call Dial Call Dial

Call Dial

Redial


To make a call using a name in theHFL phonebook:

To make a call using a phonenumber:

To redial the last number called byHFL:

Features

415

12/07/20 11:23:27 31TK4640_420

When you receive a call, an incomingcall notification (if activated) willplay and interrupt the audio systemif it is on.

Press the HFL Talk button to answerthe call, or the HFL Back button tohang up.

If your phone has Call Waiting, pressand release the HFL Talk button toput the original call on hold andanswer the incoming call.

To return to the original call, pressthe HFL Talk button again. If youdon’t want to answer the incomingcall, disregard it and continue withyour original call. If you want to hangup the original call and answer thenew call, press the HFL Back button.

You can transfer a call from HFL toyour phone, or from your phone toHFL.

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton and say ‘‘ .’’

Receiving a Call Transferring a Call

Transfer

Call Waiting


416

12/07/20 11:23:33 31TK4640_421

＃

CONTINUED

You can mute your voice to theperson you are talking to during acall.

To mute your voice during a call,press and release the HFL Talkbutton and say ‘‘ .’’

To unmute your voice, press andrelease the HFL Talk button and say‘‘ ’’ again.

HFL allows you to send numbers ornames during a call. This is usefulwhen you call a menu-driven phonesystem.


Say ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts and saythe name or number you want tosend.

Follow the HFL prompts to sendthe tones and continue the call.

To send a pound ( ), say‘‘pound.’’ To send a star (*), say ‘‘star.’’

You can store up to 50 names withtheir associated numbers in HFL.The numbers you store can be notonly phone numbers but other types,such as account numbers orpasswords, which can be sent duringa menu-driven call.

1.

2.

3.


Muting a Call

Mute

Mute

Send Numbers or Names Duringa Call

Send

Phonebook

To send a name or number during acall:

Features

417

NOTE:

12/07/20 11:23:43 31TK4640_422

Avoid using duplicate nameentries.

Avoid using ‘‘home’’ as a nameentry.

It is easier for HFL to recognize amultisyllabic or longer name. Forexample, use ‘‘Peter’’ instead of‘‘Pete,’’ or ‘‘John Smith’’ instead of‘‘John.’’


Say ‘‘ .’’


Follow the HFL prompts and saythe name entry you want to edit.

When asked, say the new numberfor that name.

Follow the HFL prompts tocomplete the edit.


Say ‘‘ .’’


Say a name you want to list as yourphonebook entry.

Say the number you want to storefor the name entry.

Follow the HFL prompts and say‘‘ ’’ to store the entry.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Phonebook

Edit

Phonebook

Store

Enter

To edit the number stored in a name:To store a phonebook entry:


418

NOTE:

12/07/20 11:23:55 31TK4640_423



Say ‘‘ .’’


Say the name you want to deleteand follow the HFL prompts tocomplete the deletion.

Say ‘‘ .’’


HFL begins reading the names inthe order they were stored.

If you hear a name you want to call,immediately press the HFL Talkbutton and say ‘‘ .’’


Follow the HFL prompts, select anumber from your cell phone, andsend it to HFL.


Say ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts andname the number, or say‘‘ ’’ if it is not the numberyou want to store.

Follow the HFL prompts if youwant to store another number.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

5.

Phonebook

Delete

Phonebook

List

Call

Receive contact

Phonebook

Discard

To delete a name: To list all names in the phonebook: To store a specific phone numberfrom your cell phone directly to theHFL phonebook (available on somephones):


eatures

419

12/07/20 11:24:09 31TK4640_424

This command group allows you tochange or customize HFL basicsettings.


Say ‘‘ .’’

Once a passcode is set, youwill need to enter it to use HFL eachtime you start the vehicle. If youforget the code, your dealer will haveto reset it for you, or you will have toclear the entire system (see page

).

Follow the HFL prompts toconfirm the number.

Follow the HFL prompts and saythe 4-digit passcode you want toset.


1.

2.

3.

4.

422

System Setup

System setup

Security

To set a 4-digit passcode to lock theHFL system for security purposes:


420

NOTE:

12/07/20 11:24:17 31TK4640_425

＊

＊

If you get into the vehicle while youare on the phone, the call can beautomatically transferred to HFLwith the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.


Say ‘‘ .’’


Say ‘‘ .’’Press and release the HFL Talkbutton before a command.

Say ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts toconfirm the number.

Follow the HFL prompts and saythe new 4-digit passcode.


The default setting is a ring tone.

Follow the HFL prompts and say‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’ Youcan also say ‘‘ ’’ for no audibleincoming call notification.


HFL will let you know if autotransfer is on or off, depending onthe previous setting. Follow theHFL prompts to change thesetting.


2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3. 1.

:

CONTINUED

System setup

System setup

System setupChange passcode

Ring tone PromptOff

Call notif ication

Auto transfer

To change your security passcode: To select either a ring tone or aprompt as the incoming callnotif ication :

To activate or deactivate the autotransfer function:


eatures

421

12/07/20 11:24:29 31TK4640_426


Follow the HFL prompts.

Say the language you want tochange to in that language.


Say ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts tochange the language to English orFrench.

When French is your currentlyselected language, you can give voicecommands in French.

If you have not named your pairedphone in the language you justselected, HFL will ask you to name itin the current language.

This operation clears the passcodes,paired phones, and all names in theHFL phonebook.


Say ‘‘ .’’


Follow the HFL prompts tocontinue to complete the clearingprocedure.

You can also clear the system whenyou have forgotten the passcode andcannot access HFL. When HFL asksyou for the passcode, say ‘‘

.’’ Paired phones, and all namesin the HFL phonebook will be lost.

1.

2.

3.

2.

1.1.

2.

Canadian models only Canadian models onlyTo clear the system:

To quickly change the language: To change the system languagebetween English and French:

Quick Language Selection Change Language

Change languageSystem setup

Clear

Systemclear


422

12/07/20 11:24:43 31TK4640_427

An incoming call on HFL willinterrupt Audio when it isplaying. Audio will resume when thecall is ended.

The word mark and logosare registered trademarks owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use ofsuch marks by Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. is under license. Othertrademarks and trade names arethose of their respective owners.


628BluetoothBluetooth

Bluetooth Wireless Technology HFL Limitations


eatures

423

12/07/20 11:24:49 31TK4640_428

Bluetooth


www.handsfreelink.ca,When a phone has never been paired tothe system:

HandsFreeLink (HFL)allows you to place and receivephone calls using either thenavigation system controls or voicecommands without the distraction ofhandling your cell phone.

In the U.S., visit, or call (888) 528-7876.

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list ofcompatible phones, pairingprocedures, and special featurecapabilities:

Use the Interface Dial to make menuor list selections.

To select an item on the screen, turnthe interface dial left or right tohighlight it, and then press ENTER.

To select an item that comes with, , , or icons,

push the interface selector up, down,left, or right.

In Canada, visitor call (888) 528-7876. Press the PHONE button or PICK-

UP button to enter the phone pairingprocedure (see page ).432

Using HFL

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

Interface Dial

424

INFO BUTTON

SELECTOR

DIAL

ENTER

CANCELBUTTON

PHONE BUTTON

12/07/20 11:24:59 31TK4640_429

－

－

CONTINUED

Press andrelease to answer a call, or press togo directly to the Cellular Phonescreen.

Press andrelease to end or decline a call.

Press the INFO button to go to themain information screen to select theCellular Phone menu.Press the PHONE button or PICK-

UP button to go to the CellularPhone screen.

Press the CANCEL button to goback to the previous screen.

When there is a paired phone is in yourvehicle:


HFL Buttons

PICK-UP Button

HANG-UP Button

Features

425

PICK-UP BUTTON HANG-UPBUTTON

BACK BUTTON


TALKBUTTON

12/07/20 11:25:09 31TK4640_430

－

－

To change the volume level ofHFL, use the audio system volumeknob or the steering wheel volumecontrols.

Try to reduce all backgroundnoise. If the microphone picks upvoices other than yours,commands may be misinterpreted.

For help at any time, including a listof available options, say ‘‘Help.’’

Refer to the navigation systemmanual for how to change thesystem’s language between English,French, and Spanish.

Press and release the Talk buttoneach time you want to make acommand. After the beep, speak ina clear, natural tone.

Air or wind noise from thedashboard and side vents,windows and moonroof mayinterfere with the microphone.Adjust or close them as necessary.

Press and releaseto give a command.

When the Cellular Phone screen isdisplayed, pressing the TALK buttonguides you through all availablefunctions.

Press and releaseto go back to the previous command,or cancel the command. Help Feature

Language Selection

Voice Control Tips


TALK Button

BACK Button

426

MICROPHONE

12/07/20 11:25:18 31TK4640_431

As an incoming call notification, youwill see the following display:

Some phones may send battery,signal strength, and roaming statusinformation to HFL.

To answer the call and show theHFL information, press the PICK-UPbutton on the steering wheel.

HFL Display

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)F

eatures

427

CALLER NAMEPHONE DIALING

BATTERY LEVELSTATUS

SIGNAL STRENGTH

LENGTH OF CALL TIME

ROAM STATUS

BLUETOOTH INDICATOR

When the audio is in use.


12/07/20 11:25:26 31TK4640_432

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)How to Use HFL

428

Voice commands can be used for all above options. Voice commands for the HFL system can only be used from the

Cellular Phone screen. To quickly access the Cellular Phone screen, press the Pick-Up button on the steering wheel.

Press and release the Talk button each time you give a command.

All

Dial

Receive

Missed

Call History

MoreSpeed Dial

The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON (see page ).

Dial

Phone Book

Redial

CellularPhone (see page 444).

(see page 446).

Display the paired phone’s previously imported phonebook (or import a new one)

Displays a list of all 20 speed dial entries. The first 4 speed dial numbers are shown on theCellular Phone screen (see page 446).

Push and hold the interface selector (ENTER) to redial the last number called by HFL

184

Display the last 20 incoming, outgoing, or missed calls(see page 445).(Appears only when a phone is connected to the system via HFL.)

(see page 445).Display the last 20 outgoing calls(Appears only when a phone is connected to the system via HFL.)

(see page 445).Display the last 20 incoming calls(Appears only when a phone is connected to the system via HFL.)

(see page 445).Display the last 20 missed calls(Appears only when a phone is connected to the system via HFL.)

Enter a phone number to dial (see page 445).

12/08/03 20:58:38 31TK4640_433

CONTINUED


eatures

429




Add New Phone

Connect

Disconnect

Delete

Store Voice Tag

DeleteSpeed Dial

StoreSpeed Dial

Delete Voice Tag

Pass-key

Connection

PhoneSetup

EditSpeed Dial

CellularPhone

Connect a paired phone to the system

Disconnect a paired phone from the system

Pair a phone to the system

Delete a previously paired phone

Delete a previously stored speed dial number

(see page 436).

(see page 435).

(see page 432).

(see page 436).

Create a Pass-key number for a paired phone (see page 435).

(see page 444).

(see page 443).

(see page 443).

Select a number from the Call History, Phone Book, or manualentry to store as a speed dial number (see page 442).

Delete a voice tag for a speed dial number

Create a voice tag for a speed dial number

12/08/03 20:58:45 31TK4640_434


430




Auto Answer

Auto Transfer

PhoneSetup

Edit PhoneName/PIN

CellularPhone

Clear CellularPhone

Information

(see page 439).

(see page 439).

Create a phone name/PIN number for a paired phone

Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle

Set incoming calls to be automatically answered

Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries, speed dials, and pass-keys

(see page 437).

(see page 439).

12/08/03 20:58:49 31TK4640_435

To use HFL, you need to pair yourBluetooth-compatible cell phone tothe system.

HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, whichmeans, the maximum range betweenyour phone and vehicle is 30 feet (10meters).

Press the PHONE button or PICK-UP button to go to the CellularPhone screen.

Select ‘‘PHONE SETUP’’ from theCellular Phone screen.

You can set up your phone and othersystem options with this menu.

CONTINUED

Phone SetupCellular Phone


eatures

431

Push the selector down forPHONE SETUP.

12/07/20 11:25:48 31TK4640_436

To pair a cell phone (when there is nophone paired to the system):Press the PHONE button or PICK-UP button. The system starts pairingwhen there is no phone paired to thesystem.

Press the PHONE button or PICK-UP button. The system promptsyou to pair a phone. Select ‘‘Yes’’on the confirmation screen.

Make sure your phone is set todiscoverable or visibility is ON,and select ‘‘OK.’’ HFL begins tosearch for your phone.

1. 2.

Setup Bluetooth Phone


432

12/07/20 11:25:55 31TK4640_437

HFL gives you a 4-digit pass-keythat you will need to input on yourphone.

When your phone prompts you,input the 4-digit pass-key.

You will receive a notification onthe screen and your phone ifpairing is successful.

If your phone doesn’t appear onthe list, select ‘‘Phone not found?’’and search for Bluetooth devicesusing your phone. From yourphone, select ‘‘HandsFreeLink.’’

If your phone is found, it isdisplayed on the screen. Select itand press ENTER.

You will receive a notification to setup an AcuraLink connection. If youwant to do this, please see page ,or select ‘‘Setup Later.’’

5.3.

4. 6.

7.

449

On U.S. models

CONTINUED


eatures

433


12/07/20 11:26:04 31TK4640_438

You cannot pair your phone whilethe vehicle is moving.

Up to six phones can be paired.

Your phone’s battery may drainfaster when it is paired to HFL.

Select ‘‘PHONE SETUP’’ from theCellular Phone screen.

Select ‘‘Connection’’ from thePhone Setup screen.

Select ‘‘Add New Phone.’’

Follow steps 2 through 7 from theprevious page.

1.

2.

4.

3.

To pair a cell phone (when there are oneor more phones paired to the system):

Phone pairing tips


434

12/08/08 20:02:58 31TK4640_439

To delete a paired phone:To change the pass-key setting:


Select ‘‘Delete.’’

Select the phone you want todelete. The Bluetooth icon showsyou the currently linked phone.

To create your own pass-key, select‘‘Fixed’’ and follow steps 3 and 4.

Delete the current pass-key.

Enter a new pass-key, and select‘‘OK.’’

The default pass-key ‘‘0000’’is used until you change the setting.

For a randomly generated pass-keyeach time you pair a phone, select‘‘Random.’’

Select ‘‘Pass-key.’’


1.

2.

3.

3.

4.

1.

2.

CONTINUED


eatures

435

NOTE:

TRASH ICON

BLUETOOTH ICON

Example

Push the selector to left to delete.

12/07/20 11:26:26 31TK4640_440

To disconnect a paired phone:To connect another paired phone:


Select ‘‘Disconnect.’’

Select the phone you want todisconnect. The Bluetooth iconshows you the currently linkedphone.

A trash icon appears next to theselected phone. Select ‘‘OK’’ tocontinue.

Select ‘‘Yes’’ from theconfirmation screen.


Select the phone you want toconnect. The Bluetooth iconshows you the currently linkedphone.

Select ‘‘Connect.’’

Select ‘‘OK’’ to continue.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

4.

5.


436

BLUETOOTH ICON

12/07/20 11:26:38 31TK4640_441

CONTINUED

You can name up to six HFL phonenames. Each can be PIN protected,and have its own phonebook, speeddial, and call history.

Select ‘‘OK’’ to continue.


Push the interface selector left orright to select the phone name youwant to edit on the Edit PhoneName/PIN screen.

Select ‘‘Edit Phone Name/PIN’’from the Phone Setup screen.

1.

2.

4.

5.

To edit a phone name:


Edit Phone Name/PIN

Features

437

Select a phone name.

12/07/20 11:26:45 31TK4640_442

Enter a 4-digit PIN, re-enter it, andselect ‘‘OK.’’

If you select ‘‘DO NOT USE PIN,’’before entering any number, thephone will not have a PIN.

If the phone is already PIN-protected,you need to enter the current PINbefore creating a new one.

When you set a PIN for a phone, youwill be asked to enter the PIN everytime you select the phone.


Select ‘‘PIN.’’

Select a phone to set a PIN (seepage ).


Select ‘‘Phone Name.’’

Enter a phone name, and select‘‘OK’’ when complete. 2.

1.

3.

4.

437

1.

2.

3.

To create a PIN for each phone:To name a phone:


438

12/07/20 11:26:56 31TK4640_443

CONTINUED

You can choose when the HFLsystem automatically answersincoming calls.

Select ‘‘Auto Answer’’ from thePhone Setup screen.

Select ‘‘Off,’’ ‘‘2sec,’’ ‘‘5sec,’’ or‘‘10sec.’’

If you get into the vehicle while youare on the phone, the call can beautomatically transferred to HFLwith the power mode inACCESSORY or ON (see page ).

Select ‘‘Auto Transfer’’ from thePhone Setup screen.

Select ‘‘OFF’’ or ‘‘ON.’’ Select the phone you want to clear.

Select ‘‘Clear Cellular PhoneInformation’’ from the PhoneSetup screen.

Clearing a phone name will clear allsettings, such as call history andphonebook.

2.

1.

2.

1.

2.

1.

185


Automatic AnsweringAutomatic Transferring To clear the cellular phoneinformation (one phone)

Features

439

12/07/20 11:27:08 31TK4640_444

A trash icon appears next to theselected phone. Select ‘‘OK’’ tocontinue.


A trash icon appears next to theselected item. Select ‘‘OK’’ toconfirm.

Select ‘‘Yes’’ from theconfirmation screen.Select ‘‘Cellular Phone

Information.’’

Push the interface selector to theright to select the Other tab on theSET UP screen. Select ‘‘ClearPersonal Data.’’

Select ‘‘Set up’’ from the Main Infoscreen.

Press the INFO button on thecontrol panel.

This operation clears all storedsettings for the cell phones paired tothe vehicle.

1.

2.

3.

4.

3.

4.

5.

6.

On the navigation SET UP screen


To clear the cellular phoneinformation (all phones)

440

12/07/20 11:27:17 31TK4640_445

＊

＊

Up to three category icons appearnext to the phonebook entries .

These indicate how many numbersare stored for the name. If a namehas more than three category icons,‘‘…’’ is displayed.

Available on some phones

Select a ‘‘No Entry’’ field to store aspeed dial entry, or use the followingprocedure.

When your phone is paired, thecontents of its phonebook and callhistory are automatically imported toHFL.

Up to 20 speed dial numbers can bestored per phone name, and the firstfour numbers are displayed on theCellular Phone screen.

:

(available on some phones)

CONTINUED

Edit Speed DialAutomatic Import CellularPhonebook and Call History


eatures

441

Preference

Home

Mobile

Work

Pager

Voice

Car

Fax

Other

The first four speed dial entries.

12/07/20 11:27:28 31TK4640_446

－

－

－

To store a speed dial number:Select ‘‘Edit Speed Dial’’ from thePhone Setup screen.

Select a number on the speed diallist where you want to store thenumber.

Choose a number from:

Phonebook the linked cellphone’s imported phonebook

When the speed dial number issuccessfully stored, you are askedto store a voice tag for the number.Follow the prompts.

Dial manual number input

Select ‘‘Store Speed Dial.’’

Call History the last 20numbers

When a voice tag is stored for theentry, you can dial the number bysaying ‘‘Dial by voice tag,’’ followedby the voice tag and ‘‘Dial’’ from anyscreen.

2.

4.

1.

3.

5.


442

12/07/20 11:27:36 31TK4640_447

CONTINUED

To add a voice tag to a stored speed dialnumber:

To delete a voice tag:

Select ‘‘Edit Speed Dial’’ from thePhone Setup screen.

Select ‘‘Store Voice Tag.’’

Select the number you want tostore a voice tag for.

Follow the prompts to completethe voice tag.

Avoid using duplicate voice tags.

Avoid using ‘‘home’’ as a voice tag.

It is easier for HFL to recognize alonger name. For example, use‘‘John Smith’’ instead of ‘‘John.’’

Select ‘‘Edit Speed Dial’’ from thePhone Setup screen.

Select ‘‘Delete Voice Tag.’’

Select the number you want todelete the voice tag for.

A trash icon appears next to theselected numbers. Select ‘‘OK’’ tocontinue.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

4.


eatures

443

NOTE:

12/07/20 11:27:48 31TK4640_448

To delete a speed dial number: To make a call using a name in thePhone Book:Select ‘‘Edit Speed Dial’’ from the

Phone Setup screen.

Select ‘‘Delete Speed Dial.’’

Select the number you want todelete, and push ENTER.

A trash icon appears next to theselected numbers. Select ‘‘OK’’ tocontinue.

You can make calls by inputting anyphone number, using the importedphonebook, using the call history, orwith speed dial entries.

When your phone is paired, thecontents of its phonebook and callhistory are automatically imported toHFL.

Select ‘‘Phone Book’’ from theCellular Phone screen.

Select a name from the list.

2.

1.

3.

4.

2.

1.


Making a Call

444

12/07/20 11:27:59 31TK4640_449

CONTINUED

To make a call using a phone number: To make a call using Call History:

Select ‘‘Dial’’ from the CellularPhone screen.

Enter the phone number, andselect ‘‘Dial.’’

Push ENTER to list the number ornumbers stored for the selectedname.

Select a number and push ENTERto begin automatic dialing.

Select ‘‘Call History’’ from theCellular Phone screen.

Call History is sorted by ‘‘All,’’‘‘Dial,’’ ‘‘Receive,’’ and ‘‘Missed.’’Selecting a number beginsautomatic dialing.

Some phones do not support‘‘All’’ in the Call History.

To enter the phone number by voice,press the TALK button and say it ina continuous string.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.


eatures

445

NOTE:

Push down the selector to dial.

HISTORY LIST

12/07/20 11:28:09 31TK4640_450

To make a call using Speed Dial: To make a call using More Speed Dial: To make a call using Redial:

Select one of the four entries on theCellular Phone screen, and pushENTER to begin automatic dialing.

Select ‘‘More Speed Dial’’ on theCellular Phone screen.

A list of up to 20 stored speed dialentries is shown. Select the entryyou want to call, and push ENTERto begin automatic dialing.

Press and hold the PICK-UP buttonto redial the last number dialed inyour phone’s history. On the CellularPhone screen, you can also redial bypressing and holding ENTER.

: Any voice-tagged speed dialentry can be dialed by voice fromany screen. Press the Talk buttonand say ‘‘Dial by voice tag,’’ followedby the voice tag name and ‘‘Dial.’’

2.

1.


446

NOTE

SPEED DIAL PHONE ICON

VOICE TAG ICON

12/07/20 11:28:18 31TK4640_451

－

－

－

＊

＊

CONTINUED

The following options are availableduring a call:

When you receive a call, anotification appears on the screen(see page ).

To answer the call, press thePICK-UP button on the steeringwheel.

To end or decline the call, press theHANG-UP button.

Allows you to transfer acall from HFL to your phone, orfrom your phone to HFL.

Allows you to mute yourvoice.

Available on some phones

Allows you to sendnumbers or names during a call. Thisis useful when you call a menu-driven phone system.

:

427


During a CallReceiving a Call Transfer

Mute

Dial Tones

Features

447

Example

12/07/20 11:28:28 31TK4640_452

An incoming call on HFL willinterrupt Audio when it isplaying. Audio will resume when thecall is ended.

In addition, you cannot use HFLwhile using AcuraLink.

If your phone has Call Waiting, pressand release the PICK-UP button toput the original call on hold andanswer the incoming call.

To return to the original call, pressthe PICK-UP button again. If youdon’t want to answer the incomingcall, disregard it and continue withyour original call. If you want to hangup the original call and answer thenew call, press the HANG-UP button.

The word mark and logosare registered trademarks owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use ofsuch marks by Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. is under license. Othertrademarks and trade names arethose of their respective owners.


628Bluetooth

Bluetooth

U.S. models only


HFL Limitations

Wireless TechnologyBluetooth

Call Waiting

448

12/07/20 11:28:35 31TK4640_453

The selector can be pushed left,right, up, down, and in. Use theselector to scroll through lists, toselect menus, and to highlight menuitems. When you make a selection,push the center of the selector(ENTER) to go to that selection.

AcuraLink enhances yourownership experience by providing adirect communication link betweenyour vehicle and the Acura Server.Working through the XM Radio,AcuraLink works in conjunction withthe navigation system,HandsFreeLink (HFL), and audiosystem in your vehicle. It displaysand receives several kinds ofmessages, including:

Operating tips and information onyour vehicle’s features.

Important recall and safetyinformation.

Maintenance information to keepyour vehicle in top condition.

Diagnostic information to provideinformation about any problemswith your vehicle.

Most AcuraLink functions arecontrolled by the interface dial. Theinterface dial has two parts, a dialand a selector.

The dial turns left and right. Use it tomake selections or adjustments to alist or menu on the screen.

Bluetooth

Interface Dial

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)


Features

449

CANCEL BUTTON

ENTER SELECTORDIAL

INFO BUTTON

12/07/20 11:28:43 31TK4640_454

A list of all messages will be shown.New messages will be at the top.Select the message you want to readby pressing ENTER.

To view previously read messages:

Press the INFO button. Theinformation screen will be shown.

A red exclamation will be marked onan envelope icon with an importantmessage.

If you have new messages, anenvelope icon appears in the lowerleft hand part of the navigationscreen.

To open a message:Press ENTER on the interfaceselector, then select New Messagesfrom the navigation system mapmenu.

Reading Messages


450

12/07/20 11:28:53 31TK4640_455

Unread messages have a closedenvelope icon next to them. The icondisappears when it has already beenread.

Only Diagnostic Infomessages appear on the navigationscreen while driving. They indicate ifyour vehicle has a problem that mayneed immediate attention (see page

).

After purchasing your vehicle,messages may not appearimmediately.Your dealer has to register thevehicle identification before you canreceive messages. This can takeseveral days to process.

Select ‘‘Messages,’’ then select amessage category. Select themessage you want to read and pressENTER.

When you open a message, you canread a summary of it, and thenchoose one of several options. If anoption is not available for a message,that option will not be highlighted.

460

CONTINUED

Message Options

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)F

eatures

451

NOTE:

12/07/20 11:29:02 31TK4640_456

－

－－

－

－－Select this option to deletethe current message.

Select this option to hear avoice read the entire message. Thisgives you more information than thescreen can display at one time. Whenyou select the Voice option, itchanges to a Stop Reading option.Select the option again to stop thevoice.

To set your AcuraLink preferences(the types of messages you want toreceive, if any), visit the AcuraOwners website at

, and choosewhat you would like to receive. If youdo not have internet access, callAcura Client Relations at (800)382-2238; they can set your messagepreferences for you.

To make a call, yourcompatible phone must be paired tothe vehicle’s HandsFreeLink system,powered on, and located within thevehicle (see page ).

Select thisoption to call the Acura dealer youpurchased your vehicle from.AcuraLink also directs you to thisdealer so you can schedule amaintenance appointment or receiveinformation about a message. If yourassigned servicing dealer changes,AcuraLink will reset to call thatdealer.

Select this option to call aphone number embedded in themessage. When you select ,

HandsFreeLink (HFL)dials the number for you.

Select thisoption to get more information aboutthe current diagnostic message. Touse this option, your cell phone mustbe paired with HFL. In addition, thepaired phone must have a compatibledata service and be set up with theAcuraLink system to make a dataconnection. Go to

to find out which dataservices are currently compatiblewith AcuraLink.

Select thisoption to find the nearest Acuradealer using the navigation system.

432

www.owners.acura.comBluetooth

Bluetooth


Delete

Voice

Message Preferences

Call Your Dealer

Call

Call

Diagnostic InfoFind Acura Dlr.


452

13/04/02 19:13:53 31TK4640_457

Diagnostic info and recall/campaign messages can only bedeleted by your dealer.To delete a single message:

Scroll to the Messages option,then select it by pressing ENTERon the interface selector.

Select the message category thatcontains the message you want todelete.

To delete all messages:

The Delete All Messagescommand does not apply toDiagnostic Info and Recall messages.They can only be deleted by yourdealer.

Scroll to the Delete Messagesoption, and select it by pressingENTER on the interface selector.

Scroll to the category with themessages you want to delete, andselect the category by pressingENTER on the interface selector.

Use the interface dial to scroll upor down to the message title youwant to delete, and select it bypressing ENTER on the interfaceselector.

Scroll to Delete with the interfacedial, and select it by pressingENTER on the interface selector.

Use the interface dial to scroll tothe AcuraLink/Messages option,and select it by pressing ENTERon the interface selector.

Press the INFO button to bring upthe INFO screen.

Press the INFO button to view theINFO screen. Select ‘‘Set up’’ withthe interface dial, then pressENTER to view the SET UPscreen.

Select Other by pushing theinterface selector to the right.

Deleting Messages


eatures

453

NOTE:NOTE:

12/07/20 11:29:19 31TK4640_458

Message categories can be added,revised, or deleted throughbroadcast messages from Acura.

These messages, based on updatedvehicle information and commentsfrom other TL owners, supplementyour Owner’s Manual. They provideyou with relevant information for asafe and enjoyable ownershipexperience. For additionalinformation, call Acura ClientServices directly through HFL.

During the first 90 days ofownership, a number of messagesappears each day. These messageshelp you to use and understand thefeatures of your vehicle.

There are six message categories inAcuraLink: Feature Guide, QuickTips, Scheduled DealerAppointments, Recalls/Campaigns,Diagnostic Info, and MaintenanceMinder . The system can store upto 255 messages.

Feature GuideQuick TipsMessage Categories


454

TM

12/07/20 11:29:26 31TK4640_459

These messages provide detailedinformation about the serviceneeded for your vehicle. When amaintenance message appears onthe multi-information display, a list ofneeded maintenance items isprovided through an AcuraLinkmessage. These messages tell youthe exact maintenance needed,helping you to avoid unnecessarymaintenance costs.

You can use the following messageoptions:

Reschedule the appointment withthe dealer.

Call your dealer for anappointment.

Find the nearest dealer.

You can make an appointment withyour dealer through AcuraLinkwhen you receive a MaintenanceMinder message.

To use the automated appointmentfunction, you should visit the AcuraOwners website at

, register somerequired settings, and complete thePhone-Data Connection set-up (seepage ). Yourcompatible phone should also bepaired and linked to your vehicle(see page ).

Make an appointment from theschedule at the dealer.

432

463

www.owners.acura.com

Bluetooth

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder Automated Appointment


eatures

455

TM

13/04/02 19:14:02 31TK4640_460

The system will automaticallyconnect to the Acura server, thenshow you an appropriateappointment date and time on thenavigation screen. If you accept thisappointment, select ‘‘ConfirmAppointment,’’ then press ENTER.

When you see the MaintenanceMinder message on the multi-information display, you will alsoreceive a message in the navigationscreen. To open the message, pressENTER. Select ‘‘New Messages,’’then press ENTER. You will see thelist of all messages. The most recentmessage is listed at the top.

Select the received message, thenpress ENTER. You will see themessage as shown. To make anappointment, select ‘‘ScheduleDealer Appt.’’ then press ENTER.


456

12/07/20 11:29:42 31TK4640_461

CONTINUED

You will see the screen to rescheduleas shown. To make an appointment,select ‘‘Reschedule Appointment,’’then press ENTER.

The system will automaticallyconnect to the Acura server, thenshow you a new appointment dateand time on the navigation screen. Ifyou accept this appointment, select‘‘Confirm Appointment,’’ then pressENTER.

The confirmation message will bedisplayed on the screen. Make sureto confirm the appointment date,time and dealer. If it is OK, pressENTER.

If you want to change or reschedulethe appointment date, select ‘‘Cancel,’’then press ENTER.

Press the INFO button to go to theINFO screen. Select ‘‘Messages,’’then select ‘‘Scheduled DealerAppointments’’ from the messagecategory list. Then press ENTER.


To reschedule the appointment:Scheduled Dealer Appointments

Features

457

12/07/20 11:29:52 31TK4640_462

The system will request you toconfirm the cancellation on thenavigation screen. To cancel theappointment, select ‘‘YES,’’ thenpress ENTER. If you select ‘‘NO,’’the screen goes back to the previousmessage display.

The system will automaticallyconnect to the Acura server, thenshow you the confirmation on thenavigation screen. If you accept thecancellation, press ENTER.

Select ‘‘Messages’’ on the INFOscreen, then press ENTER. Select‘‘Scheduled Dealer Appointments’’from the message category list.Then press ENTER. To cancel theappointment, select ‘‘CancelAppointment,’’ then press ENTER. If you cancel the appointment, you

cannot reschedule it. If you want tochange or reschedule theappointment date, call your dealerdirectly with HFL.

To cancel the appointment:


458

12/07/20 11:29:59 31TK4640_463

Using automated appointments, yourregistered dealer through AcuraOwners is automatically selected. Ifyou want to select another dealer,such as in case of an emergency,find the nearest dealer and call thedealer directly with HFL.

When a maintenance appointment isdue soon, you will also receive anappointment reminder message.

If your vehicle is affected by a recallor other important safetyinformation, a letter will be mailed toyou about the issue and how to fix it.You will also receive a remindermessage through AcuraLink. Youcan then use the message options tocall your dealer for an appointmentor to find the nearest dealer.

For this reason, it is important thatwe retain your current phonenumber. Please update yourinformation using Acura Owners atwww.owners.acura.com.


Recall/Campaigns

Features

459

13/04/02 19:14:07 31TK4640_464

When an indicator comes on or amessage is displayed on the Multi-Information Display (MID),AcuraLink can provide informationabout the cause of the indicator ormessage and the recommendedaction to address it. This helps youhandle the problem as it occurs,preventing or limiting costly repairs.

The AcuraLink system cannotdetermine mechanical problems(such as squeaks or rattles) that arenot triggered by the diagnosticindicator monitors.

For more information on theinstrument panel indicators, see page

.

When any indicator comes on or amessage is displayed on the MID,AcuraLink immediately notifies youwith the message, ‘‘An indicator is on.AcuraLink can help you decide whatto do.’’

If you do not want the informationright away, select the Check Lateroption.

Depending on the severity of theproblem, the message will let youknow if you should see your dealerimmediately or if you can wait until alater date.

If you want the information now,select the Check Now option. (If thenavigation screen is not active, youmust select OK from the navigationdisclaimer screen before you cancheck the information.)

64


Diagnostic Info

460

12/07/20 11:30:13 31TK4640_465

You can then use the messageoptions to call your dealer for anappointment or to find the nearestdealer.

When you make an appointmentthrough Acura Owners’ onlineSchedule Service Appointment, youcan be reminded in advance aboutthat appointment through AcuraLink.

If you need to reschedule or cancelthe appointment, see page .

When viewing a diagnostic infomessage through the INFO menu,you can select the Diagnostic Infooption to connect to the Acura serverand retrieve the latest informationregarding the problem.

There may not be anyadditional information, depending onthe time elapsed since the previoustime you retrieved the informationfrom the Acura server.

457

CONTINUED


Reminder Message

Features

461

NOTE:

13/04/02 19:14:15 31TK4640_466

－

Turning the Automated Appointmentpreference off will disableappointment notifications in thevehicle based on appointmentscreated or changed at AcuraOwners’ online scheduling website.

Appointments can still be created,rescheduled, and canceled from thevehicle; however the appointmentinformation stored in the vehicle willnot be updated. Any changes tothose appointments should be madefrom the Acura Owners website.

To access the following functions,press the INFO button. Select ‘‘Setup’’ to view the SET UP screen. Pushthe interface selector to the right toselect Other, then rotate theinterface dial to select AcuraLink/Messages.

Select thisoption to delete all stored messageswithin a category, except fordiagnostic info and recall campaignmessages. These messages can onlybe deleted by a certified technicianafter the recall is done or theproblem is corrected, or through abroadcast message from Acura.

AcuraLink/Message Screen

Delete Messages


462

13/04/02 19:14:21 31TK4640_467

－－

－ For the Phone-DataConnection option to be active, youneed a compatible andenabled cell phone paired to

HandsFreeLink (HFL).To complete the data connectionsetup, the paired phone must have acompatible data service.

Selectthis option to begin the processrequired to connect to Acura. This isused to access the most recentdiagnostic information when aproblem occurs.

Select ON if you want to be notifiedof new messages (envelope iconappears on the navigation screen).Select OFF if you do not want to benotified of new messages (envelopeicon does not appear on the screen).Messages can still be accessed usingthe INFO menu. If you would like tostop receiving messages, visit theAcura Owners website at

to change yourmessaging preferences.

Select ON to havethe system automatically read eachmessage to you. Select OFF tomanually select the Voice optionwhen you want a message read toyou.

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

www.owners.acura.com

CONTINUED

Phone-Data ConnectionNew Message Notification

Auto Reading


eatures

463

NOTE:

13/04/02 19:14:28 31TK4640_468

－The default setting is prompt. Whena diagnostic info message appears,and you select the Check Now option,the system will prompt you beforeconnecting to the Acura server. Ifyou do not wish to connect at thattime, select No at the prompt, andyou will see the information from theonboard database. The ‘‘Auto’’setting will remove the prompt whenyou select the Check Now option andwill automatically connect to theAcura server. This setting onlyapplies when you have aenabled phone that is paired withHFL and you have completed thePhone-Data Connection setup.

To find more information oncompatible and enabled

cell phones, visitor call

the HandsFreeLink consumersupport at 1-888-528-7876.


628

Bluetooth

Bluetooth


Connect to the Acura Server


464

12/07/20 11:30:39 31TK4640_469

Refer to the navigation systemmanual for operation of the rearviewcamera.


Rearview Camera and MonitorF

eatures

465

12/07/20 11:30:42 31TK4640_470

466

12/07/20 11:30:44 31TK4640_471

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

.............................Break-in Period . 468.................Fuel Recommendation . 468

.........Service Station Procedures . 470....................................Refueling . 470

.....Tighten Fuel Cap Message . 471Opening and Closing the

.......................................Hood . 472...................................Oil Check . 474

.............Engine Coolant Check . 475...............................Fuel Economy . 476

...Accessories and Modifications . 479.............................Carrying Cargo . 481

Before DrivingB

eforeD

riving

467

12/07/20 11:30:47 31TK4640_472

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

Do not change the oil until themulti-information display indicatesit is needed.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon premium unleaded gasoline with apump octane of 91 or higher. If thisoctane grade is unavailable, regularunleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane of 87 or higher may be usedtemporarily. The use of regularunleaded gasoline can cause metallicknocking noises in the engine andwill result in decreased engineperformance. The long-term use ofregular-grade gasoline can lead toengine damage.

You may hear a knocking noise fromthe engine if you drive the vehicle atlow engine speed (below about 1,000rpm) in a higher gear. To stop this,raise the engine speed by shifting toa lower gear.

On vehicles with manual transmissionBreak-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

468

12/07/20 11:30:55 31TK4640_473

For further important fuel-relatedinformation for your vehicle, or oninformation on gasoline that does notcontain MMT, visit Acura Owners at

. In Canada, visitfor additional

information on gasoline. For moreinformation on top tier gasoline, visit

.

Because the level of detergency andadditives in gasoline vary in themarket, Honda endorses the use of‘‘TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline’’where available to help maintain theperformance and reliability of yourvehicle. TOP TIER DetergentGasoline meets a new gasolinestandard jointly established byleading automotive manufacturers tomeet the needs of today’s advancedengines. Qualifying gasoline retailerswill, in most cases, identify theirgasoline as having met ‘‘TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline’’ standards at theretail location. This fuel isguaranteed to contain the properlevel of detergent additives and befree of metallic additives. The properlevel of detergent additives, andabsence of harmful metallic additivesin gasoline, help avoid build-up ofdeposits in your engine and emissioncontrol system.

owners.acura.comwww.acura.ca

www.toptiergas.com

Fuel RecommendationB

eforeD

riving

469

We recommend quality gasolinecontaining detergent additives that helpprevent f uel system and engine deposits.In addition, in order to maintain goodperf ormance, f uel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain harmf ul manganese-based f uel additives such as MMT, ifsuch gasoline is available.Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely af f ect perf ormance, andcause the malf unction indicator lampon your instrument panel to come on. Ifthis happens, contact your dealer f orservice. Some gasoline today is blendedwith oxygenates such as ethanol. Yourvehicle is designed to operate onoxygenated gasoline containing up to10% ethanol by volume. Do not usegasoline containing methanol. If younotice any undesirable operatingsymptoms, try another service stationor switch to another brand of gasoline.

13/04/02 19:14:33 31TK4640_474

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank equalizes.Place the cap in the holder on thefuel fill door.

The fuel fill cap is attached to thefuel fill door with a tether to avoidlosing the cap.

Park with the driver’s side closestto the service station pump.

Open the fuel fill door by pressingthe button in the driver’s door (toopen the fuel fill door manually,see page ).

3.

1.

2.

599

Service Station Procedures

Refueling

470

TETHER

FUEL FILL CAP

HOLDER

PushGasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

12/07/20 11:31:08 31TK4640_475

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Thisleaves some room in the fuel tankfor the fuel to expand withtemperature changes.

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking offeven though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle’s fuel vapor recovery system.The system helps keep fuel vaporfrom going into the atmosphere. Tryfilling at another pump. If this doesnot fix the problem, consult yourdealer.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least once. If youdo not properly tighten the cap,you will see a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUELCAP’’ message on the multi-information display. If the systemstill detects an evaporative systemleak after retightening the cap, themalfunction indicator lamp maycome on (see page ).

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

Your vehicle’s on board diagnosticsystem will detect a loose or missingfuel fill cap as an evaporative systemleak. The first time a leak is detecteda ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ messageappears on the multi-informationdisplay.

4. 5.

6.

597

CONTINUED

Tighten Fuel Cap Message

Service Station ProceduresB

eforeD

riving

471

12/07/20 11:31:15 31TK4640_476

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Turn the engine off, and confirm thefuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosenit, then retighten it until it clicks atleast once. The message should gooff after several days of normaldriving once you tighten or replacethe fuel fill cap. To scroll to anothermessage, press the INFO button.

The ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’message will appear each time yourestart the engine until the systemturns the message off.

If the system still detects a leak inyour vehicle’s evaporative emissionssystem, the malfunction indicatorlamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fillcap was not already tightened, turnthe engine off, and check orretighten the fuel fill cap until itclicks at least once. The MIL shouldgo off after several days of normaldriving once the cap is tightened orreplaced. If the MIL does not go off,have your vehicle inspected by adealer. For more information, seepage .

1.597

Opening and Closing the Hood


472

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

12/07/20 11:31:20 31TK4640_477

Lift the hood up most of the way.The hydraulic supports will lift itup the rest of the way and hold itup.

If the hood latch handle movesstiffly, or if you can open the hoodwithout lifting the handle, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated.

Put your fingers between the frontedge of the hood and the frontgrille to locate the hood latchhandle. Push this handle up until itreleases the hood. Lift the hood.

To close the hood, lower it to about afoot (30 cm) above the fender, thenpress down firmly with your hands.Make sure the hood is securelylatched.

3.2.

Service Station ProceduresB

eforeD

riving

473

LATCH

12/07/20 11:31:26 31TK4640_478

Park the vehicle on a level surface.

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (orange loop).

Wipe off the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto its hole.

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

1.

3.

2.

4.

543


Oil Check

Adding Engine Oil

474

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

12/07/20 11:31:33 31TK4640_479

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

To access the radiator reserve tank,remove the right-side enginecompartment cover (see page ).

See page for the engine coolantlocation.

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

546

542

539

541


Engine Coolant Check

AddingEngine Coolant

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks

Before

Driving

475

MAX RESERVE TANK

MIN

12/07/20 11:31:40 31TK4640_480

－－

－－

Fuel economy is not a fixed number.It varies based on driving conditions,driving habits, and vehicle condition.Therefore, it is not possible for oneset of estimates to predict fueleconomy precisely for all drivers inall environments.

Represents urbandriving in light traffic. A range ofmiles per gallon achieved is alsoprovided.

The EPA fuel economy estimatesshown in the example to the rightare a useful tool for comparisonwhen buying a vehicle. EPAestimates include:

Represents a combination of city andhighway driving. The scalerepresents the range of combinedfuel economy for other vehicles inthe class.

Represents amixture of rural and interstatedriving, in a warmed-up vehicle,typical of longer trips in free-flowingtraffic. A range of miles per gallon

achieved is also provided.

Provides an estimated annual fuelcost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000km) per year multiplied by the cost

per gallon (based on EPA fuel costdata) divided by the combined fueleconomy.

For more information on fueleconomy ratings and factors thataffect fuel economy, visit

(Canada: Visit)

www.fueleconomy.gov www.vehicles.gc.ca

Actual Mileage and EPA FuelEconomy Estimates Comparison.

City MPGCombined Fuel Economy

Highway MPGEstimated Annual Fuel Cost

Fuel Economy

476

Combined FuelEconomy

(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)

Estimated AnnualFuel Cost

City MPG Highway MPG

12/07/20 11:31:48 31TK4640_481

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Aggressive driving (hardacceleration and braking)Excessive idling, accelerating andbraking in stop-and-go trafficCold engine operation (enginesare more efficient when warmedup)Driving with a heavy load or theair conditioner runningImproperly inflated tires

The following factors can lower yourvehicle’s fuel economy:

Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking increase fuelconsumption.

Aerodynamic drag has a big effecton fuel economy at speeds above45 mph (75 km/h). Reduce yourspeed and you reduce the drag.Trailers, car top carriers, roofracks and bike racks are also bigcontributors to increased drag.

If your vehicle has amanual transmission, you canboost your fuel economy by upshifting as early as possible.

Idlingresults in 0 miles per gallon (0 kmsper liter).

It puts a heavierload on the engine, increasing fuelconsumption.

Inparticular, a build-up of snow ormud on your vehicle’s undersideadds weight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fueleconomy.

An underinflated tire increases‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reducesfuel economy.

A properly maintained vehiclemaximizes fuel economy. Poormaintenance can significantly reducefuel economy. Always maintain yourvehicle according to the maintenancemessages displayed on the multi-information display (see

on page ).For example:

539CONTINUED

Fuel Economy Factors Use the recommended viscositymotor oil, displaying the APICertif ication Seal (see page

).

Improving Fuel Economy

Drive moderately

Observe the speed limit

Always drive in the highest gearpossible

Avoid excessive idling

Avoid carrying excess weight inyour vehicle

Keep your vehicle clean

Maintain proper tire inflation

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

543

Vehicle Maintenance

Drive Efficiently

Fuel EconomyB

eforeD

riving

477

12/07/20 11:32:01 31TK4640_482

－

－

Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.Reset trip counter to zero.Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.Follow one of the simple calculations above.

The A/Cputs an extra load on the enginewhich makes it use more fuel. Usethe fresh-air ventilation whenpossible.

Combine several short trips intoone. A warmed-up engine is morefuel efficient than a cold one.

Direct calculation is therecommended source of informationabout your actual fuel economy.Using frequency of fill-ups or takingfuel gauge readings are NOTaccurate measures of fuel economy.Fuel economy may improve over thefirst several thousand miles(kilometers).

1)2)3)4)

Checking Your Fuel Economy

Measuring Techniques

Minimize the use of the airconditioning system

Plan and combine trips

Calculating Fuel Economy

Fuel Economy

478

Miles perGallon

100 Kilometers

Gallonsof fuel

Milesdriven

Liter L per100 km

12/07/20 11:32:10 31TK4640_483

Your dealer has Acura accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Before installing any accessory:Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Although non-Acura accessories mayfit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows. Accessories installed inthese areas may interfere withproper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withproper operation of your vehicle.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags, anti-lock brakes, andtire pressure monitoring system.

Modifying your vehicle, or installingnon-Acura accessories, may makeyour vehicle unsafe. Before youmake any modifications or add anyaccessories, be sure to read thefollowing information.

600Accessories

Accessories and ModificationsB

eforeD

riving

479

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

12/07/20 11:32:18 31TK4640_484

Some examples are:

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components with non-Acura components could seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling,stability, and reliability.

Raising your vehicle with a non-Acura suspension kit can affectthe handling, stability, andreliability.

Lowering the vehicle with a non-Acura suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

Non-Acura wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents and will not becompatible with the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS).

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety features can make thesystems ineffective.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Modifying Your Vehicle

Accessories and Modifications

480

12/07/20 11:32:26 31TK4640_485

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

Glove boxDoor and seat-back pockets

TrunkConsole compartmentCenter and side pockets

In addition, the trunk pass-throughallows you to carry longer items.

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Carrying CargoB

eforeD

riving

481

TRUNK

CENTER POCKET

GLOVE BOX

DOOR POCKETS

SEAT-BACK POCKETS CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

SIDE POCKET

12/07/20 11:32:33 31TK4640_486

－

－ ×

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit

Locate the statement ‘‘Thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’splacard.

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. Forexample, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amountequals 1,400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb. passengers in yourvehicle, the amount of availablecargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs.(1,400 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)

Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

The maximum load for your vehicleis 850 lbs (385 kg).

See Tire And Loading Informationlabel attached to the driver’sdoorjamb.

Label Example

This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, andaccessories, and the tongue load ifyou are towing a trailer.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

Load Limits

Carrying Cargo

482

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

12/07/20 11:32:44 31TK4640_487

In addition, the total weight of thevehicle, all occupants, accessories,cargo, and trailer tongue load mustnot exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). Bothare on a label on the driver’sdoorjamb.

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Do not put any items on top of thetrunk panel. They can block yourview and be thrown around thevehicle during a crash.

Example 1

Example 2

Example 3

CONTINUED

Carrying Cargo in the PassengerCompartment

Carrying CargoB

eforeD

riving

483

Passenger Weight150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)



Max Load 850 lbs(385 kg)



Cargo Weight550 lbs(249 kg)



12/07/20 11:32:57 31TK4640_488

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunderneath and interfere with theproper operation of the seats, thesensors under the seats, or thedriver’s ability to operate thepedals.

Keep all cargo below the bottomof the windows. If it is higher, itcould interfere with the properoperation of the side curtainairbags.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

Cargo hook buttons in the trunk canbe used to install a net for securingitems.

The cargo net can be used to helphold down items stored in the trunk.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the trunk, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing the trunklid, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of

, follow the instructionson page .57

If equippedCargo Nets

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk Cargo Hook Buttons

carbon monoxidepoisoning

Carrying Cargo

484

CARGO HOOK BUTTON

12/07/20 11:33:06 31TK4640_489

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate themanual and automatic transmissions.It also includes importantinformation on parking your vehicle,the braking system, the SuperHandling-All Wheel Drive(SH-AWD ) system, the vehiclestability assist (VSA ), akaelectronic stability control (ESC),system, the tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS), and the blind spotinformation system (BSI).

........................Preparing to Drive . 486Starting the Engine

(Models without Keyless.....................Access System) . 487

Starting the Engine(Models with Keyless

.....................Access System) . 489...................Manual Transmission . 491

..............Automatic Transmission . 494Driving with the Paddle

.......................................Shifters . 499Super Handling-All Wheel

...Drive (SH-AWD ) System . 504...........................................Parking . 506

.............................Braking System . 507...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 508

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ),aka Electronic Stability

........Control (ESC), System . 510.........................Hill Start Assist . 512

Tire Pressure Monitoring........................System (TPMS) . 514

Blind Spot Information System...........................................(BSI) . 519

...........................Towing a Trailer . 528...................Towing Your Vehicle . 528

DrivingD

riving

485

TM

TM

12/07/20 11:33:10 31TK4640_490

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Make sure the doors are securelyclosed and locked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel, and themessages on the multi-informationdisplay (see pages , and

).

You should do these checks andadjustments before you drive yourvehicle:

Check that the hood is fully closed.

Check that the trunk is fullyclosed.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

3.

2.

1.7.

8.

9.

4.

5.

6.

63

16

10.

11.

7876

167

146

161

Preparing to Drive

486

12/07/20 11:33:19 31TK4640_491

－

Your vehicle’s starting system has anauto control mode. When you turnthe ignition switch to the START(III) position, this feature keeps theengine’s starter motor running untilthe engine starts. Follow theseinstructions to start the engine:

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.


Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, thenrelease the ignition switch. You donot need to hold the ignitionswitch in the START (III) positionto start the engine. The startermotor runs until the engine startsor a maximum of 10 25 secondsdepending on engine coolanttemperature.

If the engine does not start, wait atleast 10 seconds before tryingagain.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Starting the Engine (Models without Keyless Access System)D

riving

487

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperlycoded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. Formore inf ormation, see page .149

12/07/20 11:33:26 31TK4640_492

If there is a problem with thestarting system, you will see a‘‘CHECK STARTING SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay when the ignition switch isturned to the ON (II) position. Youwill also see this message when theauto control mode of the startingsystem has a problem.

If this message is on, the ignitionswitch has to be held in the START(III) position manually until theengine starts. The ignition switchcan be held in that position up to 15seconds.

Even though you may be able tostart the engine manually withoutthe auto control mode of the startingsystem, have your vehicle inspectedby a dealer.

Check Starting System Message

Starting the Engine (Models without Keyless Access System)

488

12/07/20 11:33:31 31TK4640_493

－

The keyless access remote batterybecomes weak or dead.

The keyless access remote systemmain switch is off.

In either of the following cases, youshould insert the keyless accessremote into the keyless remote slot.For more information, see pages

and .

Your vehicle’s starting system has anauto control mode. When you haveyour keyless access remote and pushthe engine start/stop button whiledepressing the brake pedal (A/T) orclutch pedal (M/T), this featurekeeps the engine’s starter motorrunning until the engine starts.Follow these instructions to start theengine:

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

Press the clutch pedal down all theway. The power mode from ON toSTART does not function unlessthe clutch pedal is pressed.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.


Without touching the acceleratorpedal, push and release the enginestart/stop button. You do not needto hold the engine start/stopbutton to start the engine. Thestarter motor runs until the enginestarts or a maximum of 10 25seconds depending on enginecoolant temperature.

If the engine does not start, wait atleast 10 seconds before tryingagain.

1.

2.

3.

4.

194 195



Starting the Engine (Models with Keyless Access System)D

riving

489

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperlycoded keyless access remote (or otherdevice) is used, the engine’s f uel systemis disabled. For more inf ormation, seepage .

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

149

12/07/20 11:33:41 31TK4640_494

If you cannot start the engine usingthe normal engine start procedure,do the following:

Set the parking brake.

If there is a problem with thestarting system, you will see a‘‘CHECK STARTING SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay with the power mode ON.You will also see this message whenthe auto control mode of the startingsystem has a problem.

Do not follow this procedure unlessit is a case of emergency. Even if youcan start the engine using thismethod, the system may have amalfunction. Contact your dealer assoon as possible.

Press and hold the engine start/stop button for about 15 secondswhile pressing the brake pedal(automatic) or the clutch pedal(manual).

Press the engine start/stop buttonto turn on the ACCESSORY mode.

Put the shift lever into Park.

If this message is on, you shouldpress and hold the engine start/stopbutton until the engine starts. Theengine start/stop button may need tobe held several seconds before thestarter motor runs. The startermotor can be run up to 15 seconds.

Your vehicle has the engine start/stop button instead of an ignitionswitch to select the power mode. Formore information, see page .

Even though you may be able tostart the engine manually withoutthe auto control mode of the startingsystem, have your vehicle inspectedby a dealer.

1.

2.

3.

4.

184


Starting the Engine (Models with Keyless Access System)

Emergency Engine StartCheck Starting System Message

490

12/07/20 11:33:51 31TK4640_495

When shifting up or down, makesure you push the clutch pedal downall the way, shift to the next gear,and let the pedal up gradually. Whenyou are not shifting, do not rest yourfoot on the clutch pedal. This cancause your clutch to wear out faster.

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoreverse with the vehicle moving.Push down the clutch pedal, andpause for a few seconds beforeshifting into reverse, or shift into oneof the forward gears for a moment.This stops the gears so they won’t‘‘grind.’’

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure the engine speed will notgo into the tachometer’s red zone inthe lower gear.

The manual transmission issynchronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot accidentally shift fromany forward gear to reverse whilethe vehicle is moving at a certainspeed (see page ).493

Manual TransmissionD

riving

491

13/04/02 19:21:50 31TK4640_496

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you goodfuel economy and effectiveemissions control. The followingshift points are recommended:

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th5th to 6th

Normal acceleration

17 mph (28 km/h)27 mph (44 km/h)36 mph (58 km/h)41 mph (66 km/h)44 mph (71 km/h)

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

Manual Transmission

Recommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter

492

12/07/20 11:34:03 31TK4640_497

Press the clutch pedal, and shift toreverse.

The manual transmission has alockout so you cannot accidentallyshift from any forward gear toreverse while the vehicle is movingat a certain speed. If you cannot shiftto reverse when the vehicle isstopped, do the following:

With the clutch pedal pressed,move the shift lever to the first/second gear side of the neutralgate, then shift to reverse.

If you are still unable to shift toreverse, apply the parking brake,and select the ACCESSORY orVEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode(see page ).

With the clutch pedal still pressedfully, press the engine start/stopbutton to start the engine.

If you need to use this procedure toshift to reverse, your vehicle may bedeveloping a problem. Have itchecked by your dealer.

1.

2.

3.

4.

185

Reverse Lockout

Manual TransmissionD

riving

493

Move the shift lever in sequence.

12/07/20 11:34:11 31TK4640_498

＊

＊

These indicators between thetachometer and speedometer showwhich position the shift lever is in.

Using a paddle shift mode, the gearposition indicator shows you theselected gear number (see page

).

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it flashes while driving (inany shift position), it indicates apossible problem in the transmission.


and .

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem with theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration andhave the transmission checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of apossible problem with thetransmission, you will see a ‘‘CHECKTRANSMISSION’’ message on themulti-information display.

:

499

184 187

Shift Lever Position Indicators


494

GEAR POSITION INDICATOR onPADDLE SHIFT MODE

12/07/20 11:34:19 31TK4640_499

－

＊

＊

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Press the releasebutton on the front of the shift leverto move it.

To shift from Park to any position,press firmly on the brake pedal, andpress the release button on the frontof the shift lever, then move thelever. You cannot shift out of Parkwhen the ignition switch is in theLOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)position.


and .

:

184 187

Do this:Press the brake pedal andpress the shift lever releasebutton.Press the shift lever releasebutton.

Move the shift lever.

To shift from:

P to R

R to PN to RD to SS to DD to NN to DR to N

CONTINUED

Shifting

Park (P)

Automatic TransmissionD

riving

495

RELEASE BUTTON

12/07/20 11:34:26 31TK4640_500

－

－

－If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

Press the brakepedal and the release button on thefront of the shift lever to shift fromPark to reverse. To shift fromreverse to neutral, come to acomplete stop, and then shift. Pressthe release button before shiftinginto reverse from neutral.

Use neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from neutral toanother gear.

You must also press the releasebutton to shift into Park. To avoidtransmission damage, come to acomplete stop before shifting intoPark.

The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you change the power modefrom ON to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically selects asuitable gear (1 through 6 gear) tokeep the engine at the best speed forthe driving conditions.

497



Shift Lock Release

Reverse (R)

Neutral (N)

Drive (D)


496

12/07/20 11:34:33 31TK4640_501

－If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal and pressing the releasebutton does not work.

Set the parking brake.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

Remove the built-in key from thekeyless access remote (see page

).

With the shift lever in D or S, youcan also use the paddle shifters toshift the transmission up or down.With the paddle shifters, you canoperate the transmission much like amanual transmission without aclutch pedal. For more informationon driving with the paddle shifters,see page .

The engine may cut in and out in Rposition or depending on the roadcondition, even when the enginespeed is lower than the tachometer’sred zone. This is the engine’scomputer working to protect thetransmission.

To shift into the Sposition, press the release button onthe front of the shift lever, and movethe lever to S. This position is similarto D, except only gears from first tofifth are selected. (When shifting upautomatically, the vehicle speed ishigher than when in the D position.)The S position keeps thetransmission from cycling betweenfourth, fifth and sixth gears in stop-and-go driving.

1.

2.

501

201

CONTINUED



Shift Lock ReleaseEngine Speed LimiterS Position (S)

Automatic TransmissionD

riving

497

12/07/20 11:34:42 31TK4640_502

Put a cloth on the edge of the shiftlock release slot cover to preventscratches. Use a small flat-tipscrewdriver or metal fingernail fileto carefully pry up the edge of thecover and remove it from the slot.

Insert a key or built-in key in theshift lock release slot.

Push down on the key or built-inkey while you press the releasebutton on the shift lever and movethe shift lever out of Park toneutral.

Remove the key or built-in keyfrom the shift lock release slot,then reinstall the cover. Makesure the notch on the cover is onthe rear side. Press the brakepedal, and restart the engine.

If you need to use the shift lockrelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have itchecked by your dealer.

3.

6.

5.

4.


498

SHIFT LOCKRELEASE SLOT

Vehicle without keyless access systemis shown.

COVER

12/07/20 11:34:49 31TK4640_503

＋

－

＋－

When you are driving in the Dposition, you can shift thetransmission up or down manuallywith the paddle shifters.

Each time you pull (right), thetransmission shifts to a higher gear.Pull (left) to downshift. You willsee the selected gear number on theinstrument panel.

To shift up or down, use the(right) or (left) paddle shifter oneither side of the steering wheel.

Downshifting with the paddle shifterallows you to increase the enginebraking when going down steep orlong hills, and provides more powerwhen climbing uphills. You canupshift the transmission manually toreduce the rpm.

When you pull either paddle shifter,the gear position indicator shows youthe selected gear number.

CONTINUED

Using the Paddle Shifters in theD position (D-Paddle Shift Mode)

Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Automatic Transmission Only)D

riving

499

GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

12/07/20 11:34:56 31TK4640_504

＋

The transmission control systemmonitors the accelerator pedal useand your driving conditions. Whenyou press the accelerator pedal as innormal driving, the system judgesthat you are driving at a constantcruising speed without using thepaddle shifters. Under theseconditions, D-paddle shift mode iscanceled, and the transmissionautomatically returns to drive mode(D).

Each time you pull either paddleshifter, the transmission shifts onegear up or down. If you want to shiftup or down more than two gears, pullthe paddle shifter twice, pause, andthen pull it again.

The automatic transmission will notallow you to shift up or down if:

You downshift before the enginespeed reaches the highestthreshold of the lower gear.

If you try to do this, the gearposition indicator will flash thenumber of the lower gear severaltimes, then return to a higher gear.

Hold the paddle shifter for 2seconds to return to drive mode (D).

When the transmission returns todrive mode (D), the displayed gearnumber disappears.

The transmission remains in theselected gear if you do not accelerate.

You upshift before the enginespeed reaches the lowestthreshold of the higher gear.

You pull both paddle shifters atthe same time.

When you depress the acceleratorpedal to the floor, the transmissionwill downshift from second to first.

If there is a problem in thetransmission while you are drivingwith the paddle shifters, the Dindicator flashes, the D-paddle shiftmode is canceled, and thetransmission returns to drive mode(D).

The transmission downshifts to firstgear and returns to drive mode (D)when the vehicle comes to acomplete stop or the vehicle speed isabout 6 mph (10 km/h).

You are trying to downshift fromsecond to first with the acceleratorpedal off.

Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Automatic Transmission Only)

500

12/07/20 11:35:05 31TK4640_505

＋－

CONTINUED

With the shift lever in the S position,you can select the sequential shiftmode to shift gears; much like amanual transmission using thepaddle shifters, but without a clutchpedal.

Shifting between first and secondgears may occur automatically.Downshifting from second to firstwith the accelerator pedal off is notallowed. When you move the shift lever from

‘‘D’’ to ‘‘S’’ and pull either paddleshifter, the gear position indicatordisplays ‘‘M’’ along with the selectedgear number.

To upshift, pull the (right) paddleshifter. To downshift, pull the(left) paddle shifter.

To enter the sequential shift mode,press the release button on the frontof the shift lever, move the lever tothe S position, then pull either paddleshifter. To cancel the sequential shiftmode and return to the ordinaryautomatic transmission, move theshift lever from the S position. Whenmoving the shift lever, be careful notto operate incorrectly. While you aredriving in the sequential shift mode,the transmission will notautomatically return to ordinaryautomatic transmission.

Using the Paddle Shifters in the Sposition (Sequential Shift Mode)

Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Automatic Transmission Only)D

riving

501

GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

‘‘M’’ INDICATOR

12/07/20 11:35:12 31TK4640_506

The automatic transmission will notallow you to shift up or down if:

If the vehicle speed decreasesbelow the redline of the selectedlower gear while the indicator isflashing, the transmissiondownshifts, and the indicatordisplays the selected gear.

You upshift before the enginespeed reaches the lowestthreshold of the higher gear.

You pull both paddle shifters atthe same time.

You downshift before the enginespeed reaches the highestthreshold of the lower gear.

If you try to do this, the gearposition indicator will flash thenumber of the lower gear severaltimes, then return to a higher gear.

Downshifting with the paddle shifterallows you to increase the enginebraking when going down steep orlong hills, and provides more powerwhen climbing uphills. You canupshift the transmission manually toreduce the rpm.

When you accelerate from a stop,the transmission starts in first gear,and shifts from first to secondautomatically. You must manuallyupshift between second and sixthgears. Make sure you upshift beforethe engine speed reaches thetachometer’s red zone.

The transmission remains in theselected gear (6, 5, 4, 3, or 2). Thereis no automatic downshift when youpush the accelerator pedal to thefloor.

When you are driving, thetransmission downshifts to the lowergear under the following conditions:

The vehicle slows down to acertain speed.

You press the brake pedal.

The vehicle detects that you aredriving uphill or downhill.

The transmission also shiftsautomatically as the vehicle comes toa complete stop. It downshifts to firstgear when the vehicle speed reaches6 mph (10 km/h) or less.


502

12/07/20 11:35:21 31TK4640_507

＋

When you are in sequential shiftmode, and the vehicle is stopped,pull the (right) paddle shifter toshift to second gear. You will see‘‘M2’’ in the display. Starting insecond gear helps to reducewheelspin in deep snow or on aslippery surface.

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you goodfuel economy and effectiveemissions control. The followingshift points are recommended:

Normal acceleration

15 mph (24 km/h)25 mph (40 km/h)40 mph (64 km/h)45 mph (72 km/h)50 mph (81 km/h)

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th5th to 6th


Starting in Second Gear Recommended Shift Points

Driving

503

12/07/20 11:35:26 31TK4640_508

－

－

The SH-AWD torque distributionmonitor on the multi-informationdisplay shows you the amount oftorque being sent to the wheels.Each wheel right front (RF), leftfront (LF), right rear (RR), and leftrear (LR) has its own torqueindicator.

Each torque indicator is displayed asa bar graph divided into 5 segments.The number of segments representsthe amount of torque distributed toeach wheel.

When there is only a slight change intorque distribution while driving,such as cruising on level roads at thesame speed, the torque distributionmonitor may stop displaying theamount of torque. This is not asystem problem. The monitor willshow the amount if the systemsenses any change in torquedistribution.

While the SH-AWD system helps toenhance the vehicle’s drivingstability in all situations, it is stillyour responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

The super handling-all wheel drive(SH-AWD) system is a full time all-wheel-drive system thatautomatically controls and transfersvarying amounts of engine torque toall wheels independently, accordingto the driving conditions.

If equipped SH-AWD Torque DistributionMonitor

Super Handling-All Wheel Drive (SH-AWD ) System

504

TORQUE INDICATOR

TORQUE INDICATOR


TM

12/07/20 11:35:31 31TK4640_509

Your vehicle still has normal front-wheel drive with vehicle stabilityassist (VSA), but does not have theadvantages of SH-AWD. Have yourvehicle checked by a dealer as soonas possible.

If the SH-AWD indicator begins toblink while driving, it indicates thedifferential temperature is too high.

You will also see an ‘‘SH-AWD DIFFTEMP. HIGH’’ message on themulti-information display.

If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe, park the vehicleand shift to Park (automatic), and let

the engine idle until the indicatorgoes out. If the indicator does not goout, take your vehicle to a dealer tohave it checked.

If the SH-AWD indicator on theinstrument panel stays on, and the‘‘CHECK SH-AWD SYSTEM’’message also appears on the multi-information display, there is aproblem with the SH-AWD system.

Super Handling-All Wheel Drive (SH-AWD ) SystemD

riving

505

TM

12/07/20 11:35:37 31TK4640_510

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly, oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the vehicle frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission.

Make sure the moonroof and thewindows are closed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the trunk or take them with you.

Lock the doors.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

Check the indicator on theinstrument panel to verify that thesecurity system is set.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb. If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, put it in first gear.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb. If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, put it in reverse gear.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

If you are unable to stop theengine normally when the vehicle isparked (in the Park position on theautomatic transmission models), see

on page.192


Parking Tips


Parking

506

NOTE:

12/07/20 11:35:46 31TK4640_511

Your vehicle is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The emergencybrake assist system increases thestopping force when you depress thebrake pedal hard in an emergencysituation. The anti-lock brake system(ABS) helps you retain steeringcontrol when braking very hard.

Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, reduces their effectiveness andreduces brake pad life. In addition,fuel economy can be reduced. It alsokeeps your brake lights on all thetime, confusing drivers behind you.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

Check your brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious and alert in your driving.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

All four brakes have audible brakewear indicators.

Braking System Design

Brake Pad Wear Indicators

Braking SystemD

riving

507

12/07/20 11:35:52 31TK4640_512

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the wheels fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

The electronic brake distribution(EBD) system, which is part of theABS, also balances the front-to-rearbraking distribution according tovehicle loading.

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

If this indicator comes on, the anti-lock function of the braking systemhas shut down. The brakes still worklike a conventional system, butwithout anti-lock. You should haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before theABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

If the ABS indicator comes on whiledriving, test the brakes as shown onpage .

When the ABS indicator comes on,you will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABSSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display.

598

You should never pump the brake pedal.

ABS Indicator

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

508

12/07/20 11:35:59 31TK4640_513

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the EBD system may alsobe shut down.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock.

It only helps with thesteering control during braking.

598

Important Safety Reminders

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stopABS does not reduce the time or

distance it takes to stop thevehicle.

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)D

riving

509

12/07/20 11:36:05 31TK4640_514

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)system helps to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering if the vehicle turnsmore or less than desired. It alsoassists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose orslippery road surfaces. It does thisby regulating the engine’s output,and by selectively applying thebrakes.

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

When VSA is off, the VSA OFFindicator comes on as a reminder.

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA system indicator blink.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times. There may alsobe some noise from the VSAhydraulic system. You will also seethe VSA system indicator blink.

The main function of theVSA system is generally known asElectronic Stability Control (ESC).The system also includes a tractioncontrol function.

If this indicator comes on whiledriving, you will also see a ‘‘CHECKVSA SYSTEM’’ and/or ‘‘CHECKHILL START ASSIST SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay. Drive cautiously as the VSAmay not be functioning. WithoutVSA, your vehicle will have normalbraking and cornering ability, but itwill not have VSA traction andstability enhancement. Also, the VSAOFF switch will not operate. Pull tothe side of the road when it is safe,and turn off the engine. Reset thesystem by restarting the engine. Ifthe VSA system indicator stays on,

have the VSA system inspected byyour dealer.

If there is a problem with the hillstart assist system, the VSA systemindicator comes on and stays on. Themulti-information display shows a‘‘CHECK HILL START ASSISTSYSTEM’’ message.

With the VSA system indicator on,you may not be able to stop theengine even if you park the vehiclesafely. To stop the engine, see

on page.192

On models with SH-AWD


Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

VSA OFF Indicator


Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

510

NOTE:

12/07/20 11:36:14 31TK4640_515

CONTINUED

If the low tire pressure/TPMSindicator comes on (see page ),or the multi-information displayshows a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’message with the indicator flashing(see page ), the VSA systemautomatically turns on even if theVSA system is turned off with theVSA OFF switch. In this case, youcannot turn the VSA system off bypressing the VSA OFF switch again.

Without VSA, your vehicle will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

This switch is under the driver’s sidevent. To turn the VSA system on andoff, press and hold it until you hear abeep.

When VSA is off, the VSA OFFindicator comes on as a reminder.Press and hold the switch again. Itturns the system back on.

The VSA switch location varies onmodels.

514

517


VSA OFF Switch

Driving

511

VSA OFF SWITCH

U.S. Advance Package model is shown.

12/07/20 11:36:21 31TK4640_516

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

In certain unusual conditions whenyour vehicle gets stuck in shallowmud or fresh snow, it may be easierto free it with the VSA temporarilyswitched off. When the VSA systemis off, the traction control system isalso off. You should only attempt tofree your vehicle with the VSA off ifyou are not able to free it when theVSA is on.

Immediately after freeing yourvehicle, be sure to switch the VSA onagain. We do not recommend drivingyour vehicle with the VSA andtraction control systems switched off.

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are of the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.

Your vehicle is equipped with a hillstart assist feature to help preventthe vehicle from rolling on inclinesas you move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator.

To activate hill start assist, you mustcome to a complete stop and makesure the shift lever is either in D or Swhen facing uphill, or reverse whenfacing downhill. This feature beginsworking a few seconds after you arein the correct gear position. Releasethe brake pedal. The brakes remainengaged briefly to keep the vehiclefrom rolling forward or backward.Gently apply the accelerator pedal asin normal driving. Hill start assist willrelease brake pressure gradually asyou accelerate.

574

On models with SH-AWD


VSA and Tire Sizes Hill Start Assist

512

12/07/20 11:36:28 31TK4640_517

Hill start assist may not prevent yourvehicle from rolling downhill on avery steep or slippery slope, and willnot operate on small inclines.

Hill start assist is not a replacementfor the parking brake. If parkingyour vehicle, ensure that thetransmission is in park, and/or theparking brake is fully applied beforeexiting the vehicle. For vehicles withmanual transmission, it isrecommended that you turn off theengine before exiting the vehicle.

If the VSA system indicator comeson with a ‘‘CHECK HILL STARTASSIST SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display, there maybe a problem with the hill start assist.The VSA also may not function.Have your vehicle inspected by yourdealer.

Hill start assist will still operate evenwhen VSA is switched off.

On manual transmission models:You must come to a complete stop,press the clutch pedal, and shift tofirst gear when facing uphill, orreverse when facing downhill.Release the brake pedal. The brakesremain engaged briefly to keep thevehicle from rolling forward orbackward while you move your footfrom the brake pedal to theaccelerator pedal. Gently apply theaccelerator pedal whilesimultaneously releasing the clutchpedal, as in normal driving. Hill startassist will release brake pressuregradually as you accelerate.

Hill start assist will also hold brakingbriefly if you select the neutral gearposition with the clutch pedaldepressed when facing uphill.

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), SystemD

riving

513

12/07/20 11:36:34 31TK4640_518

Your vehicle is equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that turns on every time you start theengine and monitors the pressure inyour tires while driving.

If you think you can safely drive ashort distance to a service station,proceed slowly to the station, theninflate the tire to the recommendedpressure shown on the driver’sdoorjamb.

If the tire is flat, or if the tirepressure is too low to continuedriving, replace the tire with thecompact spare tire (see page ).

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Because tire pressure varies bytemperature and other conditions,the low tire pressure/TPMSindicator may come on unexpectedly.

When the low tire pressure/TPMSindicator is on, one or more of yourtires is significantly underinflated.You should stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure as indicatedon the vehicle’s tire informationplacard.

Each tire has its own pressuresensor (not including the spare tire).If the air pressure of a tire becomessignificantly low, the sensor in thattire immediately sends a signal thatcauses the low tire pressure/TPMSindicator in the instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, you will seewhich tire is losing pressure on themulti-information display along witha ‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’message.

It is possible that the pressuresshown on the multi-informationdisplay and the pressures youmanually measure are slightlydifferent.

If the difference is significant or youcannot make the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator and message on themulti-information display go out afterinflating the tires to the specifiedvalues, have your dealer check thesystem as soon as possible.

583

Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

514

12/07/20 11:36:41 31TK4640_519

＊

Although your tire pressure ismonitored, you must manually checkthe tire pressures monthly.

Each tire, including the spare, shouldbe checked monthly when thevehicle is cold, and set to therecommended inflation pressure asspecified on the vehicle placard andin the owner’s manual (see page

).

For example, if you check and fillyour tires in a warm area, then drivein extremely cold weather, the tirepressure will be lower thanmeasured and could be underinflatedand cause the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on. Or, ifyou check and adjust your tirepressure in cooler conditions, anddrive into extremely hot conditions,the tire may become overinflated.However, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will not come on ifthe tires are overinflated.

Refer to page for tire inflationguidelines.

If there is a problem with the TPMS,this indicator begins to flash. It stopsflashing after approximately 1minute, then stays on. You will alsosee a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ).

To select the tire pressure monitor,press the INFO button several timeswith the ignition switch in the ON(II) position or with the power modeON.

You will see the above display on themulti-information display when eachtire pressure is normal.

517

570

568

CONTINUED

Tire Pressure Monitor

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)D

riving

515

U.S.

Example: Technology Package isshown.

12/07/20 11:36:50 31TK4640_520

＊

Each tire pressure is shown in PSI(U.S. models) or in kPa (Canadianmodels).

If any of the tires has low pressure,the tire pressure monitor also showsthe above message and each tirepressure to warn you about the lowtire pressure when you select thedisplay by pressing the INFO buttonseveral times.

Each tire has its own pressuresensor (not including the spare tire).If the air pressure of a tire becomessignificantly low, the sensor in thattire immediately sends a signal thatcauses the low tire pressure/TPMSindicator in the instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, you will seewhich tire is losing pressure on themulti-information display along witha ‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’message.


and .

:

184 187


516

Canadian model

Canada

This shows that the front left tire islosing pressure. U.S. model

Example: Technology Package isshown.

12/07/20 11:36:57 31TK4640_521

If there is a problem with the TPMS,the tire pressure monitor shows a‘‘TPMS ERROR’’ message and thetire pressure readings are notdisplayed. If this happens, you willfirst see a system warning message‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ on themulti-information display.

If there is a problem with the TPMS,you will see the above message onthe multi-information display.

If the low tire pressure/TPMSindicator comes on, or the multi-information display shows a‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message,the VSA system automatically turnson even when the VSA system isturned off by pressing the VSA OFFswitch (see page ). If thishappens, you cannot turn the VSAsystem off by pressing the VSA OFFswitch again.

When you restart the vehicle withthe compact spare tire, the TPMSsystem message will also bedisplayed on the multi-informationdisplay after several miles(kilometers) driving.

If you see this message, the systemis off and is not monitoring the tirepressures. Have the system checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.

Also, the low tire pressure/TPMSindicator begins to flash, then stayson (see page ).

511

515

TPMS System Failure

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)D

riving

517

U.S. model Canadian model

12/07/20 11:37:05 31TK4640_522

If you have a flat tire, the low tirepressure/TPMS indicator and tiremonitor indicator will come on.Replace the indicated flat tire withthe compact spare tire (see page

).

After the flat tire is replaced with thespare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator stays on whiledriving. After several miles(kilometers) driving, this indicatorbegins to flash, then stays on again.You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TPMSSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display. This is normal;the system cannot monitor the sparetire pressure. Manually check thespare tire pressure to be sure it iscorrect.

This indicator and the warningmessage on the multi-informationdisplay will go off, after several miles(kilometers) driving, when the spare

tire is replaced with the specifiedregular tire equipped with the tirepressure monitor sensor.

Never use a puncture-repairing agentin a flat tire. If used, you will have toreplace the tire pressure sensor.Have the flat tire repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible.

If the low tire pressure/TPMSindicator and the low tire position onthe low tire pressure monitor do notgo out after inflating the tires to thespecified values, have your dealercheck the system as soon as possible.

Each wheel (except the compactspare tire wheel) is equipped with atire pressure sensor. You must useTPMS specific wheels. It isrecommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by your dealer orqualified technician.


583

628

Changing a Tire with TPMS


518

12/07/20 11:37:12 31TK4640_523

If the system detects vehicles inadjacent lanes, it automaticallyilluminates the appropriate indicatorto provide assistance when youchange lanes. It is not a substitutefor visual confirmation that it is safeto change lanes.

The blind spot information system(BSI) is designed to assist you whenyou are changing lanes.

If equipped

Blind Spot Information System (BSI)D

riving

519

Failure to visually confirm that itis safe to change lanes beforedoing so may result in a crashand serious injury or death.Do not rely only on the blindspot information system whenchanging lanes.

Always look in your mirrors, toeither side of your vehicle, andbehind you for other vehiclesbefore changing lanes.

12/07/20 11:37:17 31TK4640_524

A: Approximately 1.6 ft. (0.5 m)B: Approximately 10 ft. (3 m)C: Approximately 10 ft. (3 m)

BSI system is designed to detectvehicles in specified alert zonesadjacent to your vehicle, particularlyin harder to see areas commonlyknown as ‘‘blind spots.’’

When BSI detects a vehicle in analert zone, a BSI alert indicatorcomes on near the correspondingoutside rearview mirror.

While your vehicle is movingforward at a speed between 6 mph(10 km/h) and 100 mph (160 km/h),the BSI alert indicator comes onunder either of the followingconditions:

The system will not alert you to allvehicles in blind spot zones (such asvehicles you have just passed whichyou should already be aware of)unless it remains in the alert zone forapproximately 2 or more seconds.

Another vehicle overtakes you,entering the alert zone frombehind, at a speed that differsfrom your vehicle’s speed by nomore than 31 mph (50 km/h).

You pass a vehicle at a speed thatdiffers from that vehicle’s speedby no more than 12 mph (20km/h). The indicator comes onapproximately 2 seconds after thevehicle enters the alert zone.

While the system is on, BSI is activewhenever the shift lever is in the Dor S position.

Blind Spot Information System (BSI)

BSI System Operation

520

A

B

C

ALERTZONE

12/07/20 11:37:25 31TK4640_525

CONTINUED


riving

521

BSI INDICATOR

BSI OFF BUTTON


BSI ALERT INDICATOR

LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE


12/07/20 11:37:30 31TK4640_526

The BSI alert indicator starts to blinkas a reminder if you move the turnsignal lever in the direction of thedetected vehicle.

Radar sensors, located underneatheach corner of the rear bumper,detect objects. Do not cover this areawith labels or stickers of any kind.Always keep this area free of anykind of dirt every time you get in thevehicle.

Impacts to the radar sensors or thearea around them can affect systemperformance. If an impact occurs,have the system checked by yourdealer.


522

ALERT INDICATORLEVER

ILLUMINATE

BLINK

12/07/20 11:37:35 31TK4640_527

Like all assistance systems, BSI haslimitations. Over-reliance on BSI mayresult in a collision. Always look inyour mirrors, to either side of yourvehicle, and behind you for othervehicles before changing lanes.

The BSI alert indicators may notilluminate under the followingcircumstances:

The speed difference betweenyour vehicle and a vehicleapproaching from behind isgreater than 31 mph (50 km/h).

A vehicle is parked in a side lane.

The speed difference betweenyour vehicle and the vehicle youare passing is greater than 6 mph(10 km/h).

An object not detected by theradar sensors approaches orpasses your vehicle.

BSI may be adversely affected underthe following circumstances:

When objects such as guard rails,poles, trees, etc., are detected.

When an object that doesn’treflect radio waves well, such as amotorcycle, is in the alert zone.

A vehicle is behind or approachingyour vehicle while on a curvedroad.

A vehicle is moving from a far laneto the adjacent lane.

CONTINUED


Important Precautions Limitations

Driving

523

12/07/20 11:37:45 31TK4640_528

The orientation of the sensors hasbeen changed.

Bad weather conditions, such asheavy rain, snow and fog.

The system picks up externalelectrical interference.

The rear bumper has beendeformed, or improperly repaired.

The system is for your convenience.Even if an object is within the alertzone, the system may not detect it,depending on its shape.Always look in your mirrors, toeither side of your vehicle, andbehind you for other vehicles beforechanging lanes.


524

POLE OR TREEEXAMPLES

: BSI Alert indicator is on

: BSI Alert indicator is off

MOTORCYCLE

GUARD RAIL

12/07/20 11:37:52 31TK4640_529

＊

＊

＊

To turn the system off, press andhold the BSI OFF button when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position. The BSI indicator on theinstrument panel glows amber,indicating that the system is turnedoff. The multi-information displayindicates that the system is off.

To turn the system on again, pressand hold the same button. The BSIindicator on the instrument panelturns off. The multi-informationdisplay indicates that the system ison.

When the ignition switch is turnedto the ON (II) position, the systemwill be in the previously selected ONor OFF setting.


and .

:

184 187


BSI OFF Button

Driving

525

U.S. model is shown. Canadian model is shown.

12/07/20 11:37:59 31TK4640_530

－

＊

＊

＊

＊

Multi-InformationDisplay Message

BSI IndicatorSystemStatus

ON

OFF

ON/OFF

OFF

Description

2

When you press and hold the BSI OFF button with the ignition switch in the ON (II) position, aBSI ON or OFF message is displayed on the multi-information display for about 5 seconds.The BSI indicator will remain on while the system is off.The BSI alert indicator illuminates or flashes according to the system status.A chime sounds to indicate that the system has been turned ON or OFF.

1: ON mode on models with keyless access system (see pages 184 and 187).If while driving, mud, snow, or ice accumulates in the vicinity of sensor:

The system may shut downThe BSI indicator illuminates, a message is displayed on the multi-information display, and achime sounds.

The BSI indicator will turn off and the system will return to normal once the obstacle is removed,and you begin to drive.Always keep the area around the radar sensors clean. BSI may not operate properly if the sensorsare obstructed.The BSI alert indicator:

May come on when a vehicle enters one of the alert zones, even if this message is displayed.May not come on due to obstruction (splashes, etc.) even if this message is not displayed.

2: System status may remain on even when the BLIND SPOT NOT AVAILABLE message isdisplayed.

If the system is faulty, the BSI indicator illuminates and a message is displayed on the multi-information display.Have your vehicle inspected by your Acura dealer.

1


BSI Status Displays

526

12/07/20 11:38:08 31TK4640_531


628


riving

527

12/07/20 11:38:11 31TK4640_532

Your vehicle is not designed to tow atrailer. Attempting to do so can voidyour warranties.

Your vehicle is not designed to betowed behind a motor home. If yourvehicle needs to be towed in anemergency, see page .607

Towing a Trailer, Towing Your Vehicle

Towing a Trailer Towing Your Vehicle

528

12/07/20 11:38:16 31TK4640_533

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

This section also includesinstructions on how to read theMaintenance Minder messages onthe multi-information display, andinstructions for simple maintenancetasks you may want to take care ofyourself.

If you have the skills and tools toperform more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the service manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

U.S. Vehicles: ......................Maintenance Safety . 530.................Maintenance Minder . 531

..............................Fluid Locations . 541......Engine Compartment Covers . 542

........................Adding Engine Oil . 543Changing the Engine Oil and

...........................................Filter . 544..............................Engine Coolant . 546

....................Windshield Washers . 548.......................Transmission Fluid . 549

..........Automatic Transmission . 549..............Manual Transmission . 551

................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 553....................................Timing Belt . 554

.............................................Lights . 555................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 564

.....................................Floor Mats . 565..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 566

.................................Exterior Care . 566

.................................Wiper Blades . 566...............................................Tires . 568

...................Checking the Battery . 577.............................Vehicle Storage . 578

..................................Interior Care . 579

633

Maintenance

Maintenance, replacement, orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

Maintenance

529

TM

12/07/20 11:38:22 31TK4640_534

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingwith the battery or compressed air.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Let theengine and exhaust system cooldown before touching any parts.

Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

Maintenance Safety


Injury from moving parts.

Burns from hot parts.

Carbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust.

Potential Vehicle Hazards

530

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle, or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

12/07/20 11:38:32 31TK4640_535

＊

＊

CONTINUED

Your vehicle displays engine oil lifeand maintenance service items onthe multi-information display to showyou when you should have yourdealer perform engine oilreplacement and indicatedmaintenance service.

To see the current engine oil lifedisplayed on the multi-informationdisplay, turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, and press theSEL/RESET button on the steeringwheel repeatedly until the engine oillife is displayed.


and .

Based on the engine operatingconditions, the onboard computer inyour vehicle calculates the remainingengine oil life and displays it as apercentage.

:

184 187

Maintenance Minder

Engine Oil Life Display

Maintenance

531

REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE


TM

12/07/20 11:38:38 31TK4640_536

▲ ▼

＊

＊

－－－－－－－－－－－－

Pressing either INFO button ( / )switches the display from themessage to another display. Onceyou switch the display, this messagewill go off.

Along with the message, the systemmessage indicator comes on (seepage ).

When the remaining engine oil life is15 to 6 percent, the multi-informationdisplay shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUESOON’’ message along with themaintenance item code(s) indicatingthe main and sub items required atthe time of the oil change. Refer topage for a complete list of themaintenance main items and subitems.

The remaining engine oil life isshown on the multi-informationdisplay according to this table:

The message appears on the multi-information display each time youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.


and .

72

:

540 184 187

Calculated EngineOil Life (%)100% 91%90% 81%80% 71%70% 61%60% 51%50% 41%40% 31%30% 21%20% 16%15% 11%10% 6%5% 1%

0%

DisplayedEngine Oil Life (%)

100%90%80%70%60%50%40%30%20%15%10%5%0%

Maintenance Minder

532

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM CODE

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM CODE(S)

TM

12/07/20 11:38:45 31TK4640_537

CONTINUED

When the remaining oil life is 5 to 1percent, the multi-informationdisplay shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUENOW’’ message with the samemaintenance items ‘‘SERVICE DUESOON’’ was displayed with. Whenyou see this message, have theindicated maintenance performed assoon as possible.

Press the SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel repeatedly to selectthe engine oil life information. Alongwith the ‘‘OIL LIFE’’ message, youwill see the percentage of theremaining engine oil life and themaintenance item codes on themulti-information display.

This message reminds you that yourvehicle will soon be due forscheduled maintenance.

Maintenance MinderM

aintenance

533

REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE

MAINTENANCEMAIN ITEM CODEMAIN ITEM(S) SUB ITEM(S)

MAINTENANCESUB ITEM CODE(S)

TM

12/07/20 11:38:51 31TK4640_538

▲ ▼Pressing either INFO button ( / )switches the display from themessage to another display. Onceyou switch the display, this messagewill go off.

Press the SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel repeatedly to selectthe engine oil life. The message‘‘SERVICE,’’ along with ‘‘5%,’’ and themaintenance item code are displayedon the multi-information displaywhen the calculated engine oil life is1 to 5 percent (see page ).

If the indicated maintenance serviceis not done and the remaining engineoil life reaches 0%, the multi-information display will show themessage ‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’and the maintenance item code(s).This message is displayed when thetotal distance traveled is less than 10miles (for U.S. models) or 10 km (forCanadian models) after the engineoil life became 0%.

532

Maintenance Minder

534

TM

12/07/20 11:38:57 31TK4640_539

＊

▲ ▼

＊

CONTINUED

Press the SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel repeatedly to selectthe engine oil life. The message‘‘SERVICE,’’ along with ‘‘0%,’’ and themaintenance item code are displayedon the multi-information displaywhen the calculated engine oil life is0 to 1 percent.

These messages will come on everytime you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position.

If the indicated required service isnot done and the remaining engineoil life becomes 0%, the multi-information display will show a‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ message,the total distance traveled after theremaining oil life became 0%, and themaintenance item code(s).


and .

Pressing either INFO button ( / )switches the display from themessage to another display. To seethe message again, press eitherINFO button repeatedly.

Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe display as described on page .

:

184 187

537

Maintenance MinderM

aintenance

535

U.S.

TOTAL PAST DUE DISTANCETRAVELED

MAINTENANCE CODES

Canada

TM

12/07/20 11:39:05 31TK4640_540

▲ ▼

This message is displayed againwhen you drive over 10 miles (forU.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadianmodels) after seeing the 0% message.

Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe display as described on page .

Pressing either INFO button ( / )switches the display from themessage to another display. To seethe message again, press eitherINFO button repeatedly.

All maintenance items shown on themulti-information display are in code.For an explanation of thesemaintenance codes, see page .

When you press the SEL/RESETbutton to select the engine oil life,the message ‘‘SERVICE,’’ along withthe maintenance item code(s) andthe total negative distance traveledafter the oil life became 0%, will bedisplayed on the multi-informationdisplay.

540

537

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance Main Items and SubItems

536

U.S.

MAINTENANCEMAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCESUB ITEMS

MAINTENANCEMAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCESUB ITEMS

TOTAL PAST DUE DISTANCETRAVELED

Canada

TM

12/07/20 11:39:13 31TK4640_541

＊

＊

▲

＊

Your dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the display thenext time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

Turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position.


and .

If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the Maintenance Minder asfollows:

If the engine oil life is notdisplayed, press the SEL/RESETbutton on the steering wheelrepeatedly.

Press and hold the SEL/RESETbutton on the steering wheel formore than 10 seconds. Theremaining engine oil life resetmode will be shown on the multi-information display. Select ‘‘RESET’’ by pressing the

INFO ( ) button, then press theSEL/RESET button to reset theengine oil life display. Themaintenance item code(s) willdisappear, and the engine oil lifewill reset to ‘‘100.’’ If you want tocancel the oil life reset mode,select ‘‘CANCEL.’’

3.

1.

2.

4.

:

184 187

Maintenance Minder

Resetting the Engine Oil LifeDisplay

Maintenance

537

TM

12/07/20 11:39:21 31TK4640_542

＃

Your authorized dealer knows yourvehicle best and can providecompetent, efficient service.However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Keep all receiptsas proof of completion, and have theperson who does the work fill outyour Maintenance Journal orCanadian Maintenance Log. Checkyour warranty booklet for moreinformation.

If you have the required servicedone but do not reset the display, orreset the display without doing theservice, the system will not show thecorrect maintenance intervals. Thiscan lead to serious mechanicalproblems because you will no longerhave an accurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.

We recommend using Acura partsand fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed in accordance with theintervals indicated by the multi-information display.

U.S. Vehicles:

Maintenance Minder

Important MaintenancePrecautions

538

TM

12/07/20 11:39:27 31TK4640_543

－－

－

－

－

－

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

Lights Check the operation ofall the lights monthly. See page

.

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

474

475

549

553

568

555

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

Maintenance

539

TM

12/07/20 11:39:35 31TK4640_544

＊

＊

＃

＃＊

＊

－－＃

＊

＊

Maintenance Minder

540

:

TM

If the message ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ does not appear more than 12 monthsafter the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page .

Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).

Independent of the Maintenance Minder information, replace the brakefluid every 3 years.

Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.

NOTE:

2 :

1 :

SH-AWD only

538

Maintenance Main ItemsReplace engine oilReplace engine oil and oil filterInspect front and rear brakesCheck parking brake adjustmentInspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and line (including ABS/VSA)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

Maintenance Sub ItemsRotate tiresReplace air cleaner element

If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Replace dust and pollen filterIf you drive primarily in urban areas that have highconcentrations of soot in the air from industry andfrom diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000miles (24,000 km).

Inspect drive beltReplace transmission fluidReplace transmission and transfer fluidReplace spark plugsReplace timing belt and inspect water pump

If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over110°F, 43°C), or in very low temperatures (under

20°F, 29°C), replace every 60,000 miles (U.S.)/100,000 km (Canada).

Inspect valve clearanceReplace engine coolantReplace rear differential fluid

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehiclespeeds results in higher level of mechanical (shear)stress to fluid. This requires differential fluid changesmore frequently than recommended by theMaintenance Minder. If you regularly drive yourvehicle under these conditions, have the differentialfluid changed at 7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every15,000 miles (24,000 km).

AB

Symbol Symbol

3

4

5

12

6

1

1

2

2

Main

tenance

Min

der

12/07/20 11:39:42 31TK4640_545

＊

＊

＊

＊

Fluid LocationsM

aintenance

541

WASHER FLUID(Black cap)

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

RADIATOR CAP

BRAKE FLUID(Black cap)

ENGINE COOLANTRESERVOIR

CLUTCH FLUID(ManualTransmission only)(Light gray cap)

: Located under the cover

12/07/20 11:39:45 31TK4640_546

The component parts in the enginecompartment are protected byseveral covers. You may need toremove the covers when youperform some simple maintenancework.

When reinstalling the covers, makesure the pins and tabs are in theirproper positions.

To remove the covers:

Remove the right and left enginecompartment covers by slidingthem apart.

Pull the bulkhead cover straightup to remove. When removing thecover, make sure to move thebulkhead cover slightly to the leftso that the hood latch handle doesnot get in the way.

After replacing the right enginecompartment cover, make sure thewasher fluid cap is firmly in place.

1.

2.

Engine Compartment Covers

542

RIGHT ENGINE COMPARTMENTCOVER

BULKHEAD COVER

LEFT ENGINE COMPARTMENT COVER

12/07/20 11:39:52 31TK4640_547

Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on top of the valve cover.Pour in the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment. Install the engine oilfill cap, and tighten it securely. Waita few minutes, and recheck the oillevel (see page ). Do not fillabove the upper mark; you coulddamage the engine.

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-gradedetergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements. It ishighly recommended that you useAcura Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection.

Make sure the API Certification Sealsays ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.

Acura Motor Oil is the preferred0W-20 lubricant for your vehicle.0W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your vehicle toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.

474

CONTINUED

Recommended Engine Oil

2WD models:

Adding Engine OilM

aintenance

543

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

Ambient TemperatureAPI CERTIFICATION SEAL

12/07/20 11:40:00 31TK4640_548

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Sealand it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals shown on the multi-information display.

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect the engine or transmissionperformance and durability.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the multi-information display. The oil and filtercollect contaminants that candamage your engine if they are notremoved regularly.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledtechnician.

Acura Motor Oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. 5W-20 oil is formulated for year-roundprotection of your vehicle to improvecold weather starting and fueleconomy.

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Changing the Engine Oil andFilter

SH-AWD models:

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

544

Ambient Temperature

12/07/20 11:40:08 31TK4640_549

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.Make sure to clean off any dirtand dust on the contacting surfaceof a new oil filter.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten the drain bolt to:

Refill the engine with therecommended oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Remove the oil filter, and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.

Make sure the oil filter gasket isnot stuck to the contacting surfaceof the engine. If it is, remove itbefore installing a new oil filter.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

3.

5.

6.

4.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Changing the Engine Oil and FilterM

aintenance

545

OIL FILTER

DRAIN BOLT WASHER

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

12/07/20 11:40:18 31TK4640_550

Always use Honda Long-life Anti-freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolantis pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent distilledwater. Never add straight antifreezeor plain water.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine and check your work.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel on the dipstick. If necessary,add more oil.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

To access the radiator reserve tank,remove the right-side enginecompartment cover (see page ).

7.

8.

9.

542

Adding Engine Coolant

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter, Engine Coolant

546

RESERVE TANK

MINMAX

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer, and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

12/07/20 11:40:27 31TK4640_551

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Remove all engine compartmentcovers (see page ).

When the radiator and engine arecool, relieve any pressure in thecooling system by turning theradiator cap counterclockwise,without pressing down.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spill immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Put the radiator cap back on andtighten it.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Reinstall the engine compartmentcovers.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

1.

2.

4.

5.

3.

6.

7.

542

Engine CoolantM

aintenance

547

RADIATOR CAP

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

12/07/20 11:40:37 31TK4640_552

Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use.

If the washer fluid is low, a ‘‘LOWWASHER FLUID’’ message appearson the multi-information display.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.

Check the reservoir’s fluid level byremoving the cap and looking inside.

On U.S. models

On Canadian models

Windshield Washers

548

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

12/08/10 10:34:45 31TK4640_553

CONTINUED

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Start the engine, let it run until theradiator fan comes on, then shutoff the engine. For accurateresults, wait about 60 seconds (butno longer than 90 seconds) beforedoing step 2.

1.

2. 3.

4.


Transmission FluidM

aintenance

549

DIPSTICK

UPPERMARK

LOWERMARK

GUIDE

12/07/20 11:40:52 31TK4640_554

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the dipstickhole to bring it to the levelbetween the upper and lowermarks.

Always use Acura ATF DW-1(automatic transmission fluid).

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the Maintenance Minder (seepage ).

If you are not sure how to check andadd fluid, contact your dealer.

Make sure the rubber cap on thedipstick fits in the dipstick guideand that you push the dipstick inall the way.

5. 6.

531

Transmission Fluid

550

TM

Use only Acura ATF DW-1 (automatictransmission f luid). Do not mix withother transmission f luids.Using transmission f luid other thanAcura ATF DW-1 may causedeterioration in transmission operationand durability, and could result indamage to the transmission.Damage resulting f rom the use oftransmission f luid other than AcuraATF DW-1 is not covered by the Acuranew vehicle warranty.

12/07/20 11:40:59 31TK4640_555

Remove the check bolt and look fortransmission fluid coming out of thebolt hole. If a small amount of fluiddrips out of the bolt hole, reinstallthe check bolt.

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground.

If no fluid comes out, remove thefiller bolt and washer. Slowly addAcura Manual Transmission Fluid(MTF) until it starts to run out of thecheck bolt hole.

To check the transmission fluid level,remove the mounting bolts and theunder cover holding clips, then pullout the driver’s side under covercarefully.

CONTINUED

Transmission Fluid

Manual Transmission

Maintenance

551

WASHER

CHECK BOLT FILLER BOLT

12/07/20 11:41:06 31TK4640_556

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the Maintenance Minder (seepage ).

If you are not sure how to check andadd fluid, contact your dealer.

Reinstall the under cover, tighten themounting bolts securely, then putthe holding clips back in place. Makesure the under cover is installedunder the edge of the front bumper.

Pour the fluid into the filler holeslowly and carefully so you do notspill any. Clean up any spillsimmediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

Let the fluid run out until it stops,then reinstall the check bolt and thefiller bolt.

Make sure to put a new washer oneach bolt when reinstalling it.

If Acura MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 0W-20 or 5W-20viscosity motor oil with the APICertification Seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives, and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace assoon as it is convenient.

531

Transmission Fluid

552

TM

12/07/20 11:41:12 31TK4640_557

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

You need to remove the left enginecompartment cover to check thefluid level (see page ).

Check the fluid level in thereservoirs monthly. There are up totwo reservoirs, depending on themodel. They are:

Brake fluid reservoir (all models)Clutch fluid reservoir(manual transmission modelsonly)

To access the reservoirs, remove theleft engine compartment cover (seepage ).

You will also see a ‘‘LOW BRAKEFLUID’’ message on the multi-information display.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

Independent of the MaintenanceMinder information, replace thebrake fluid every 3 years.

542

542

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Brake Fluid

Maintenance

553

MAX

MIN

12/07/20 11:41:20 31TK4640_558

－－

Manual Transmission only

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If it is not, addbrake fluid to bring it up to that level.Use the same fluid specified for thebrake system.

A low fluid level can indicate a leakin the clutch system. Have thissystem inspected as soon as possible.

The timing belt should be replacedaccording to the MaintenanceMinder (see page ).

Replace the timing belt every 60,000miles (U.S.) or every 100,000 km(Canada) if you regularly drive yourvehicle in any of the followingconditions:

In very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C).In very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C).

531

Brake and Clutch Fluid, Timing Belt

Clutch Fluid Timing Belt

554

MAX

MIN

TM

12/07/20 11:41:27 31TK4640_559

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk, readjustment may be required.Adjustments should be done by yourdealer or another qualifiedtechnician.

Your vehicle has halogen high beamheadlight bulbs which are also usedfor the daytime running light.Handle it by its base and protect theglass from contact with your skin orhard objects. If you touch the glass,clean it with denatured alcohol and aclean cloth.

Open the hood.

Remove all engine compartmentcovers (see page ).

The low beam headlight bulbs are atype of high voltage discharge tube.High voltage can remain in thecircuit even with the light switch offand the key removed (or the vehicleis in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) modeon models with keyless accesssystem). Because of this, you shouldnot attempt to examine or change alow beam headlight bulb yourself. Ifa low beam headlight bulb fails, takethe vehicle to your dealer to have itreplaced.

If you are replacing the bulb onthe driver’s side, remove theholding clips with a flat-tipscrewdriver. Then remove theupper part of the air intake duct bypulling it straight up.

1.

2.542

CONTINUED

Headlight Aiming

Low Beam Headlight BulbReplacement

Replacing a High BeamHeadlight/Daytime RunningLight Bulb

LightsM

aintenance

555

HOLDING CLIP

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil,perspiration, or a scratch on the glasscan cause the bulb to overheat andshatter.

12/07/20 11:41:36 31TK4640_560

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

Remove the bulb by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,and turn it one-quarter turnclockwise to lock it in place.

To change a bulb on thepassenger’s side, remove theengine coolant reserve tank bypulling it out of its stay.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Install the upper part of the airintake duct securely. Reinstall theholding clips.

(Driver’s side)

Install all engine compartmentcovers.

Install the engine coolant reservetank.

(Passenger’s side)

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

3.9.

10.

Lights

556

RESERVE TANK BULB

CONNECTORSTAY

12/07/20 11:41:46 31TK4640_561

Start the engine. If you arereplacing a driver’s side bulb, turnthe steering wheel all the way tothe right. If you are replacing apassenger’s side bulb, turn thesteering wheel to the left. Turn offthe engine.

Use a wrench to remove themounting bolts, and remove theholding clip with a flat-tipscrewdriver.

Use a flat-tip screwdriver toremove the holding clips from theedge of the inner fender cover,and pull the inner fender coverback.

Pull down the under cover fromthe bumper carefully.

3.2.

1.

4.

CONTINUED

Replacing the Front Side MarkerLight Bulb

LightsM

aintenance

557

HOLDING CLIP

UNDER COVER

BOLT

HOLDING CLIP

BOLT

12/07/20 11:41:54 31TK4640_562

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.


Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of its socket.

Install the new bulb in the socketby pushing it straight in the socketuntil it bottoms.

Insert the socket into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

Push the under cover in place andset the inner fender cover in theoriginal position. Install the boltsand tighten them securely. Inserteach holding clip, and lock it bypushing on its center.

5.

6.

7.

8.1.

9.

10.

Replacing a Front Turn Signal/Parking Light Bulb

Lights

558

SOCKETBULB

12/07/20 11:42:01 31TK4640_563

Remove the socket from the lightassembly by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise.



Use a flat-tip screwdriver toremove the holding clips from theedge of the inner fender cover,and pull the inner fender coverback. Remove the bulb by pulling it

straight out of its socket.

3.2. 4.

5.

CONTINUED

LightsM

aintenance

559

HOLDING CLIP COVER

HOLDING CLIP UNDER COVER SOCKET

BOLT

BOLT

BULB

12/07/20 11:42:08 31TK4640_564

Your vehicle uses halogen lightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its plastic case, and protect theglass from contact with your skin orhard objects. If you touch the glass,clean it with denatured alcohol and aclean cloth.


The fog lights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk, readjustment may be required.Adjustment should be done by yourdealer or another qualifiedtechnician.

Install the new bulb in the socketby pushing it straight in the socketuntil it bottoms.



Insert the socket into the lightassembly. Turn it clockwise tolock it in place.

6.

7.

8.

9.

1.Replacing a Front Fog Light Bulb

Lights

560

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil,perspiration, or a scratch on the glasscan cause the bulb to overheat andshatter.

12/07/20 11:42:16 31TK4640_565

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

Remove the bulb by turning itabout one-quarter turncounterclockwise.



Use a flat-tip screwdriver toremove the holding clips from theedge of the inner fender cover,and pull the inner fender coverback.

4.

5.

3.2.

CONTINUED

LightsM

aintenance

561

HOLDING CLIP

UNDER COVER

COVER BOLT

HOLDING CLIP

BOLT

CONNECTOR

BULB

12/07/20 11:42:24 31TK4640_566

Remove the nuts from the studbolts with a socket or wrench.

Open the trunk.Remove the screw in the center ofthe holding clip on the side of thetrunk lining. Pull the lining back.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,and turn it one-quarter turnclockwise to lock it in place.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Turn on the fog lights to test thenew bulb.


1. 2.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Lights

Replacing Rear Bulbs

562

SCREW

NUTS

12/07/20 11:42:33 31TK4640_567

Push a new bulb straight into thesocket until it bottoms, andreinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.


Reinstall the trunk lining. Makesure it is installed under the edgeof the trunk seal.

Put the holding clip into the holeon the side of the trunk lining.Reinstall the screw.

Determine which of the threebulbs is burned out: back-up light,turn signal, or side marker.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise,and pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.

Pull the taillight assembly straightback out of the body.

6.

7.

8.

9.

5.

4.3.

LightsM

aintenance

563

BULB SOCKET

12/07/20 11:42:41 31TK4640_568

Each outside mirror has side turnsignal lights. The lights should bereplaced by your dealer.

This light should be replaced by yourdealer.

The license plate has two lightsabove it. The bulbs should bereplaced by your dealer.

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air-dry beforeyou use the vehicle.

Dirt build-up around the openings ofthe seat belt anchors can cause thebelts to retract slowly. Wipe theopenings with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

Lights, Cleaning the Seat Belts

Side Turn Signal Lights

High-mount Brake Light

Rear License Plate Light Bulbs

Cleaning the Seat Belts

564

OPENING

12/07/20 11:42:49 31TK4640_569

The floor mats that came with yourvehicle hook over the floor matanchors. This keeps the floor matsfrom sliding forward (possiblyinterfering with the pedals), orbackwards (making the frontpassenger’s weight sensorsineffective).

If you remove a floor mat, make sureto re-anchor it when you put it backin your vehicle.

If you use non-Acura floor mats,make sure they fit properly and thatthey can be used with the floor matanchors. Do not put additional floormats on top of the anchored mats.

To lock or unlock each anchor, turnthe knob.

Make sure the rear floor mats arealso properly hooked. If not, the floormat will interfere with the seatoperation and make the frontpassenger’s weight sensorsineffective.

Floor MatsM

aintenance

565

FLOOR MAT ANCHORS

DRIVER’S SIDE FLOOR MAT REAR PASSENGER’S FLOOR MAT

Unlock

Lock

Unlock

Lock

FLOOR MAT ANCHOR

12/07/20 11:42:56 31TK4640_570

This filter removes the dust andpollen that is brought in from theoutside through the climate controlsystem.

Have your dealer replace the filterwhen this service is indicated by amaintenance message on the multi-information display. It should bereplaced every 15,000 miles (24,000km) if you drive primarily in urbanareas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air, or if the flow fromthe climate control system becomesless than usual.

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every 6 months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, areas that aregetting hard, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

To replace a wiper blade:

Raise each wiper arm off thewindshield, lifting the driver’s sidefirst, then the passenger’s side.

1.

Dust and Pollen Filter Wiper BladesExterior Care

Dust and Pollen Filter, Exterior Care, Wiper Blades

566

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and wiper arms.

Chemical solvents and strong cleanerscan damage the paint, metal, andplastic on your vehicle.

12/07/20 11:43:04 31TK4640_571

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield, the passenger’sside first, then the driver’s side.

Remove the blade from its holderby grabbing the tabbed end of theblade. Pull up firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold the lock tab inwhile you push the blade assemblytoward the base of the arm.

When replacing a wiper blade,make sure not to drop the wiperblade or wiper arm down on thewindshield.

3. 5.

4.

6.

7.

2.

Wiper BladesM

aintenance

567

BLADE

BLADE REINFORCEMENT STRIPLOCK TAB

12/07/20 11:43:12 31TK4640_572

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

The tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) warns you when a tirepressure is low. See page formore information on the TPMS.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

514

Tires

Inflation Guidelines

568

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

12/07/20 11:43:19 31TK4640_573

Even though your vehicle isequipped with TPMS, werecommend that you visually checkyour tires every day. If you think atire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) permonth. Remember to check thespare tire at the same time.

Check the air pressures when thetires are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at least 3hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km). Add or release air, if needed, tomatch the recommended cold tirepressures on the next page.

If you check air pressure when thetires are hot [driven for several miles(kilometers)], you will see readings 4to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreadings. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the recommendedcold air pressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

TiresM

aintenance

569

12/07/20 11:43:24 31TK4640_574

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold tire pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

For additional technical information,see page .619

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure forNormal Driving




SH-AWD and SH-AWD with TechnologyPackage models

TL and TL with Technology Packagemodels

TL Special Edition (2WD), TL withAdvance Package and Canadian ElitePackage models

SH-AWD with Advance Package,SH-AWD Special Edition, and CanadianSH-AWD Elite Package models

Recommended Tire Pressures

Tires

570

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

P245/50R17 98V32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

34 psi (235 kPa ,2.4 kgf/cm )P245/40R19 94V34 psi (235 kPa ,2.4 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )P245/45R18 96V

P245/45R18 96V32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

Rear:

Front:

Rear:

Front:

Rear:

Front:

Rear:

Front:

13/08/08 17:00:03 31TK4650_575

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

We strongly recommend that you donot drive faster than the postedspeed limits and conditions allow. Ifyou ever drive in a sanctionedcompetitive event at sustained highspeeds, be sure to adjust the cold tirepressures as shown below. If you donot, excessive heat can build up andcause sudden tire failure.

Tire pressure for high speed drivingis the same as for normal driving.For speeds over 112 mph or 180

km/h:

For speeds over 99 mph or 160km/h:

CONTINUED

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure forHigh Speed Driving

Cold Tire Pressure forHigh Speed Driving

Tire Size

TL and TL with Technology Packagemodels

TL Special Edition (2WD), TL withAdvance Package, Canadian ElitePackage, SH-AWD, and SH-AWD withTechnology Package models

SH-AWD with Advance Package,SH-AWD Special Edition, and CanadianSH-AWD Elite Package models

Tires

High Speed Driving Tire Inspection

Maintenance

571

39 psi (270 kPa ,2.7 kgf/cm )

39 psi (270 kPa ,2.7 kgf/cm )P245/40R19 94V

32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

35 psi (240 kPa ,2.4 kgf/cm )P245/45R18 96V

Front:

Rear:

Front:

Rear:

13/08/08 17:00:15 31TK4650_576

Your tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see a 1/2inch (12.7 mm) wide band across thetread. This shows there is less than1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left onthe tire.

A tire this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

The service life of your tires isdependent on many factors,including, but not limited to, drivinghabits, road conditions, vehicleloading, inflation pressure,maintenance history, speed, andenvironmental conditions (evenwhen the tires are not in use).

In addition to your regularinspections and inflation pressuremaintenance, it is recommended thatyou have annual inspectionsperformed once the tires reach fiveyears old. It is also recommendedthat all tires, including the spare, beremoved from service after 10 yearsfrom the date of manufacture,regardless of their condition or stateof wear.

The last four digits of the TIN (tireidentification number) are found onthe sidewall of the tire and indicatethe date of manufacture (See

on page ).619

Tires

TireLabeling

Tire Service Life

572

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR

12/07/20 11:43:59 31TK4640_577

CONTINUED

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall).

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS and vehicle stability assistsystem (VSA) to work inconsistently.

The ABS and VSA system work bycomparing the speed of each wheel.When replacing tires, use the samesize originally supplied with thevehicle. Tire size and constructioncan affect wheel speed and maycause the system to activate.

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires according to themaintenance messages displayed onthe multi-information display. Movethe tires to the positions shown inthe illustration each time they arerotated. If you purchase directionaltires, rotate only front-to-back.

When the tires are rotated, makesure the air pressures are checked.

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

Tires

Replacing Tires and WheelsTire RotationTire Maintenance

Maintenance

573

Front Front

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

Improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly Acura wheel weights f or balancing.

12/07/20 11:44:08 31TK4640_578

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.

Also be sure you use only TPMSspecific wheels. If you do not, thetire pressure monitoring system willnot work.

Replacement wheels are available atyour dealer.

See page for DOT tire qualitygrading information, and page

for tire size information.

Wheels:

Tires:

:

619

617

Special Edition, AdvancePackage and Canadian ElitePackage

On 2WD Models

On SH-AWD Models

On 2WD Models

On SH-AWD Models

Wheel and Tire Specifications

Tires

574

17 x 8.0J18 x 8.0J

18 x 8.0J19 x 8.0J

P245/50R17 98VP245/45R18 96V

P245/45R18 96VP245/40R19 94V

(TPMS)

(TPMS)

(TPMS)

(TPMS)

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

13/04/02 19:22:25 31TK4640_579

＃＋

＊

＊

CONTINUED

This tire chain is available at manyauto supply stores. To find a localstore that carries the chain, callQuality Chain Corp at 1-800-843-8824.To order the tire chain online, go to

, and enteryour vehicle information. When youinstall the chains, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tightly as you can.Drive slowly with the chains installed.

Rubber chain adjusters, ortensioners, must be used toprevent the chains fromcontacting the body or thechassis.

If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas original tires. Mount snow tires onall four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

Mount tire chains on your tires whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Install them only on thefront tires. Do not use chains on therear tires.

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, we strongly recommendusing this Quality Chain Corp. tirechain:

Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

:

www.qualitychaincorp.com

Tires

Premium Cobra Cable Chain1042P with accessory

adjusters

Winter Driving Snow Tires

Tire Chains

Maintenance

575

12/07/20 11:44:26 31TK4640_580

Clean the wheels as you would therest of the exterior. Wash them withthe same solution, and rinse themthoroughly.

If you ever hear the chainscontacting the body or chassis, stopand investigate. If the chains haveloosened, retighten them. Make surethey do not contact the brake linesor suspension.

Remove the chains as soon as youbegin driving on cleared roads.

Alloy wheels have a protective clear-coat that keeps the wheel fromcorroding and tarnishing. Cleaningthe wheels with harsh chemicals(including some commercial wheelcleaners) or a stiff brush can damagethe clear-coat. To clean the wheels,use a mild detergent and a soft brushor sponge.

Do not use chrome cleaners or harshchemicals that can damage thesurface finish.

Wheels

Tires

576

Using the wrong chains, or notproperly installing chains, candamage the brake lines andcause a crash in which you canbe seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding theselection and use of tire chains.

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

13/04/02 19:22:32 31TK4640_581

－

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder) afterremoving all engine compartmentcovers (see page ). To removecorrosion, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfurther corrosion.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your Acura dealer or aqualified technician.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

The sensor on the negative terminalmonitors your vehicle’s batterycondition.

If there is a problem with the sensor,you will see a ‘‘CHECK BATTERYSENSOR’’ message on the multi-information display. Have the vehiclechecked by your dealer.

To see the battery label, remove theleft side engine compartment cover(see page ).

When replacing the battery, thereplacement must be of the samespecifications.Please consult a dealer for moreinformation.

542

542

CONTINUED

Checking the Battery

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Maintenance

577

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledtechnician do the batterymaintenance.

13/08/08 17:00:23 31TK4650_582

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand trunk seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand trunk seals.

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in reverse(manual) or Park (automatic).

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Fill the fuel tank.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, the audiosystem may disable itself. The nexttime you turn on the radio, you willsee ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in thefrequency display. Use the presetbuttons to enter the code (see page

).

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected, or goes dead, the timesetting may be lost. To reset the time,see page .

The navigation system will alsodisable itself. The next time you setto the ON mode, the system willrequire you to enter a PIN before itcan be used. Refer to the navigationsystem manual.

391

390



Checking the Battery, Vehicle Storage

Vehicle Storage

578

12/07/20 11:44:50 31TK4640_583

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fans cycle on and offtwice). Preferably, do this once amonth.

Vacuum dirt and dust from theleather frequently. Pay closeattention to the pleats and seams.Clean the leather with a soft clothdampened with a 90% water and 10%neutral wool detergent solution.Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth.Remove any dust or dirt on leathersurfaces immediately.

Leather

Vehicle Storage, Interior CareM

aintenance

579

12/07/20 11:44:54 31TK4640_584

580

12/07/20 11:44:56 31TK4640_585

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 582....................Changing a Flat Tire . 583

.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 588................................Jump Starting . 591

..............If the Engine Overheats . 593.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 595..........Charging System Indicator . 596

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 597...............Brake System Indicator . 598

Opening the Fuel Fill Door....................................Manually . 599

..............................................Fuses . 600..............................Fuse Locations . 604

......................Emergency Towing . 607..........If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck . 609

Taking Care of the UnexpectedTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

581

12/07/20 11:44:59 31TK4640_586

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Check the air pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement tire should be the samesize and design, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Follow these precautions:

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some roadsurfaces. Use greater cautionwhile driving.

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare tire.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

After the flat tire is replaced withthe spare tire, the low tirepressure/TPMS indicator stays on.After several miles (kilometers)driving with the spare, thisindicator begins to flash, thenstays on again. You will also see a‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ).517

Compact Spare Tire

582

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

12/07/20 11:45:07 31TK4640_587

＊

＊

CONTINUED

If you have a flat tire while driving,pull over safely. Drive slowly alongthe shoulder until you get to an areafar away from traffic lanes.

Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park (automatic)or reverse (manual). Apply theparking brake.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch tothe LOCK (0) position. Have allpassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.


and .

Open the trunk. Raise the trunkfloor lid by lifting up on the backedge.

3.

2.

1.

:

184 187

Changing a Flat TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

583

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

12/07/20 11:45:15 31TK4640_588

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel nut wrench.

Take the tool case out of the sparetire.

Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tire out of its well.

Take the jack out of the tool kitcase.

Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tire you need tochange. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

Place blocks in front and back ofthe wheel diagonally opposite thetire you are changing.

7.

8.

6.

4.

5.

9.

Changing a Flat Tire

584

WHEEL NUT WRENCHEXTENSION

JACK WHEEL NUTWRENCH

JACKING POINTS

12/07/20 11:45:23 31TK4640_589

CONTINUED

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire. Handle thewheel nuts carefully; they may behot from driving. Place the flat tireon the ground with the outsidesurface facing up.

Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

10. 11. 12.

Changing a Flat TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

585

BRAKE HUBWHEEL NUT WRENCH

EXTENSION

12/07/20 11:45:30 31TK4640_590

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Remove the center cap beforestoring the flat tire in the trunkwell.

Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tighten thewheel nuts fully.

13. 14. 15.

16.


586

94 lbf·ft (127 N·m , 13 kgf·m)

12/07/20 11:45:36 31TK4640_591

Store the center cap in the trunk.Make sure it does not getscratched or damaged.

Store the jack and tools in the toolkit case. Place the tool kit case inthe flat tire.

To remove the spacer cone,squeeze the tabs on the wing boltto disengage it from the center ofthe spacer cone, then pull the boltdownward.

To install the wing bolt to thespacer cone, reverse thisprocedure.

Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.

Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt.

Lower the trunk floor, then closethe trunk lid.

Your vehicle’s original tire has atire pressure monitoring systemsensor. To replace a tire, refer to

(seepage ).

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

518


Changing a Tire with TPMS

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

587

SPACER CONE

TABSPACER CONE

For compactspare tire

For normaltire

WING BOLT

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

12/07/20 11:45:47 31TK4640_592

When you turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position or onmodels with keyless access system,press the engine start/stop button toset START Mode (see page ),you do not hear the normal noise ofthe engine trying to start. You mayhear a clicking sound, a series ofclicks, or nothing at all.

Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position or on models with keylessaccess system, press the enginestart/stop button to set STARTMode (see page ):

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly. Check these things:

Check the transmission interlock.If you have a manual transmission,the clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate. With anautomatic transmission, it must bein Park or neutral.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position or on models withkeyless access system, press theengine start/stop button to set ONMode (see page ). Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

184184

591

184

If the Engine Won’t Start

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

588

12/07/20 11:45:54 31TK4640_593

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position or on models with keylessaccess system, press the enginestart/stop button to set STARTMode (see page ), but the enginedoes not run.

Turn the ignition switch to theSTART (III) position or on modelswith keyless access system, pressthe engine start/stop button to setSTART Mode (see page ). Ifthe headlights do not dim, checkthe condition of the fuses. If thefuses are OK, there is probablysomething wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. See

on page .

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery isdischarged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery and terminal connec-tions (see page ). You canthen try jump starting the vehiclefrom a booster battery (see page

).

Are you using a properly codedkey or keyless access remote (onmodels with keyless accesssystem)? An improperly coded keyor keyless access remote willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).65

184

184

607

591

577

CONTINUED

The Starter Operates Normally

Emergency Towing

If the Engine Won’t StartTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

589

12/07/20 11:45:59 31TK4640_594

Do you have your keyless accesssystem remote with you? Thevehicle will not start without theremote within operating range andwith the keyless access mainswitch in the glove box turned on.

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on pages and .

If you are unable to stop theengine normally while in the Parkposition, see

on page .

You may need to hold the start/stop button down or hold the keyin the START (III) position untilthe engine starts. It can be heldfor up to 15 seconds.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the warning indicator maynot be working.

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .487 489

600

192

607


If the Engine Won’t Start

Starting theEngine

Emergency EngineStop

EmergencyTowing

590

NOTE:

12/07/20 11:46:07 31TK4640_595

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

You cannot start a vehicle with anautomatic transmission by pushingor pulling it.

Open the hood, and check thephysical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or like ice, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

To jump start your vehicle:

Turn off all the electricalaccessories: climate control, audiosystem, lights, etc. Put thetransmission in neutral (manual)or Park (automatic), and set theparking brake.

Pull up the battery terminal coverto remove. The battery terminalcover can be removed withoutremoving the left side enginecompartment cover.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Jump StartingTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

591

BATTERY TERMINAL COVER

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

12/07/20 11:46:15 31TK4640_596

＋

＋

－

Start the vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

The numbers in the illustrationshow you the order to connect thejumper cables.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourbattery. Connect the other end tothe positive ( ) terminal on thebooster battery.

Once the vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,and then from the booster battery.

Install the battery terminal cover.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until everything isdisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the engine hanger asshown. Do not connect this jumpercable to any other part of theengine.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Jump Starting

592

BOOSTERBATTERY

12/07/20 11:46:24 31TK4640_597

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

The pointer of the vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange. If it climbs to the redmark, you should determine thereason (hot day, driving up a steephill, etc.).

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in neutral(manual) or Park (automatic), andset the parking brake. Turn off allaccessories, and turn on thehazard warning lights.

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

If the vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.

You will also see a ‘‘WATER TEMPHOT’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

607

77

CONTINUED

EmergencyTowing

If the Engine OverheatsTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

593

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to the engine.

12/07/20 11:46:33 31TK4640_598

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Add coolantif the level is below the MIN mark(see onpage ).

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and checkthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

Start the engine, and set theinterior temperature to maximumheat (each temperature controlsets to ‘‘ ’’). Add coolant tothe radiator up to the base of thefiller neck. If you do not have the

proper coolant mixture available,you can add plain water.Remember to have the coolingsystem drained and refilled withthe proper mixture as soon as youcan.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

8.

9.

7.

6.

10.

11.

546

607

Adding Engine Coolant

EmergencyTowing

If the Engine Overheats

594

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

12/07/20 11:46:40 31TK4640_599

Start the engine, and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

Safely pull off the road and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning lights.

This indicator should nevercome on when the engine is

running. If it starts flashing or stayson, the oil pressure has dropped verylow or lost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible, and you shouldtake immediate action.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message onthe multi-information display whenthis indicator comes on.

The indicator notifies you of low oilpressure and does not measure theoil level. Check your vehicle’s oillevel at each refueling.

2.

3.

4.

1.

474

543

607

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Emergency Towing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

595

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

12/07/20 11:46:48 31TK4640_600

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

If the charging systemindicator comes on brightly

when the engine is running, thebattery is not being charged.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKCHARGING SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display.

Charging System Indicator

596

12/08/03 21:01:37 31TK4640_601

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,even though it may go off as youcontinue driving, have the vehiclechecked by your dealer as soon aspossible.

If this indicator comes onwhile driving, it means one

of the engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeincreased emissions. Continuedoperation may cause serious damage.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If the battery in your vehicle hasbeen disconnected or gone dead,these codes may be erased. It takesseveral days of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, the malfunctionindicator lamp may also come onwith the ‘‘D’’ indicator.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the indicator coming oncould be due to a loose or missingfuel fill cap. Tighten the cap until itclicks at least once. Tightening thecap will not turn the indicator offimmediately; it can take several daysof normal driving.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKEMISSION SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display.

CONTINUED

Readiness Code

Malfunction Indicator LampTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

597

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

12/07/20 11:47:00 31TK4640_602

＊

＊

If the fluid level is low, take yourvehicle to a dealer, and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

You will also see a ‘‘LOW BRAKEFLUID’’ message on the multi-information display.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKESYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display when thisindicator comes on.

To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position (set the power mode to ON,on models with keyless accesssystem), without starting the engine.The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks five times, the readinesscodes are not set. If possible, do nottake your vehicle for an emissionstest until the readiness codes are set.Refer to formore information (see page ).


and .

If the brake system indicator comeson while driving, the brake fluid levelis probably low. Press lightly on thebrake pedal to see if it feels normal.If it does, check the brake fluid levelthe next time you stop at a servicestation (see page ).

The brake system indicator normallycomes on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position, andas a reminder to check the parkingbrake. It will stay on if you do notfully release the parking brake.

:

626

184 187

553

Brake SystemIndicator

Emissions Testing

Malfunction Indicator Lamp, Brake System Indicator

598

CanadaU.S.

12/07/20 11:47:08 31TK4640_603

If the fuel fill door release buttondoes not work, use the release leverinside the left maintenance lid in thetrunk.

To open the fuel fill door, pull therelease lever rearward.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired byyour dealer as soon as possible (see

on page ).

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

If the ABS indicator and the VSAsystem indicator come on with thebrake system indicator, have yourvehicle inspected by your dealerimmediately.

If you also cannot unlock the trunkdue to the power door lock systemmalfunction, see page and openthe trunk manually.

607

155

Opening the Fuel Fill DoorManually

Emergency Towing

Brake System Indicator, Opening the Fuel Fill Door ManuallyTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

599

RELEASE LEVERMAINTENANCE LID

12/07/20 11:47:16 31TK4640_604

The vehicle’s fuses are contained inthree fuse boxes.

The interior fuse box is locatedunder the dashboard on the driver’sside. The fuse label is attachedunder the steering column.

The passenger’s side interior fusebox is on the lower passenger’s sidepanel. To remove the fuse box lid,put your finger in the notch on thelid, and pull it upward slightly, thenpull it toward you and take it out ofits hinges.

The under-hood fuse box is on thedriver’s side next to the air cleanerhousing.

To access the under-hood fuse box,remove the left-side enginecompartment cover (see page ).

To access the fuse box, turn theknob on the under cover one-quarterturn and pull the front of the coverstraight down to remove it from thedashboard.

542

Fuses

600

FUSE LABEL NOTCH

DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE UNDER-HOOD

AIR CLEANER HOUSING

TAB

12/07/20 11:47:24 31TK4640_605

＊

＊

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

, and , or the diagram onthe fuse box lid or the fuse label,which fuse or fuses control thatcomponent. Check those fuses first,but check all the fuses beforedeciding that a blown fuse is not thecause. Replace any blown fuses andcheck if the device works.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking at the wire inside.Removing these fuses requires aPhillips-head screwdriver.


and .

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position.Make sure the headlights and allother accessories are off.

3.

1.

2.

:604 605 606

184 187

CONTINUED

Checking and Replacing Fuses

FusesTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

601

FUSE BLOWN

12/07/20 11:47:32 31TK4640_606

Look for a blown wire inside thefuse. If it is blown, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse boxes bypulling out each one with the fusepuller provided on the back of theunder-hood fuse box cover.

Also check the combined fuse box inthe under-hood fuse box.

5.4.

Fuses

602

BLOWNFUSE PULLERBLOWN

12/07/20 11:47:37 31TK4640_607

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem with yourvehicle. Leave the blown fuse inthat circuit, and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified technician.

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate that anything is wrong.Replace the fuse with one of thecorrect rating as soon as you can.

Your vehicle has spare fuses on theback of the under-hood fuse boxcover.

6.

FusesTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

603

FUSE PULLER SPARE FUSES

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

12/07/20 11:47:43 31TK4640_608

－－－－－－

－－

－－－－－

－－－

－－－

＊＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

No. Circuits ProtectedNo.Amps. Amps.Circuits Protected

Circuits ProtectedNo. Amps.

1 11 22 12 22 32 4

2 52 6

IG MainSub Fan MotorSub Fan MotorDriver’s Side Fuse BoxMain Fan Motor

Driver’s Side Light MainWiper MotorPassenger’s Side Light Main

3 13 23 33 43 5

3 63 73 8

120 A40 A70 A40 A30 A40 A

30 A30 A

50 A40 A30 A60 A40 A30 A30 A30 A30 A

BatteryPassenger’s Side Fuse BoxEPSABS/VSA MTRABS/VSAPassenger’s Side Fuse BoxOptionHeadlight WasherSH-AWD

Rear DefrosterNot UsedNot UsedNot UsedHeater MotorHazardHorn and StopKeyless Access SystemBattery SensorIG CoilFI SubBack UpInterior LightsFI MainDBWBack Up FI ECUMG ClutchRadiator Fan Timer

456789

101112131415161718192021

40 A

40 A15 A20 A

7.5 A7.5 A15 A15 A10 A

7.5 A15 A15 A

7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A

If equipped

Used on SH-AWD models1 :2 :3 :

Used on 2WD models

1

2

1

2

3

1

1

Fuse Locations

604

UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

12/08/08 20:03:07 31TK4640_609

－

－－

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

No. Amps.

Circuits ProtectedAmps.No.

Circuits Protected

CONTINUED

101112131415161718192021222324252627

2829303132

10 A10 A

7.5 A15 A

7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A20 A20 A20 A20 A15 A20 A15 A10 A10 A

10 A7.5 A15 A

7.5 A

Blind Spot InformationSystemSH-AWDWasherWiperODSABS/VSANot UsedStarter RelayFuel Pump

7.5 A

7.5 A20 A7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A

7.5 A20 A

1

23456789

VB SOLSRSMeterACGNot UsedDaytime Running LightsA/CAccessory, Key, LockAccessoryDriver’s Power Seat SlidingMoonroofDriver’s Power Seat RecliningRear Left Power WindowFront ACC SocketDriver’s Power WindowDriver’s Side Door LockFront Left Fog LightLeft Side Small Lights(Exterior)Left Headlight High BeamTPMSLeft Headlight Low BeamNot UsedSTS

: If equipped

Fuse LocationsTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

605

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

Driver’s side

12/07/20 11:47:59 31TK4640_610

－

－

－

－

－－－

＊

＊

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

Amps.No. Circuits Protected

12

3456

10 A10 A

10 A15 A

7.5 A

Right Headlight High BeamRight Side Small Lights(Exterior)Right Front Fog LightRight Headlight Low BeamNot UsedInterior Lights

20 A

20 A

10 A20 A

10 A20 A

20 A15 A

7.5 A20 A

78

9

1011

1213

141516171819202122

Not UsedPassenger’s Power SeatRecliningPassenger’s Power SeatSlidingRight Side Door LockRear Passenger’s SidePower WindowKeyless Access SystemFront Passenger’s PowerWindowNot UsedPremium amplifierConsole ACC SocketNot UsedLumbar SupportSeat HeatersNot UsedNot UsedNot Used

: If equipped

Fuse Locations

606

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

Passenger’s side

12/07/20 11:48:05 31TK4640_611

－

－

＊

＊

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

There are two ways to tow yourvehicle:

The operatorloads your vehicle on the back of atruck.

The operator will loadyour vehicle on the back of a truck.Any other method of towing willdamage the drive system. When youcontact the towing agency, informthem a flat-bed is required.

If, due to damage, your vehicle mustbe towed with the front wheels onthe ground, do this:

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the front tires and lift them offthe ground. The rear tires remain onthe ground.

Start the engine.Shift to the D position and hold for5 seconds, then to N.Turn off the engine.

Release the parking brake.

Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.

Models equipped with thekeyless access system have anengine start/stop button insteadof an ignition switch.ACCESSORY Mode is theequivalent of ACCESSORY (I).For more information, see pages

and .

:

184 187

CONTINUED

On SH-AWD models

Except SH-AWD models

Flat-bed Equipment

Wheel-lif t Equipment

This is the best way totransport your vehicle.The only way you can safely tow

your vehicle is with flat-bedequipment.

This is an acceptableway to tow your vehicle.

Emergency TowingTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

607

Towing with only two tires on theground will damage parts of theall-wheel-drive system. Your vehicleshould be transported on a f lat-bedtruck or trailer.

12/07/20 11:48:16 31TK4640_612

＊

＊With the front wheels on the ground,it is best to tow the vehicle no fartherthan 50 miles (80 km), and keep thespeed below 35 mph (55 km/h).

If your vehicle is equipped with afront spoiler, remove it beforetowing so it is not damaged.

Models equipped with thekeyless access system have anengine start/stop button insteadof an ignition switch.ACCESSORY Mode is theequivalent of ACCESSORY (I).For more information, see pages

and .

:

184 187

Emergency Towing

608

Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the vehicle’s weight.

Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine (automatic transmission), yourvehicle must be transported with thef ront wheels of f the ground.

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)position, and make sure the steeringwheel turns f reely bef ore you begintowing.

On models with the Keyless Accesssystem, the ENGINE START/STOPBUTTON indicator will conf irm thatthe power mode is in the ACCESSORYmode and that the steering lock isreleased. If the steering wheel does notturn f reely, rotate the wheel right andlef t while pressing the ENGINESTART/STOP BUTTON. Thisinf ormation also appears on the multi-inf ormation display (see page ).189

12/07/20 11:48:22 31TK4640_613

To use the towing hook:

Remove the cover from the frontbumper using your fingers, or pryit off using a cloth and a flat-tipscrewdriver to prevent scratches.

If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,mud, or snow, call a towing serviceto pull it out (see page ).

When you need to release thesteering lock while your vehicle’sbattery is dead, do this:

Follow the proper jump startingprocedures, Step 1 through Step 5,to apply the power to your vehicle(see pages and ).

Follow the jump startingprocedures, Step 8 and Step 9, andthe instructions to disconnect thejumper cable (see page ). Thesteering will remain unlocked evenif the battery is dead.

Failure to comply means the steeringlock may be damaged.

Press the ENGINE START/STOPbutton to set the power mode toACCESSORY (see page ) andverify the steering lock is released.

Remove the towing hook andwheel nut wrench from the toolcase in the spare tire (see page

).

For very short distances, such asfreeing the vehicle, you can use thedetachable towing hook that mountson the anchor in the front bumper.

If you slip the clutch for a long timewhile trying to get unstuck, you mayoverheat and damage thetransmission. Use a tow service toprevent transmission damage.

1.

2.

1.

2.

3.

591 592

184

592

607

584

CONTINUED

On models with keyless access system If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

Emergency Towing, If Your Vehicle Gets StuckTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

609

12/07/20 11:48:32 31TK4640_614

Screw the towing hook into thehole, and tighten it with the wheelnut wrench.

3.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

610

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

To avoid damage to your vehicle, usethe towing hook f or straight, f latground towing only. Do not tow at anangle. The tow hook should not be usedto tow the vehicle onto a f lat bed. Donot use it as a tie down.

12/07/20 11:48:36 31TK4640_615

－

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 612................................Specifications . 614

DOT Tire Quality Grading..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 617

.................................Tire Labeling . 619Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) Required Federal............................Explanation . 621

.......................Emissions Controls . 623Three Way Catalytic

.................................Converters . 625........................Emissions Testing . 626

..Devices that Emit Radio Waves . 628

Technical InformationTechnicalInform

ation

611

12/07/20 11:48:39 31TK4640_616

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers located in various places.

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourdealer uses to register your vehiclefor warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour vehicle. The easiest place tofind the VIN is on a plate fastened tothe top of the dashboard. You cansee it by looking through thewindshield on the driver’s side. It isalso on the certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on thecertification label.

Identif ication Numbers

612

CERTIFICATION LABEL

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

12/07/20 11:48:43 31TK4640_617

The engine number is stamped intothe engine block.

The transmission number is on alabel on the side of the transmission.

Identif ication NumbersTechnicalInform

ation

613

MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER

ENGINE NUMBER AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

12/07/20 11:48:47 31TK4640_618

－－

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications

614

CapacitiesDimensions

Weights

Seating Capacities

Air Conditioning

194.0 in (4,928 mm)18.5 US gal (70 )

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengineReserve tank capacity: 0.182 US gal (0.69 )Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

6.1 US qt (5.8 )2.6 US qt (2.5 )

0.48 US qt (0.45 )0.45 US qt (0.43 )

2.93 US qt (2.77 )2.67 US qt (2.53 )

1.66 US gal (6.3 )2.19 US gal (8.3 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )4.2 US qt (4.0 )5.3 US qt (5.0 )

3.3 US qt (3.1 )3.3 US qt (3.1 )

7.5 US qt (7.1 )8.2 US qt (7.8 )2.2 US qt (2.1 )2.6 US qt (2.5 )

Fuel tank

EnginecoolantEngine oil

Automatictransmissionfluid

ManualtransmissionfluidReardifferentialfluid (SH-AWD)Transferassemblyfluid (SH-AWD)Windshieldwasherreservoir

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

74.0 in (1,880 mm)57.2 in (1,452 mm)109.3 in (2,775 mm)63.2 in (1,605.5 mm)63.8 in (1,620 mm)

Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

TotalFrontRear

523

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

HFC-134a (R-134a)17.8 19.6 oz (505 555 g)

ND-OIL8

Approx.

FrontRear

ChangeTotal

ChangeTotal

ChangeTotalChange

Including filterWithout filter

TotalChange

Total

U.S. VehicleCanada Vehicle

2WDSH-AWD

2WDSH-AWD

1 :

2 :

ChangeTotal

1

2

12/07/20 11:49:04 31TK4640_619

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

CONTINUED

SpecificationsTechnicalInform

ation

615

Engine (2WD)Lights

Fuses

Engine (SH-AWD)

3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)

Water cooled 4-strokeSOHC VTEC 6-cylinder (V6),

gasoline engine

212 cu-in (3,471 cm )11.2 : 1

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

On vehicles with high voltage discharge type low beam headlights,replacement of a bulb should be performed by your dealer.

Headlight (Low beam )Headlight (High beam/DRL)Front turn signal/parkinglightsFront side marker lightsFront fog lightsRear turn signal lightsBack-up lightsRear side marker lightsStop/taillightsSide turn signal lightsHigh-mount brake lightLicense plate lightsTrunk lightDoor courtesy lightsVanity mirror lightsConsole compartment lightGlove box LightFoot light

35 W (D2S)60 W (HB3)28/8 W

3 CP55 W (H11)21 W16 W3 CP

3 CP5 W3.4 W1.4 W1.4 W1.4 W

Interior

Under-hood

See pages 606 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door.See page 604 or the fuse boxcover.

DILZKR7A11G

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

3.54 x 3.78 in (90.0 x 96.0 mm)223.5 cu-in (3,664 cm )

11.2 : 1ILZKR7B-11SSXU22HCR11S

Water cooled 4-strokeSOHC VTEC 6-cylinder (V6),

gasoline engine

See pages 605 or the fuse labelattached on the under panel.

NGK:

NGK:

DENSO:

1 :

2 : Replacement of a light bulb should be done by your dealer.

LEDDriver’s side

Passenger’s side

LEDLEDLED

(Amber)

(Amber)

1

2

2

2

2

13/08/08 17:00:40 31TK4650_620

－－

＊＊＊＊＊＊

＊＊

＊＊

＊＊＊＊

＊＊＊＊＊＊

＊＊＊＊＊＊

＊＊

＊＊

＊＊

Specifications

616

Tires

Alignment

P245/50R17 98VP245/45R18 96VP245/40R19 94V

T135/80D17 103M32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

34 psi (235 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

34 psi (235 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Size

Pressure

Toe-in

Camber

Caster 3.8°1°

0.5°0.08 in (2.0 mm)0.00 in (0.0 mm)

TL

SH-AWD

FrontRearFrontRearFront

Front/Rear

SpareFront

Rear

Spare

TL with Technology PackageTL with Advance Package and Canadian Elite Package

SH-AWD with Technology PackageSH-AWD with Advance Package and Canadian SH-AWD ElitePackage

1 :2 :3 :4 :5 :6 :

7 :8 :

TL Special Edition (2WD)SH-AWD Special Edition

1, 2

3, 4, 5, 7

1, 2, 3, 4,5, 7

1, 2, 3, 4,5, 7

6, 8

6, 8

6, 8

13/08/08 17:00:50 31TK4650_621

The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder andmaximum section width. Forexample:

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Treadwear Traction

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)TechnicalInform

ation

617

12/07/20 11:49:41 31TK4640_622

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading,either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Temperature

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

618

12/07/20 11:49:45 31TK4640_623

－

－

－

－

－

－

－The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).

Tire width in millimeters.

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

Rim diameter in inches.

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Following is an exampleof tire size with an explanation ofwhat each component means.

P

R

17

245

50

V

98

CONTINUED

Tire Size

Tire LabelingTechnicalInform

ation

619

Tire Size

(1)

(1)

Tire Identification Number (TIN)(3) Maximum Tire Pressure(4) Maximum Tire Load

(2)(3)

(4)

(2)(1)

TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE

P245/50R17 98V

12/07/20 11:49:57 31TK4640_624

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

The tire identification number (TIN)is a group of numbers and lettersthat look like the following example.TIN is located on the sidewall of thetire.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

Tire type code.

Date of manufacture.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

Cold Tire Pressure The tire airpressure when the vehicle has beenparked for at least three hours ordriven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Load Rating Means the maximumload that a tire is rated to carry for agiven inflation pressure.

Maximum Inflation Pressure Themaximum tire air pressure that thetire can hold.

Maximum Load Rating Means theload rating for a tire at the maximumpermissible inflation pressure forthat tire.

Recommended Inflation PressureThe cold tire inflation pressurerecommended by the manufacturer.

Treadwear Indicators (TWI)Means the projections within theprincipal grooves designed to give avisual indication of the degrees ofwear of the tread.

DOT

B97R

FW6X

2202YearWeek

Tire Identif ication Number (TIN) Glossary of Tire Terminology

Tire Labeling

620

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

12/07/20 11:50:07 31TK4640_625

－

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of adifferent size than the size indicatedon the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale

when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

CONTINUED

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal ExplanationTechnicalInform

ation

621

12/07/20 11:50:14 31TK4640_626

－

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicatorto indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combinedwith the low tire pressure telltale.When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as longas the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

622

12/07/20 11:50:19 31TK4640_627

＊

＊

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

In Canada, Acura vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positivecrankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to the

intake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

The Clean Air Act

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Emissions ControlsTechnicalInform

ation

623

12/07/20 11:50:26 31TK4640_628

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,ignition timing control, exhaust gasrecirculation, and three way catalyticconverter. These four systems worktogether to control the engine’scombustion and minimize theamount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcome out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to worktogether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newAcura replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.The PGM-FI system uses sequential

multiport fuel injection. It has threesubsystems: air intake, enginecontrol, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM) inautomatic transmission vehicles orthe engine control module (ECM) inmanual transmission vehicles usesvarious sensors to determine howmuch air is going into the engine. It

then controls how much fuel to injectunder all operating conditions.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)system takes some of the exhaustgas and routes it back into the intakemanifold. Adding exhaust gas to theair/fuel mixture reduces the amountof NOx produced when the fuel isburned.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

2

2

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Ignition Timing Control System

Emissions Controls

624

12/07/20 11:50:35 31TK4640_629

The three way catalytic converterscontain precious metals that serve ascatalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converters are referredto as three-way catalysts, since theyact on HC, CO, and NOx.Replacement units must be originalAcura parts or their equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertersmust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. They can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear them. Park your vehicle awayfrom high grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

Defective three way catalyticconverters contribute to air pollution,and can impair your engine’sperformance. Follow theseguidelines to protect your vehicle’sthree way catalytic converters.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic convertersineffective.

Keep the engine well maintained.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic ConvertersTechnicalInform

ation

625

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS

12/07/20 11:50:42 31TK4640_630

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

If you take your vehicle for anemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 6hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 40° and95°F (4° and 35°C).

Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic) or neutral (manual).Increase the engine speed to 2,000rpm, and hold it there until thetemperature gauge rises to at least1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, let the engine idle for 20seconds.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Testing of Readiness Codes

Emissions Testing

626

12/07/20 11:50:50 31TK4640_631

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 30minutes.

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD (automatic) or 5th (manual). Donot use the cruise control. Whentraffic allows, drive for 90 secondswithout moving the acceleratorpedal. (Vehicle speed may varyslightly; this is okay.) If you cannotdo this for a continuous 90seconds because of trafficconditions, drive for at least 30seconds, then repeat it two moretimes (for a total of 90 seconds).

7. 8.

9.

Emissions TestingTechnicalInform

ation

627

12/07/20 11:50:54 31TK4640_632

Audio SystemAudio

HandsFreeLinkHomeLink Universal TransceiverAcuraLinkImmobilizer SystemRemote TransmitterKeyless Access SystemTire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)Blind Spot Information (BSI)

The following products and systemson your vehicle emit radio waveswhen in operation.

Each of the above complies with theappropriate requirements or therequired standards of FCC (FederalCommunications Commission) andIndustry Canada Standard, describedas follows:

BluetoothBluetooth

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-Gen/210/310.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

Devices that Emit Radio Waves

628

12/07/20 11:51:05 31TK4640_633

..........Client Service Information . 630....................Warranty Coverages . 631

.............Reporting Safety Defects . 632.....................Authorized Manuals . 633

Warranty and Client RelationsW

arrantyand

ClientR

elations

629

12/07/20 11:51:08 31TK4640_634

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please giveus this information:

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact Acura ClientRelations

Acura dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )

Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicle

Date of purchase

Odometer reading of your vehicle

Your name, address, and tele-phone number

A detailed description of theproblem

Name of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

612

Client Service Information

630

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Acura Client RelationsMail Stop 500-2N-7E1919 Torrance Blvd.Torrance, CA 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 382-2238

Honda Canada Inc.Acura Client Services180 Honda BoulevardMarkham, ONL6C 0H9

Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9Fax: 1-877-939-0909E-Mail: [email protected]

Vortex Motor Corp.Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7546

12/07/20 11:51:16 31TK4640_635

－

－－

－

－

－

－

－

Your new Acura is covered by thesewarranties:

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered by a limited warranty.Please read your warranty bookletfor details.

covers all Acurareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

Acura accessories are covered underthis warranty. Time and mileagelimits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty manual fordetails.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

covers your new vehicle, except forthe emissions control systems andaccessories, against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty booklet for exactinformation.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2014 Acura Warranty Informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2014 warrantymanual that came with your vehicle.

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Warranty

andC

lientRelations

631

13/08/08 17:01:00 31TK4650_636

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition tonotifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists ina group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involvedin individual problems between you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle SafetyHotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

; or write to: Administrator,NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington,DC 20590.You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from .

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which couldcause a crash or could cause injury or death, you shouldimmediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may alsoinform Transport Canada.

To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations andRecalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For moreinformation on reporting safety defects or about motorvehicle safety, go to .

If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall andremedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannotbecome involved in individual problems between you,your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.

Reporting Safety Defects

In the US In Canada

632

http://www.saf ercar.gov

http://www.saf ercar.gov

http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsaf ety

12/07/20 11:51:30 31TK4640_637

Covers maintenance and recommended procedures forrepair to engine and chassis components. It is writtenfor the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enoughfor most mechanically inclined owners to understand.

Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depthtroubleshooting information for each electrical circuitin your vehicle.

Describes the procedures involved in the replacementof damaged body parts.

For electronic copies of service publications, you canpurchase a subscription to Service Express. Visit

for pricing and options.www.techinfo.honda.com

Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order amanual by phone at (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or onlineat www.helminc.com.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

Service Express

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals(U.S. only)

Authorized

Manuals

633

13/04/02 19:22:49 31TK4640_638

634

12/07/20 11:51:41 31TK4640_639

CONTINUED

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 65, 596............................Jump Starting . 591

..............................Maintenance . 577............................Specifications . 615

..............................Before Driving . 467....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 20

.........................Beverage Holders . 214Blind Spot Information System

...........................................(BSI) . 519

...................Audio . 281, 376

...............HandsFreeLink . 407, 424..................................Booster Seats . 54

Brakes...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 508

.............Break-in, New Linings . 468...........................................Fluid . 553

.......................................Parking . 212.................System Indicator . 65, 598........................Wear Indicators . 507

.............................Braking System . 507.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 468

Brightness Control,...............................Instruments . 143

....................................Built-In Key . 201Bulb Replacement

..........................Back-up Lights . 562.........Daytime Running Lights . 555

.................................Fog Lights . 560

.................................Headlights . 555............................Specifications . 615

............Turn Signal Lights . 558, 562......................Bulbs, Halogen . 555, 560

................................AAC . 273, 313, 365....................................Accessories . 479

ACCESSORY (Ignition Key.....................................Position) . 150

ACCESSORY Mode...................(Power Mode) . 184, 185

............Accessory Power Sockets . 215................Active Head Restraints . 165

....................................AcuraLink . 449....................Additives, Engine Oil . 544

...........................Advanced Airbags . 28...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 24

..........Airbag System Components . 24......Air Conditioning System . 226, 227

.........................................Usage . 228...............Air Pressure, Tires . 568, 570

......................................Antifreeze . 546Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

...............................Indicator . 66, 508...................................Operation . 508

..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 390Anti-theft Steering Column

....................................Lock . 150, 189................................Audio System . 235

.Automatic Lighting Off Feature . 141

...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 22.............Automatic Speed Control . 401..............Automatic Transmission . 494

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 614...............Checking Fluid Level . 549

..........................Paddle Shifters . 499.......................................Shifting . 495

Shift Lever Position...............................Indicators . 494

....................Shift Lock Release . 497......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 389

BluetoothBluetooth

Index

A

B

IND

EX

I

13/08/08 17:01:05 31TK4650_640

............................Capacities Chart . 614.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 57

............................Carrying, Cargo . 481.............CAUTION, Explanation of . iv

.........................................CD Care . 381...................................CD Changer . 253

.......................................CD Player . 307........................Certification Label . 612

............................................Chains . 575....................Changing a Flat Tire . 583

Changing Oil........................................How to . 544......................................When to . 531

...Charging System Indicator . 65, 596............Checklist, Before Driving . 486

.....................................Child Safety . 37..............................Booster Seats . 54

...................................Child Seats . 45..........................................Infants . 42

............................Large Children . 53.........................................LATCH . 47

......................Risks with Airbags . 38.............................Small Children . 43

.........................................Tethers . 51

.....................Warning Labels . 39, 59.........Where Should a Child Sit? . 38

.......................................Child Seats . 45.........................................LATCH . 47

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 51................Childproof Door Locks . 153................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 564

..........Client Service Information . 630.......Climate Control System . 226, 227

..........................On/Off Button . 229..............................................Clock . 391

...................................Clutch Fluid . 554..................CO in the Exhaust . 57, 623

....Cold Weather, Starting in . 487, 489......................Compact Spare Tire . 582

.........................................Compass . 397.................Console Compartment . 216.................Consumer Information . 630

.............Controls, Instruments and . 61Coolant

........................................Adding . 546....................................Checking . 475

.........................Proper Solution . 546...................Temperature Gauge . 77

........Water Temp Hot Message . 77

Crankcase Emissions Control........................................System . 623

................Cruise Control Indicator . 72............Cruise Control Operation . 401

...................................Cup Holders . 214.............Customer Service Office . 630

........................Customized Settings .94

...............DANGER, Explanation of . iv...................................Dashboard . 3, 62

..............Daytime Running Lights . 142.................................Dead Battery . 591

............Defects, Reporting Safety . 632..............Defogger, Rear Window . 145..............Defrosting the Windows . 231

..Devices that Emit Radio Waves . 628....................................Dimensions . 614

.............Dimming the Headlights . 139Dipstick

..........Automatic Transmission . 549..................................Engine Oil . 474

........................Directional Signals . 139........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 507

.................................Disc Changer . 253

Index

D

C

II

12/08/03 21:01:56 31TK4640_641

＊

CONTINUED

..............................Economy, Fuel . 476Electronic Stability Control

............................(ESC) System . 510

..................................Emergencies . 581.............Battery, Jump Starting . 591...........Brake System Indicator . 598

................Changing a Flat Tire . 583.....Charging System Indicator . 596

..................Checking the Fuses . 600.......Hazard Warning Flashers . 145

.........If the Engine Won’t Start . 588......If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck . 609

............................Jump Starting . 591.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 595...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 597

Manually Opening Fuel Fill.......................................Door . 599

..................Overheated Engine . 593.......................................Towing . 607

.........................Emergency Brake . 212..............Emergency Engine Start . 490

....................Emergency Flashers . 145......................Emergency Towing . 607

..........Emergency Trunk Opener . 156.......................Emissions Controls . 623........................Emissions Testing . 626

Engine............Adding Engine Coolant . 546

....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 77

.........................If It Won’t Start . 588Malfunction Indicator

................................Lamp . 64, 597.................................Oil Life . 86, 531

........Oil Pressure Indicator . 64, 595

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 543...............................Overheating . 593

............................Specifications . 615

....................Speed Limiter . 492, 497.............Start/Stop Button . 183, 188

..............................Starting . 487, 489Starting System

.........................Message . 488, 490......Engine Compartment Covers . 542

..............................Engine Coolant . 546....Engine Start/Stop Button . 183, 188

......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 469.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 623

...............................Exhaust Fumes . 57Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

........................................Belts by . 18

...Disc Changer Error Messages . 263.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 546

Doors.....Lock Button, Outer Handle . 176

..........Lockout Prevention . 153, 177.................Monitor Indicator . 12, 71....................Power Door Locks . 151

.Unlock Sensor, Outer Handle . 175........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 617

Downshifting,..............Manual Transmission . 491

....................D-Paddle Shift Mode . 499...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

...........................................Driving . 485....................................Economy . 476

Driving Position Memory........................................System . 170

Dual Temperature and Mode.......................................Control . 232

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 566

IndexIN

DE

X

E

III

13/08/08 17:01:09 31TK4650_642

...................................Fan, Interior . 230.........................................Features . 225

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 470Filters

.........................Dust and Pollen . 566...............................................Oil . 544

...........Flashers, Hazard Warning . 145...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 583

.....................................Floor Mats . 565Fluids

..........Automatic Transmission . 549..........................................Brake . 553.........................................Clutch . 554

..............Manual Transmission . 551................Windshield Washers . 548

FM Stereo Radio...................................Reception . 385

.....................................Fog Lights . 143........................Four-way Flashers . 145

..............................Front Airbags . 9, 26....................................Front Seats . 161....................................Adjusting . 161

.....................................Airbags . 9, 26..............................Heaters . 202, 204

.................................Ventilation . 204.................................................Fuel . 468

......................Fill Door and Cap . 470...........................................Gauge . 76

.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 73................Octane Requirement . 468

...............................Oxygenated . 469........................Tank, Filling the . 470

...............................Fuel Economy . 476.....................Fuses, Checking the . 601

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 476.........................................Gasoline . 468...........................................Gauge . 76

.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 73................Octane Requirement . 468

........................Tank, Refueling . 470................Gas Station Procedures . 470

Gauges...Engine Coolant Temperature . 77

...............................................Fuel . 76Gearshift Lever Positions

..........Automatic Transmission . 494..............Manual Transmission . 491

......................................Glove Box . 216Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

.............................(GVWR) . 483, 614

.......................Halogen Bulbs . 555, 560......HandsFreeLink (HFL) . 407, 424

............Hazard Warning Flashers . 145Hard Disc Drive (HDD),

........................................Playing . 320.....................................Headlights . 139

........................................Aiming . 555............Automatic Lighting Off . 141............Automatic Lighting On . 140

.........Daytime Running Lights . 142..................High Beam Indicator . 71

.......................Reminder Beeps . 139........................Replacing Bulbs . 555

.................................Turning on . 139.....................................Washers . 138

............................Head Restraints . 162.............................Heated Mirrors . 169

...........................Heater, Seat . 202, 204...............High-Low Beam Switch . 140

.............................Hill Start Assist . 512

Index

H

G

F

IV

12/08/03 21:02:05 31TK4640_643

CONTINUED

HomeLink Universal................................Transceiver . 404

........Hood, Opening and Closing . 472...........................................Horn . 4, 136

...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 554

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 584.......................................Jack, Tire . 584

................................Jump Starting . 591

.......Keyless Access Remote . 174, 179Keyless Access Remote System

...............................Main Switch . 195................Keyless Access System . 173

................................................Keys . 147........................................Built-In . 201

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 612Ignition

............................................Keys . 147.........................................Switch . 150

............Timing Control System . 624......................Immobilizer System . 149

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6...............Indicators/Messages . 64, 90

......ABS (Anti-Lock Brake) . 66, 508Blind Spot Information

...................System (BSI) . 75, 521Brake (Parking and Brake

............................System) . 65, 598................Charging System . 65, 596

.............................Cruise Control . 72.............................Door Open . 12, 71...................................Fog Lights . 71...................................High Beam . 71

.................................Hot Coolant . 77........Key (Immobilizer System) . 65

..............Keyless Access System . 74.....................................Lights On . 71......................................Low Fuel . 73

................Low Oil Pressure . 64, 595.........Low Tire Pressure/TPMS . 69

...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 597.................................Seat Belt . 20, 64

.....................Side Airbag Off . 33, 67.........................................SRS . 32, 67

.................Starting System . 488, 490...........................Trunk Open . 12, 71

Turn Signal and Hazard...................................Warning . 70

........................................VSA Off . 68.................................VSA System . 68

..................Individual Map Lights . 221.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 64

...............................Infant Restraint . 42......................................Infant Seats . 42

.........................................LATCH . 47..........Tether Anchorage Points . 51

...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 568.................................Inside Mirror . 167

.............................Inspection, Tire . 571

....................Installing a Child Seat . 46..........Tether Anchorage Points . 51

.............................Using LATCH . 47............................Instrument Panel . 63

......Instrument Panel Brightness . 143...............................Interior Lights . 220

........................................Introduction . i

IndexIN

DE

X

I

J

K

V

13/08/08 17:02:58 31TK4650_644

..................................Maintenance . 529Main Items and Sub

..............................Items . 536, 540........................................Minder . 531

Owner’s Maintenance...................................Checks . 539

..........................................Safety . 530Malfunction Indicator

....................................Lamp . 64, 597...................Manual Transmission . 491

........Manual Transmission Fluid . 551....................................Map Lights . 221

...........Memory, Driving Position . 170.........................Meters, Gauges . 63, 76

........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 167...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 480

.......................................Moonroof . 210

.............Multi-Information Display . 78..............................Music by Voice . 334

...................Neutral Gear Position . 496..................New Vehicle Break-in . 468

............Normal Shift Speeds . 492, 503...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i

...............Numbers, Identification . 612

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 468.........................................Odometer . 82

Oil........................Change, How to . 544......................Change, When to . 531......................Checking Engine . 474..............Pressure Indicator . 64, 595

Selecting Proper Viscosity..............................Chart . 543, 544

.........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 150....ON Mode (Power Mode) . 184, 185

Onboard Refueling Vapor....................................Recovery . 623

.......................Label, Certification . 612...............Lane Change, Signaling . 139

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 16, 21...............................LATCH System . 47

................Lights Control Buttons . 220Lights

....................Bulb Replacement . 555.......................................Indicator . 63

.......................................Parking . 139..........................Turn Signal . 70, 139

....................................Load Limits . 482....LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 150

LOCK VEHICLE OFF...................(Power Mode) . 184, 185

..............Lockout Prevention . 153, 177Locks

Anti-theft Steering...........................Column . 150, 189

........................Childproof Door . 153............................Fuel Fill Door . 470

..................................Glove Box . 216...............................Power Door . 151

.........................................Trunk . 154......Trunk Pass-through Cover . 166

........................Low Coolant Level . 475.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 73

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 64, 595................................Lower Anchors . 47

...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 614...........Luggage, Storing (Cargo) . 481

Index

M

N

L

O

VI

13/08/08 17:03:03 31TK4650_645

CONTINUED

..............................Paddle Shifters . 499............Panel Brightness Control . 143

........................Park Gear Position . 495...........................................Parking . 506

...............................Parking Brake . 212Parking Brake and Brake

.................System Indicator . 65, 598...............................Parking Lights . 139

..Parking Over Things that Burn . 506

....Passenger Airbag Off Indicator . 34.............................PGM-FI System . 624

..................Phonetic Modification . 335...................................Pollen Filter . 566..................................Power Mode . 184

.................ACCESSORY Mode . 185...................................ON Mode . 185

....................START Mode . 187, 188

..............VEHICLE OFF Mode . 185...............Power Socket Locations . 213

............................Power Windows . 206.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 18.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11

...Additional Safety Precautions . 19.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18

........................Protecting Children . 37.....................General Guidelines . 37

.......................Protecting Infants . 42.......Protecting Larger Children . 53

.........Protecting Small Children . 43Using Child Seats with

.....................................Tethers . 51.............................Using LATCH . 47

..................Protecting Your Discs . 381

...........................Operating Range . 174............................Outside Mirrors . 168

.....................Outside Temperature . 86....................Overheating, Engine . 593

....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 539.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 469

...................Radiator Overheating . 593...Radio/Disc Sound System . 236, 285

.................Radio Theft Protection . 390............................Radio, XM . 246, 299

...................Readiness Codes . 597, 626..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 562

........................Rear Seat Armrest . 166

...Rearview Camera and Monitor . 465...........................Rearview Mirror . 167

...............Rear Window Defogger . 145.............Reclining the Seat Backs . 161

Recommended Shift................................Speeds . 492, 503........................................Refueling . 470

.......................Reminder Indicators . 64Remote, Keyless Access

................................System . 174, 179................Remote Audio Controls . 387

.....................Remote Transmitter . 157Replacement Information

..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 566................Engine Oil and Filter . 544

..........................................Fuses . 600................................Light Bulbs . 555

........................................Minder . 531................................Timing Belt . 554

...........................................Tires . 573.............................Wiper Blades . 566

Replacing Seat Belts After a............................................Crash . 23

.............Reporting Safety Defects . 632

IndexIN

DE

X

P

R

VII

12/08/03 21:02:21 31TK4640_646

＊

Reserve Tank, Engine...............................Coolant . 475, 546

......................Reverse Tilt Mirror . 168...............................Restraint, Child . 37

..................Reverse Gear Position . 496................................Rotation, Tire . 573

..................................Safety Belts . 8, 20............Safety Defects, Reporting . 632

.................................Safety Features . 7...........................................Airbags . 9

.......................................Seat Belts . 8.............Safety Labels, Location of . 58

..............................Safety Messages . iii.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 20

...............Additional Information . 20Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 22.....................................Cleaning . 564

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 21................................Maintenance . 23

Reminder Indicator and................................Beeper . 20, 64

...................System Components . 20

...............Use During Pregnancy . 18..........................Seat Heaters . 202, 204

......................Seats, Adjusting the . 161.............................Seat Ventilation . 204............................Security System . 395

.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 45...Selector Knob (Disc Changer) . 236

..................Sequential Shift Mode . 501...............................Serial Number . 612..............................Service Minder . 531

...........................Service Manual . 633.........Service Station Procedures . 470

..........................Setting the Clock . 391........................SH-AWD Indicator . 73

...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 494........................Shift Lock Release . 497

................................Side Airbags . 9, 30........Side Airbag Off Indicator . 33, 67

......................Side Curtain Airbags . 32.............................Signaling Turns . 139

.....................................Snow Tires . 575................................Sound System . 235

Spare Tire......................................Inflating . 582

....................Specifications . 582, 616....................................Spark Plugs . 615

................................Specifications . 614

................................Speed Control . 401...................................Speedometer . 76

..........SRS, Additional Information . 24...Additional Safety Precautions . 36

.............................Airbag Service . 35......Airbag System Components . 24

How the Passenger Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 34

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 33

How the SRS Indicator.......................................Works . 32

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 26

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 30How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 32.............................SRS Indicator . 32, 67

..START (Ignition Key Position) . 150START Mode

...................(Power Mode) . 184, 185...Start/Stop Button, Engine . 183, 188

Index

S

VIII

13/08/08 17:03:08 31TK4650_647

＊

CONTINUED.....................................Tachometer . 76

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 581Technical Descriptions

....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 617.....Emissions Control Systems . 623

Three Way Catalytic.......................Converter . 624, 625

.......................Temperature Gauge . 77....................Temperature, Outside . 86

........Temperature, Inside Sensor . 234..............Tether Anchorage Points . 51

................Theft Protection, Radio . 390..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 625

.........Tighten Fuel Cap Message . 471................Tilt the Steering Wheel . 146

..........................Time, Setting the . 391....................................Tire Chains . 575

.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 583...........................Tire Information . 617

.................................Tire Labeling . 619Tire Pressure Monitoring

....................System (TPMS) . 514Low Tire Pressure/TPMS

...........................Indicator . 69, 514......................Pressure Monitor . 515

Required Federal............................Explanation . 621

..............TPMS System Failure . 517...............................................Tires . 568

......................Air Pressure . 568, 570........................................Chains . 575

.........................Checking Wear . 571..........................Compact Spare . 582

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 617.Glossary of Tire Terminology . 620

......................................Inflation . 568..................................Inspection . 571...................................Replacing . 573

......................................Rotating . 573................................Service Life . 572

...........................................Snow . 575....................Specifications . 574, 616

.......................Traction Devices . 575..........................Winter Driving . 575

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 584Torque Distribution Monitor

...............................(SH-AWD ) . 504Towing

.....................................A Trailer . 528................Emergency Wrecker . 607

...........................................Hook . 609

..............Starting the Engine . 487, 489....Check Starting System . 488, 490

In Cold Weather at High..........................Altitude . 487, 489

................With a Dead Battery . 591........Steam Coming from Engine . 593

Steering Wheel..............................Adjustments . 146

...Anti-theft Column Lock . 150, 189Steering Wheel

..............Buttons . 387, 401, 407, 425...................Stereo Sound System . 235....................Storing Your Vehicle . 578

......................................Sun Visors . 217........................Sunglasses Holder . 218

Super Handling All-Wheel...Drive (TM) (SH-AWD ) . 73, 504

....Supplemental Restraint System . 24......................................Servicing . 35

...............................SRS Indicator . 32...................System Components . 24

..................................Synthetic Oil . 544

IndexIN

DE

XT

IX

13/08/08 17:03:13 31TK4650_648

................................Vanity Mirror . 217.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 482

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 614VEHICLE OFF Mode

...................(Power Mode) . 184, 185....Vehicle Identification Number . 612

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ),aka Electronic Stability

....Control (ESC), System . 510...............VSA Off Indicator . 68, 510

.......................VSA OFF Switch . 511........VSA System Indicator . 68, 510

.............................Vehicle Storage . 578.................................................VIN . 612

.........................Viscosity, Oil . 543, 544...........Voice Control System . 228, 285

............WARNING, Explanation of . iv

.........Warning Labels, Location of . 58....................Warranty Coverages . 631

Washer, Windshield................Fluid Level Message . 548

...................................Operation . 137............................Reserve Tank . 548

Wheels.............Adjusting the Steering . 146............Alignment and Balance . 573

..........................Compact Spare . 582..............................Wrench, Nut . 584

Windows.............................Auto Reverse . 207

................Operating the Power . 206.........................Rear, Defogger . 145

Windshield.....................................Cleaning . 137...................................Defroster . 231

.....................................Washers . 137Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 566...................................Operation . 137....................................Worn Tires . 571

.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 607

...........................Traction Devices . 575Transmission

Checking Fluid Level,..............................Automatic . 549

Checking Fluid Level,...................................Manual . 551

..................Fluid Selection . 550, 551..............Identification Number . 613.............Shifting the Automatic . 495

..................Shifting the Manual . 491.....................................Treadwear . 617

................................Trip Computer . 84.......................................Trip Meter . 83

..............................................Trunk . 154..................Emergency Opener . 156

...............................Opening the . 154............................Open Indicator . 71

.............Open Monitor Indicator . 12..................................Turn Signals . 139

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 581

....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 617........................Unleaded Gasoline . 468

USB Adapter..................Cable . 266, 275, 356, 367

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 546

Index

U

V

W

X

12/08/03 21:02:36 31TK4640_649

＊

.............................XM Radio . 246, 299

U.S.:

IndexIN

DE

X

X

XI

12/08/03 21:02:39 31TK4640_650

12/07/20 11:52:36 31TK4640_652

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Transfer Assembly Fluid:

Rear Differential Fluid:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Brake Fluid:

Manual Transmission Fluid:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Spare Tire Pressure:

Capacity:

Premium unleaded gasoline,pump octane number of 91 orhigher required (see ‘‘FuelRecommendations’’ on page ).

18.5 US gal (70 )

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Use Acura All-Wheel Drive Fluid(DPSF) only.

SH-AWD differential case2.67 US qt (2.53 )

SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosityhypoid gear oil, API serviceclassified GL4 or GL5 only.

Capacity:2.2 US qt (2.1 )

Acura ATF DW-1 (automatictransmission fluid) (see page ).

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

API Premium grade 0W-20detergent oil (see page ).

API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

Acura Manual Transmission Fluidpreferred, or an SAE 0W-20 or5W-20 motor oil as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

34 psi (235 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )Front/Rear:

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )Front/Rear:

468

552

553

544

543

550

All models except SH-AWD withAdvance Package, SH-AWDSpecial Edition, and CanadianSH-AWD Elite Package

SH-AWD with Advance Package,SH-AWD Special Edition, andCanadian SH-AWD Elite Package

2WD models

SH-AWD models

All models

SH-AWD models

13/08/08 17:03:31 31TK4650_653

Documents

2014 TL Owner's Manual (Unlinked) - techinfo.honda.comtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/K41414/K41414OM.pdf · 2014 TL Owner’s Manual ... Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right,